REPUBLIC ACT NO.

386
AN ACT TO ORDAIN AND INSTITUTE
THE CIVIL CODE OF THE PHILIPPINES

PRELIMINARY TITLE

CHAPTER I
EFFECT AND APPLICATION OF LAWS

Article 1. This Act shall be known as the "Civil Code of the Philippines." (n)

Art. 2. Laws shall take effect after fifteen days following the completion of their publication in the Official Gazette,
unless it is otherwise provided. This Code shall take effect one year after such publication. (1a)

Art. 3. Ignorance of the law excuses no one from compliance therewith. (2)

Art. 4. Laws shall have no retroactive effect, unless the contrary is provided. (3)

Art. 5. Acts executed against the provisions of mandatory or prohibitory laws shall be void, except when the law
itself authorizes their validity. (4a)

Art. 6. Rights may be waived, unless the waiver is contrary to law, public order, public policy, morals, or good
customs, or prejudicial to a third person with a right recognized by law. (4a)

Art. 7. Laws are repealed only by subsequent ones, and their violation or non-observance shall not be excused by
disuse, or custom or practice to the contrary.

When the courts declared a law to be inconsistent with the Constitution, the former shall be void and the latter
shall govern.

Administrative or executive acts, orders and regulations shall be valid only when they are not contrary to the laws
or the Constitution. (5a)

Art. 8. Judicial decisions applying or interpreting the laws or the Constitution shall form a part of the legal system
of the Philippines. (n)

Art. 9. No judge or court shall decline to render judgment by reason of the silence, obscurity or insufficiency of the
laws. (6)

Art. 10. In case of doubt in the interpretation or application of laws, it is presumed that the lawmaking body
intended right and justice to prevail. (n)

Art. 11. Customs which are contrary to law, public order or public policy shall not be countenanced. (n)

Art. 12. A custom must be proved as a fact, according to the rules of evidence. (n)

231
Art. 13. When the laws speak of years, months, days or nights, it shall be understood that years are of three
hundred sixty-five days each; months, of thirty days; days, of twenty-four hours; and nights from sunset to sunrise.

If months are designated by their name, they shall be computed by the number of days which they respectively
have.

In computing a period, the first day shall be excluded, and the last day included. (7a)

Art. 14. Penal laws and those of public security and safety shall be obligatory upon all who live or sojourn in the
Philippine territory, subject to the principles of public international law and to treaty stipulations. (8a)

Art. 15. Laws relating to family rights and duties, or to the status, condition and legal capacity of persons are
binding upon citizens of the Philippines, even though living abroad. (9a)

Art. 16. Real property as well as personal property is subject to the law of the country where it is stipulated.

However, intestate and testamentary successions, both with respect to the order of succession and to the amount
of successional rights and to the intrinsic validity of testamentary provisions, shall be regulated by the national law
of the person whose succession is under consideration, whatever may be the nature of the property and regardless
of the country wherein said property may be found. (10a)

Art. 17. The forms and solemnities of contracts, wills, and other public instruments shall be governed by the laws
of the country in which they are executed.

When the acts referred to are executed before the diplomatic or consular officials of the Republic of the Philippines
in a foreign country, the solemnities established by Philippine laws shall be observed in their execution.

Prohibitive laws concerning persons, their acts or property, and those which have, for their object, public order,
public policy and good customs shall not be rendered ineffective by laws or judgments promulgated, or by
determinations or conventions agreed upon in a foreign country. (11a)

Art. 18. In matters which are governed by the Code of Commerce and special laws, their deficiency shall be
supplied by the provisions of this Code. (16a)

CHAPTER 2
HUMAN RELATIONS (n)

Art. 19. Every person must, in the exercise of his rights and in the performance of his duties, act with justice, give
everyone his due, and observe honesty and good faith.

Art. 20. Every person who, contrary to law, wilfully or negligently causes damage to another, shall indemnify the
latter for the same.

Art. 21. Any person who wilfully causes loss or injury to another in a manner that is contrary to morals, good
customs or public policy shall compensate the latter for the damage.

Art. 22. Every person who through an act of performance by another, or any other means, acquires or comes into
possession of something at the expense of the latter without just or legal ground, shall return the same to him.

231
Art. 23. Even when an act or event causing damage to another's property was not due to the fault or negligence of
the defendant, the latter shall be liable for indemnity if through the act or event he was benefited.

Art. 24. In all contractual, property or other relations, when one of the parties is at a disadvantage on account of
his moral dependence, ignorance, indigence, mental weakness, tender age or other handicap, the courts must be
vigilant for his protection.

Art. 25. Thoughtless extravagance in expenses for pleasure or display during a period of acute public want or
emergency may be stopped by order of the courts at the instance of any government or private charitable
institution.

Art. 26. Every person shall respect the dignity, personality, privacy and peace of mind of his neighbors and other
persons. The following and similar acts, though they may not constitute a criminal offense, shall produce a cause of
action for damages, prevention and other relief:

(1) Prying into the privacy of another's residence:

(2) Meddling with or disturbing the private life or family relations of another;

(3) Intriguing to cause another to be alienated from his friends;

(4) Vexing or humiliating another on account of his religious beliefs, lowly station in life, place of birth,
physical defect, or other personal condition.

Art. 27. Any person suffering material or moral loss because a public servant or employee refuses or neglects,
without just cause, to perform his official duty may file an action for damages and other relief against he latter,
without prejudice to any disciplinary administrative action that may be taken.

Art. 28. Unfair competition in agricultural, commercial or industrial enterprises or in labor through the use of force,
intimidation, deceit, machination or any other unjust, oppressive or highhanded method shall give rise to a right of
action by the person who thereby suffers damage.

Art. 29. When the accused in a criminal prosecution is acquitted on the ground that his guilt has not been proved
beyond reasonable doubt, a civil action for damages for the same act or omission may be instituted. Such action
requires only a preponderance of evidence. Upon motion of the defendant, the court may require the plaintiff to
file a bond to answer for damages in case the complaint should be found to be malicious.

If in a criminal case the judgment of acquittal is based upon reasonable doubt, the court shall so declare. In the
absence of any declaration to that effect, it may be inferred from the text of the decision whether or not the
acquittal is due to that ground.

Art. 30. When a separate civil action is brought to demand civil liability arising from a criminal offense, and no
criminal proceedings are instituted during the pendency of the civil case, a preponderance of evidence shall
likewise be sufficient to prove the act complained of.

Art. 31. When the civil action is based on an obligation not arising from the act or omission complained of as a
felony, such civil action may proceed independently of the criminal proceedings and regardless of the result of the
latter.

231
Art. 32. Any public officer or employee, or any private individual, who directly or indirectly obstructs, defeats,
violates or in any manner impedes or impairs any of the following rights and liberties of another person shall be
liable to the latter for damages:

(1) Freedom of religion;

(2) Freedom of speech;

(3) Freedom to write for the press or to maintain a periodical publication;

(4) Freedom from arbitrary or illegal detention;

(5) Freedom of suffrage;

(6) The right against deprivation of property without due process of law;

(7) The right to a just compensation when private property is taken for public use;

(8) The right to the equal protection of the laws;

(9) The right to be secure in one's person, house, papers, and effects against unreasonable searches and
seizures;

(10) The liberty of abode and of changing the same;

(11) The privacy of communication and correspondence;

(12) The right to become a member of associations or societies for purposes not contrary to law;

(13) The right to take part in a peaceable assembly to petition the government for redress of grievances;

(14) The right to be free from involuntary servitude in any form;

(15) The right of the accused against excessive bail;

(16) The right of the accused to be heard by himself and counsel, to be informed of the nature and cause
of the accusation against him, to have a speedy and public trial, to meet the witnesses face to face, and to
have compulsory process to secure the attendance of witness in his behalf;

(17) Freedom from being compelled to be a witness against one's self, or from being forced to confess
guilt, or from being induced by a promise of immunity or reward to make such confession, except when
the person confessing becomes a State witness;

(18) Freedom from excessive fines, or cruel and unusual punishment, unless the same is imposed or
inflicted in accordance with a statute which has not been judicially declared unconstitutional; and

(19) Freedom of access to the courts.

In any of the cases referred to in this article, whether or not the defendant's act or omission constitutes a criminal
offense, the aggrieved party has a right to commence an entirely separate and distinct civil action for damages, and

231
for other relief. Such civil action shall proceed independently of any criminal prosecution (if the latter be instituted),
and mat be proved by a preponderance of evidence.

The indemnity shall include moral damages. Exemplary damages may also be adjudicated.

The responsibility herein set forth is not demandable from a judge unless his act or omission constitutes a violation
of the Penal Code or other penal statute.

Art. 33. In cases of defamation, fraud, and physical injuries a civil action for damages, entirely separate and distinct
from the criminal action, may be brought by the injured party. Such civil action shall proceed independently of the
criminal prosecution, and shall require only a preponderance of evidence.

Art. 34. When a member of a city or municipal police force refuses or fails to render aid or protection to any person
in case of danger to life or property, such peace officer shall be primarily liable for damages, and the city or
municipality shall be subsidiary responsible therefore. The civil action herein recognized shall be independent of
any criminal proceedings, and a preponderance of evidence shall suffice to support such action.

Art. 35. When a person, claiming to be injured by a criminal offense, charges another with the same, for which no
independent civil action is granted in this Code or any special law, but the justice of the peace finds no reasonable
grounds to believe that a crime has been committed, or the prosecuting attorney refuses or fails to institute
criminal proceedings, the complaint may bring a civil action for damages against the alleged offender. Such civil
action may be supported by a preponderance of evidence. Upon the defendant's motion, the court may require
the plaintiff to file a bond to indemnify the defendant in case the complaint should be found to be malicious.

If during the pendency of the civil action, an information should be presented by the prosecuting attorney, the civil
action shall be suspended until the termination of the criminal proceedings.

Art. 36. Pre-judicial questions which must be decided before any criminal prosecution may be instituted or may
proceed, shall be governed by rules of court which the Supreme Court shall promulgate and which shall not be in
conflict with the provisions of this Code.

Title I. - CIVIL PERSONALITY

CHAPTER 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS

Art. 37. Juridical capacity, which is the fitness to be the subject of legal relations, is inherent in every natural
person and is lost only through death. Capacity to act, which is the power to do acts with legal effect, is acquired
and may be lost. (n)

Art. 38. Minority, insanity or imbecility, the state of being a deaf-mute, prodigality and civil interdiction are mere
restrictions on capacity to act, and do not exempt the incapacitated person from certain obligations, as when the
latter arise from his acts or from property relations, such as easements. (32a)

Art. 39. The following circumstances, among others, modify or limit capacity to act: age, insanity, imbecility, the
state of being a deaf-mute, penalty, prodigality, family relations, alienage, absence, insolvency and trusteeship. The
consequences of these circumstances are governed in this Code, other codes, the Rules of Court, and in special
laws. Capacity to act is not limited on account of religious belief or political opinion.

231
A married woman, twenty-one years of age or over, is qualified for all acts of civil life, except in cases specified by
law. (n)

CHAPTER 2
NATURAL PERSONS

Art. 40. Birth determines personality; but the conceived child shall be considered born for all purposes that are
favorable to it, provided it be born later with the conditions specified in the following article. (29a)

Art. 41. For civil purposes, the fetus is considered born if it is alive at the time it is completely delivered from the
mother's womb. However, if the fetus had an intra-uterine life of less than seven months, it is not deemed born if it
dies within twenty-four hours after its complete delivery from the maternal womb. (30a)

Art. 42. Civil personality is extinguished by death.

The effect of death upon the rights and obligations of the deceased is determined by law, by contract and by will.
(32a)

Art. 43. If there is a doubt, as between two or more persons who are called to succeed each other, as to which of
them died first, whoever alleges the death of one prior to the other, shall prove the same; in the absence of proof,
it is presumed that they died at the same time and there shall be no transmission of rights from one to the other.
(33)

CHAPTER 3
JURIDICAL PERSONS
Art. 44. The following are juridical persons:
(1) The State and its political subdivisions;

(2) Other corporations, institutions and entities for public interest or purpose, created by law; their
personality begins as soon as they have been constituted according to law;

(3) Corporations, partnerships and associations for private interest or purpose to which the law grants a
juridical personality, separate and distinct from that of each shareholder, partner or member. (35a)

Art. 45. Juridical persons mentioned in Nos. 1 and 2 of the preceding article are governed by the laws creating or
recognizing them.

Private corporations are regulated by laws of general application on the subject.

Partnerships and associations for private interest or purpose are governed by the provisions of this Code
concerning partnerships. (36 and 37a)

Art. 46. Juridical persons may acquire and possess property of all kinds, as well as incur obligations and bring civil or
criminal actions, in conformity with the laws and regulations of their organization. (38a)

231
Art. 47. Upon the dissolution of corporations, institutions and other entities for public interest or purpose
mentioned in No. 2 of Article 44, their property and other assets shall be disposed of in pursuance of law or the
charter creating them. If nothing has been specified on this point, the property and other assets shall be applied to
similar purposes for the benefit of the region, province, city or municipality which during the existence of the
institution derived the principal benefits from the same. (39a)

Title II. - CITIZENSHIP AND DOMICILE

Art. 48. The following are citizens of the Philippines:

(1) Those who were citizens of the Philippines at the time of the adoption of the Constitution of the
Philippines;

(2) Those born in the Philippines of foreign parents who, before the adoption of said Constitution, had
been elected to public office in the Philippines;

(3) Those whose fathers are citizens of the Philippines;

(4) Those whose mothers are citizens of the Philippines and, upon reaching the age of majority, elect
Philippine citizenship;

(5) Those who are naturalized in accordance with law. (n)

Art. 49. Naturalization and the loss and reacquisition of citizenship of the Philippines are governed by special laws.
(n)

Art. 50. For the exercise of civil rights and the fulfillment of civil obligations, the domicile of natural persons is the
place of their habitual residence. (40a)

Art. 51. When the law creating or recognizing them, or any other provision does not fix the domicile of juridical
persons, the same shall be understood to be the place where their legal representation is established or where
they exercise their principal functions. (41a)

Title III. - MARRIAGE

CHAPTER 1
REQUISITES OF MARRIAGE

Art. 52. Marriage is not a mere contract but an inviolable social institution. Its nature, consequences and incidents
are governed by law and not subject to stipulation, except that the marriage settlements may to a certain extent fix
the property relations during the marriage. (n)

Art. 53. No marriage shall be solemnized unless all these requisites are complied with:

(1) Legal capacity of the contracting parties;

(2) Their consent, freely given;

231
 (3) Authority of the person performing the marriage; and

(4) A marriage license, except in a marriage of exceptional character (Sec. 1a, Art. 3613).

Art. 54. Any male of the age of sixteen years or upwards, and any female of the age of fourteen years or upwards,
not under any of the impediments mentioned in Articles 80 to 84, may contract marriage. (2)

Art. 55. No particular form for the ceremony of marriage is required, but the parties with legal capacity to contract
marriage must declare, in the presence of the person solemnizing the marriage and of two witnesses of legal age,
that they take each other as husband and wife. This declaration shall be set forth in an instrument in triplicate,
signed by signature or mark by the contracting parties and said two witnesses and attested by the person
solemnizing the marriage.

In case of a marriage on the point of death, when the dying party, being physically unable, cannot sign the
instrument by signature or mark, it shall be sufficient for one of the witnesses to the marriage to sign in his name,
which fact shall be attested by the minister solemnizing the marriage. (3)

Art. 56. Marriage may be solemnized by:

(1) The Chief Justice and Associate Justices of the Supreme Court;

(2) The Presiding Justice and the Justices of the Court of Appeals;

(3) Judges of the Courts of First Instance;

(4) Mayors of cities and municipalities;

(5) Municipal judges and justices of the peace;

(6) Priests, rabbis, ministers of the gospel of any denomination, church, religion or sect, duly registered, as
provided in Article 92; and

(7) Ship captains, airplane chiefs, military commanders, and consuls and vice-consuls in special cases
provided in Articles 74 and 75. (4a)

Art. 57. The marriage shall be solemnized publicly in the office of the judge in open court or of the mayor; or in the
church, chapel or temple, as the case may be, and not elsewhere, except in cases of marriages contracted on the
point of death or in remote places in accordance with Article 72 of this Code, or in case of marriage referred to in
Article 76 or when one of the parents or the guardian of the female or the latter herself if over eighteen years of
age request it in writing, in which cases the marriage may be solemnized at a house or place designated by said
parent or guardian of the female or by the latter herself in a sworn statement to that effect. (5a)

Art. 58. Save marriages of an exceptional character authorized in Chapter 2 of this Title, but not those under Article
75, no marriage shall be solemnized without a license first being issued by the local civil registrar of the
municipality where either contracting party habitually resides. (7a)

Art. 59. The local civil registrar shall issue the proper license if each of the contracting parties swears separately
before him or before any public official authorized to administer oaths, to an application in writing setting forth that
such party has the necessary qualifications for contracting marriage. The applicants, their parents or guardians shall

231
not be required to exhibit their residence certificates in any formality in connection with the securing of the
marriage license. Such application shall insofar as possible contain the following data:

(1) Full name of the contracting party;

(2) Place of birth;

(3) Age, date of birth;

(4) Civil status (single, widow or widower, or divorced);

(5) If divorced, how and when the previous marriage was dissolved;

(6) Present residence;

(7) Degree of relationship of the contracting parties;

(8) Full name of the father;

(9) Residence of the father;

(10) Full name of the mother;

(11) Residence of the mother;

(12) Full name and residence of the guardian or person having charge, in case the contracting party has
neither father nor mother and is under the age of twenty years, if a male, or eighteen years if a female.
(7a)

Art. 60. The local civil registrar, upon receiving such application, shall require the exhibition of the original
baptismal or birth certificates of the contracting parties or copies of such documents duly attested by the persons
having custody of the originals. These certificates or certified copies of the documents required by this article need
not to be sworn to and shall be exempt from the documentary stamp tax. The signature and official title of the
person issuing the certificate shall be sufficient proof of its authenticity.

If either of the contracting parties is unable to produce his baptismal or birth certificate or a certified copy of either
because of the destruction or loss of the original, or if it is shown by an affidavit of such party or of any other
person that such baptismal or birth certificate has not yet been received though the same has been requested of
the person having custody thereof at least fifteen days prior to the date of the application, such party may furnish
in lieu thereof his residence certificate for the current year or any previous years, to show the age stated in his
application or, in the absence thereof, an instrument drawn up and sworn to before the local civil registrar
concerned or any public official authorized to solemnize marriage. Such instrument shall contain the sworn
declaration of two witnesses, of lawful age, of either sex, setting forth the full name, profession, and residence of
such contracting party and of his or her parents, if known, and the place and date of birth of such party. The
nearest of kin of the contracting parties shall be preferred as witnesses, and in their default, persons well known in
the province or the locality for their honesty and good repute.

The exhibition of baptismal or birth certificates shall not be required if the parents of the contracting parties
appear personally before the local civil registrar concerned and swear to the correctness of the lawful age of said

231
parties, as stated in the application, or when the local civil registrar shall, by merely looking at the applicants upon
their personally appearing before him, be convinced that either or both of them have the required age. (8a)

Art. 61. In case either of the contracting parties is a widowed or divorced person, the same shall be required to
furnish, instead of the baptismal or birth certificate required in the last preceding article, the death certificate of
the deceased spouse or the decree of the divorce court, as the case may be. In case the death certificate cannot be
found, the party shall make an affidavit setting forth this circumstance and his or her actual civil status and the
name and the date of the death of the deceased spouse.

In case either or both of the contracting parties, being neither widowed nor divorced, are less than twenty years of
age as regards the male and less than eighteen years as regards the female, they shall, in addition to the
requirements of the preceding articles, exhibit to the local civil registrar, the consent to their marriage, of their
father, mother or guardian, or persons having legal charge of them, in the order mentioned. Such consent shall be
in writing, under oath taken with the appearance of the interested parties before the proper local civil registrar or
in the form of an affidavit made in the presence of two witnesses and attested before any official authorized by law
to administer oaths. (9a)

Art. 62. Males above twenty but under twenty-five years of age, or females above eighteen but under twenty-three
years of age, shall be obliged to ask their parents or guardian for advice upon the intended marriage. If they do not
obtain such advice, or if it be unfavorable, the marriage shall not take place till after three months following the
completion of the publication of the application for marriage license. A sworn statement by the contracting parties
to the effect that such advice has been sought, together with the written advice given, if any, shall accompany the
application for marriage license. Should the parents or guardian refuse to give any advice, this fact shall be stated in
the sworn declaration. (n)

Art. 63. The local civil registrar shall post during ten consecutive days at the main door of the building where he has
his office a notice, the location of which shall not be changed once it has been placed, setting forth the full names
and domiciles of the applicants for a marriage license and other information given in the application. This notice
shall request all persons having knowledge of any impediment to the marriage to advise the local registrar thereof.
The license shall be issued after the completion of the publication, unless the local civil registrar receives
information upon any alleged impediment to the marriage. (10a)

Art. 64. Upon being advised of any alleged impediment to the marriage, the local civil registrar shall forthwith make
an investigation, examining persons under oath. If he is convicted that there is an impediment to the marriage, it
shall be his duty to withhold the marriage license, unless he is otherwise ordered by a competent court. (n)

Art. 65. The local civil registrar shall demand the previous payment of fees required by law or regulations for each
license issued. No other sum shall be collected, in the nature of a fee or tax of any kind, for the issuance of a
marriage license. Marriage licenses shall be issued free of charge to indigent parties, when both male and female
do not each own assessed real property in excess of five hundred pesos, a fact certified to, without cost, by the
provincial treasurer, or in the absence thereof, by a statement duly sworn to by the contracting parties before the
local civil registrar. The license shall be valid in any part of the Philippines; but it shall be good for no more than one
hundred and twenty days from the date on which it is issued and shall be deemed canceled at the expiration of said
period if the interested parties have not made use of it. (11a)

Art. 66. When either or both of the contracting parties are citizens or subjects of a foreign country, it shall be
necessary, before a marriage license can be obtained, to provide themselves with a certificate of legal capacity to
contract marriage, to be issued by their respective diplomatic or consular officials. (13a)

Art. 67. The marriage certificate in which the contracting parties shall state that they take each other as husband
and wife, shall also contain:

231
 (1) The full names and domiciles of the contracting parties;

(2) The age of each;

(3) A statement that the proper marriage license has been issued according to law and that the
contracting parties have the consent of their parents in case the male is under twenty or the female under
eighteen years of age; and

(4) A statement that the guardian or parent has been informed of the marriage, if the male is between the
ages of twenty and twenty-five years, and the female between eighteen and twenty-three years of age.
(15a)

Art. 68. It shall be the duty of the person solemnizing the marriage to furnish to either of the contracting parties
one of the three copies of the marriage contract referred to in Article 55, and to send another copy of the
document not later than fifteen days after the marriage took place to the local civil registrar concerned, whose duty
it shall be to issue the proper receipt to any person sending a marriage contract solemnized by him, including
marriages of an exceptional character. The official, priest, or minister solemnizing the marriage shall retain the third
copy of the marriage contract, the marriage license and the affidavit of the interested party regarding the
solemnization of the marriage in a place other than those mentioned in Article 57 if there be any such affidavit, in
the files that he must keep. (16a)

Art. 69. It shall be the duty of the local civil registrar to prepare the documents required by this Title, and to
administer oaths to all interested parties without any charge in both cases.

The documents and affidavits filed in connection with applications for marriage licenses shall be exempt from the
documentary stamp tax. (17a)

Art. 70. The local civil registrar concerned shall enter all applications for marriage licenses filed with him in a
register book strictly in the order in which the same shall be received. He shall enter in said register the names of
the applicants, the date on which the marriage license was issued, and such other data as may be necessary. (18a)

Art. 71. All marriages performed outside the Philippines in accordance with the laws in force in the country where
they were performed, and valid there as such, shall also be valid in this country, except bigamous, polygamous, or
incestuous marriages as determined by Philippine law. (19a)

CHAPTER 2
MARRIAGES OF EXCEPTIONAL CHARACTER

Art. 72. In case either of the contracting parties is on the point of death or the female has her habitual residence at
a place more than fifteen kilometers distant from the municipal building and there is no communication by railroad
or by provincial or local highways between the former and the latter, the marriage may be solemnized without
necessity of a marriage license; but in such cases the official, priest, or minister solemnizing it shall state in an
affidavit made before the local civil registrar or any person authorized by law to administer oaths that the marriage
was performed in articulo mortis or at a place more than fifteen kilometers distant from the municipal building
concerned, in which latter case he shall give the name of the barrio where the marriage was solemnized. The
person who solemnized the marriage shall also state, in either case, that he took the necessary steps to ascertain
the ages and relationship of the contracting parties and that there was in his opinion no legal impediment to the
marriage at the time that it was solemnized. (20)

231
Art. 73. The original of the affidavit required in the last preceding article, together with a copy of the marriage
contract, shall be sent by the person solemnizing the marriage to the local civil registrar of the municipality where
it was performed within the period of thirty days, after the performance of the marriage. The local civil registrar
shall, however, before filing the papers, require the payment into the municipal treasury of the legal fees required
in Article 65. (21)

Art. 74. A marriage in articulo mortis may also be solemnized by the captain of a ship or chief of an airplane during
a voyage, or by the commanding officer of a military unit, in the absence of a chaplain, during war. The duties
mentioned in the two preceding articles shall be complied with by the ship captain, airplane chief or commanding
officer. (n)

Art. 75. Marriages between Filipino citizens abroad may be solemnized by consuls and vice-consuls of the Republic
of the Philippines. The duties of the local civil registrar and of a judge or justice of the peace or mayor with regard
to the celebration of marriage shall be performed by such consuls and vice-consuls. (n)

Art. 76. No marriage license shall be necessary when a man and a woman who have attained the age of majority
and who, being unmarried, have lived together as husband and wife for at least five years, desire to marry each
other. The contracting parties shall state the foregoing facts in an affidavit before any person authorized by law to
administer oaths. The official, priest or minister who solemnized the marriage shall also state in an affidavit that he
took steps to ascertain the ages and other qualifications of the contracting parties and that he found no legal
impediment to the marriage. (n)

Art. 77. In case two persons married in accordance with law desire to ratify their union in conformity with the
regulations, rites, or practices of any church, sect, or religion it shall no longer be necessary to comply with the
requirements of Chapter 1 of this Title and any ratification made shall merely be considered as a purely religious
ceremony. (23)

Art. 78. Marriages between Mohammedans or pagans who live in the non-Christian provinces may be performed in
accordance with their customs, rites or practices. No marriage license or formal requisites shall be necessary. Nor
shall the persons solemnizing these marriages be obliged to comply with Article 92.

However, twenty years after approval of this Code, all marriages performed between Mohammedans or pagans
shall be solemnized in accordance with the provisions of this Code. But the President of the Philippines, upon
recommendation of the Secretary of the Interior, may at any time before the expiration of said period, by
proclamation, make any of said provisions applicable to the Mohammedan and non-Christian inhabitants of any of
the non-Christian provinces. (25a)

Art. 79. Mixed marriages between a Christian male and a Mohammedan or pagan female shall be governed by the
general provision of this Title and not by those of the last preceding article, but mixed marriages between a
Mohammedan or pagan male and a Christian female may be performed under the provisions of the last preceding
article if so desired by the contracting parties, subject, however, in the latter case to the provisions of the second
paragraph of said article. (26)

CHAPTER 3
VOID AND VOIDABLE MARRIAGES

231
Art. 80. The following marriages shall be void from the beginning:
(1) Those contracted under the ages of sixteen and fourteen years by the male and female respectively,
even with the consent of the parents;

(2) Those solemnized by any person not legally authorized to perform marriages;

(3) Those solemnized without a marriage license, save marriages of exceptional character;

(4) Bigamous or polygamous marriages not falling under Article 83, Number 2;

(5) Incestuous marriages mentioned in Article 81;

(6) Those where one or both contracting parties have been found guilty of the killing of the spouse of
either of them;

(7) Those between stepbrothers and stepsisters and other marriages specified in Article 82. (n)

Art. 81. Marriages between the following are incestuous and void from their performance, whether the
relationship between the parties be legitimate or illegitimate:
(1) Between ascendants and descendants of any degree;

(2) Between brothers and sisters, whether of the full or half blood;

(3) Between collateral relatives by blood within the fourth civil degree. (28a)

Art. 82. The following marriages shall also be void from the beginning:
(1) Between stepfathers and stepdaughters, and stepmothers and stepsons;

(2) Between the adopting father or mother and the adopted, between the latter and the surviving spouse
of the former, and between the former and the surviving spouse of the latter;

(3) Between the legitimate children of the adopter and the adopted. (28a)

Art. 83. Any marriage subsequently contracted by any person during the lifetime of the first spouse of such person
with any person other than such first spouse shall be illegal and void from its performance, unless:
(1) The first marriage was annulled or dissolved; or

(2) The first spouse had been absent for seven consecutive years at the time of the second marriage
without the spouse present having news of the absentee being alive, or if the absentee, though he has
been absent for less than seven years, is generally considered as dead and believed to be so by the spouse
present at the time of contracting such subsequent marriage, or if the absentee is presumed dead
according to Articles 390 and 391. The marriage so contracted shall be valid in any of the three cases until
declared null and void by a competent court. (29a)

Art. 84. No marriage license shall be issued to a widow till after three hundred days following the death of her
husband, unless in the meantime she has given birth to a child. (n)

Art. 85. A marriage may be annulled for any of the following causes, existing at the time of the marriage:

231
 (1) That the party in whose behalf it is sought to have the marriage annulled was between the ages of
sixteen and twenty years, if male, or between the ages of fourteen and eighteen years, if female, and the
marriage was solemnized without the consent of the parent, guardian or person having authority over the
party, unless after attaining the ages of twenty or eighteen years, as the case may be, such party freely
cohabited with the other and both lived together as husband and wife;

(2) In a subsequent marriage under Article 83, Number 2, that the former husband or wife believed to be
dead was in fact living and the marriage with such former husband or wife was then in force;

(3) That either party was of unsound mind, unless such party, after coming to reason, freely cohabited
with the other as husband or wife;

(4) That the consent of either party was obtained by fraud, unless such party afterwards, with full
knowledge of the facts constituting the fraud, freely cohabited with the other as her husband or his wife,
as the case may be;

(5) That the consent of either party was obtained by force or intimidation, unless the violence or threat
having disappeared, such party afterwards freely cohabited with the other as her husband or his wife, as
the case may be;

(6) That either party was, at the time of marriage, physically incapable of entering into the married state,
and such incapacity continues, and appears to be incurable. (30a)

Art. 86. Any of the following circumstances shall constitute fraud referred to in Number 4 of the preceding article:
(1) Misrepresentation as to the identity of one of the contracting parties;

(2) Non-disclosure of the previous conviction of the other party of a crime involving moral turpitude, and
the penalty imposed was imprisonment for two years or more;

(3) Concealment by the wife of the fact that at the time of the marriage, she was pregnant by a man other
than her husband.

No other misrepresentation or deceit as to character, rank, fortune or chastity shall constitute such fraud as will
give grounds for action for the annulment of marriage. (n)

Art. 87. The action for annulment of marriage must be commenced by the parties and within the periods as
follows:

(1) For causes mentioned in Number 1 of Article 85, by the party whose parent or guardian did not give his
or her consent, within four years after attaining the age of twenty or eighteen years, as the case may be;
or by the parent or guardian or person having legal charge, at any time before such party has arrived at
the age of twenty or eighteen years;

(2) For causes mentioned in Number 2 of Article 85, by the spouse who has been absent, during his or her
lifetime; or by either spouse of the subsequent marriage during the lifetime of the other;

(3) For causes mentioned in Number 3 of Article 85, by the sane spouse, who had no knowledge of the
other's insanity; or by any relative or guardian of the party of unsound mind, at any time before the death
of either party;

231
 (4) For causes mentioned in Number 4, by the injured party, within four years after the discovery of the
fraud;

(5) For causes mentioned in Number 5, by the injured party, within four years from the time the force or
intimidation ceased;

(6) For causes mentioned in Number 6, by the injured party, within eight years after the marriage. (31a)

Art. 88. No judgment annulling a marriage shall be promulgated upon a stipulation of facts or by confession of
judgment.

Art. 89. Children conceived or born of marriages which are void from the beginning shall have the same status,
rights and obligations as acknowledged natural children, and are called natural children by legal fiction.

Children conceived of voidable marriages before the decree of annulment shall be considered as legitimate; and
children conceived thereafter shall have the same status, rights and obligations as acknowledged natural children,
and are also called natural children by legal fiction. (n)

Art. 90. When a marriage is annulled, the court shall award the custody of the children as it may deem best, and
make provision for their education and support. Attorney's fees and expenses incurred in the litigation shall be
charged to the conjugal partnership property, unless the action fails. (33a)

Art. 91. Damages may be awarded in the following cases when the marriage is judicially annulled or declared void
from the beginning:

(1) If there has been fraud, force or intimidation in obtaining the consent of one of the contracting parties;

(2) If either party was, at the time of the marriage, physically incapable of entering into the married state,
and the other party was unaware thereof;

(3) If the person solemnizing the marriage was not legally authorized to perform marriages, and that fact
was known to one of the contracting parties, but he or she concealed it from the other;

(4) If a bigamous or polygamous marriage was celebrated, and the impediment was concealed from the
plaintiff by the party disqualified;

(5) If in an incestuous marriage, or a marriage between a stepbrother and a stepsister or other marriage
prohibited by article 82, the relationship was known to only one of the contracting parties but was not
disclosed to the other;

(6) If one party was insane and the other was aware thereof at the time of the marriage. (n)

CHAPTER 4
AUTHORITY TO SOLEMNIZE MARRIAGES

Art. 92. Every priest, or minister, or rabbi authorized by his denomination, church, sect, or religion to solemnize
marriage shall send to the proper government office a sworn statement setting forth his full name and domicile,
and that he is authorized by his denomination, church, sect, or religion to solemnize marriage, attaching to said
statement a certified copy of his appointment. The director of the proper government office, upon receiving such

231
sworn statement containing the information required, and being satisfied that the denomination, church, sect, or
region of the applicant operates in the Philippines, shall record the name of such priest or minister in a suitable
register and issue to him an authorization to solemnize marriage. Said priest or minister or rabbi shall be obliged to
exhibit his authorization to the contracting parties, to their parents, grandparents, guardians, or persons in charge
demanding the same. No priest or minister not having the required authorization may solemnize marriage. (34a)

Art. 93. Freedom of religion shall be observed by public officials in the issuance of authorization to solemnize
marriages. Consequently, no public official shall attempt to inquire into the truth or validity of any religious
doctrine held by the applicant or by his church. (n)

Art. 94. The public official in charge of registration of priests and ministers shall cancel the authorization issued to a
bishop, head, priest, rabbi, pastor or minister of the gospel of any denomination, church, sect, or religion, on his
own initiative or at the request of any interested party, upon showing that the church, sect or religion whose
ministers have been authorized to solemnize marriage is no longer in operation. The cancellation of the
authorization granted to a priest, pastor or minister shall likewise be ordered upon the request of the bishop, head,
or lawful authorities of the denomination, church, sect or religion to which he belongs. (35a)

Art. 95. The public official in charge of registration of priests and ministers, with the approval of the proper head of
Department, is hereby authorized to prepare the necessary forms and to promulgate regulations for the purpose of
enforcing the provisions of this Title. Said official may also by regulations fix and collect fees for the authorization of
priests and ministers to solemnize marriages. (36a)

Art. 96. The existing laws which punish acts or omissions concerning the marriage license, solemnization of
marriage, authority to solemnize marriages, and other acts or omissions relative to the celebration of marriage
shall remain and continue to be in force. (n)

Title IV. - LEGAL SEPARATION

Art. 97. A petition for legal separation may be filed:

(1) For adultery on the part of the wife and for concubinage on the part of the husband as defined in the
Penal Code; or

(2) An attempt by one spouse against the life of the other. (n)

Art. 98. In every case the court must take steps, before granting the legal separation, toward the reconciliation of
the spouses, and must be fully satisfied that such reconciliation is highly improbable. (n)

Art. 99. No person shall be entitled to a legal separation who has not resided in the Philippines for one year prior to
the filing of the petition, unless the cause for the legal separation has taken place within the territory of this
Republic. (Sec. 2a, Act No. 2710)

Art. 100. The legal separation may be claimed only by the innocent spouse, provided there has been no
condonation of or consent to the adultery or concubinage. Where both spouses are offenders, a legal separation
cannot be claimed by either of them. Collusion between the parties to obtain legal separation shall cause the
dismissal of the petition. (3a, Act No. 2710)

Art. 101. No decree of legal separation shall be promulgated upon a stipulation of facts or by confession of
judgment.

231
In case of non-appearance of the defendant, the court shall order the prosecuting attorney to inquire whether or
not a collusion between the parties exists. If there is no collusion, the prosecuting attorney shall intervene for the
State in order to take care that the evidence for the plaintiff is not fabricated. (n)

Art. 102. An action for legal separation cannot be filed except within one year from and after the date on which the
plaintiff became cognizant of the cause and within five years from and after the date when such cause occurred.
(4a, Act 2710)

Art. 103. An action for legal separation shall in no case be tried before six months shall have elapsed since the filing
of the petition. (5a, Act 2710)

Art. 104. After the filing of the petition for legal separation, the spouses shall be entitled to live separately from
each other and manage their respective property.

The husband shall continue to manage the conjugal partnership property but if the court deems it proper, it may
appoint another to manage said property, in which case the administrator shall have the same rights and duties as
a guardian and shall not be allowed to dispose of the income or of the capital except in accordance with the orders
of the court. (6, Act 2710)

Art. 105. During the pendency of legal separation proceedings the court shall make provision for the care of the
minor children in accordance with the circumstances and may order the conjugal partnership property or the
income therefrom to be set aside for their support; and in default thereof said minor children shall be cared for in
conformity with the provisions of this Code; but the Court shall abstain from making any order in this respect in
case the parents have by mutual agreement, made provision for the care of said minor children and these are, in
the judgment of the court, well cared for. (7a, Act 2710)

Art. 106. The decree of legal separation shall have the following effects:

(1) The spouses shall be entitled to live separately from each other, but marriage bonds shall not be
severed;

(2) The conjugal partnership of gains or the absolute conjugal community of property shall be dissolved
and liquidated, but the offending spouse shall have no right to any share of the profits earned by the
partnership or community, without prejudice to the provisions of Article 176;

(3) The custody of the minor children shall be awarded to the innocent spouse, unless otherwise directed
by the court in the interest of said minors, for whom said court may appoint a guardian;

(4) The offending spouse shall be disqualified from inheriting from the innocent spouse by intestate
succession. Moreover, provisions in favor of the offending spouse made in the will of the innocent one
shall be revoked by operation of law. (n)

Art. 107. The innocent spouse, after a decree of legal separation has been granted, may revoke the donations by
reason of marriage made by him or by her to the offending spouse. Alienation and mortgages made before the
notation of the complaint for revocation in the Registry of Property shall be valid.

This action lapses after four years following the date the decree became final. (n)

Art. 108. Reconciliation stops the proceedings for legal separation and rescinds the decree of legal separation
already rendered.

231
The revival of the conjugal partnership of gains or of the absolute conjugal community of property shall be
governed by Article 195. (10a. Act 2710)

Title V. - RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS

BETWEEN HUSBAND AND WIFE

Art. 109. The husband and wife are obliged to live together, observe mutual respect and fidelity, and render mutual
help and support. (56a)

Art. 110. The husband shall fix the residence of the family. But the court may exempt the wife from living with the
husband if he should live abroad unless in the service of the Republic. (58a)

Art. 111. The husband is responsible for the support of the wife and the rest of the family. These expenses shall be
met first from the conjugal property, then from the husband's capital, and lastly from the wife's paraphernal
property. In case there is a separation of property, by stipulation in the marriage settlements, the husband and wife
shall contribute proportionately to the family expenses. (n)

Art. 112. The husband is the administrator of the conjugal property, unless there is a stipulation in the marriage
settlements conferring the administration upon the wife. She may also administer the conjugal partnership in other
cases specified in this Code. (n)

Art. 113. The husband must be joined in all suits by or against the wife, except:

(1) When they are judicially separated;

(2) If they have in fact been separated for at least one year;

(3) When there is a separation of property agreed upon in the marriage settlements;

(4) If the administration of all the property in the marriage has been transferred to her, in accordance with
Articles 196 and 197;

(5) When the litigation is between the husband and wife;

(6) If the suit concerns her paraphernal property;

(7) When the action is upon the civil liability arising from a criminal offense;

(8) If the litigation is incidental to the profession, occupation or business in which she is engaged;

(9) In any civil action referred to in Articles 25 to 35; and

(10) In an action upon a quasi-delict.

In the cases mentioned in Nos. 7 to 10, the husband must be joined as a party defendant if the third
paragraph of Article 163 is applicable. (n)

231
Art. 114. The wife cannot, without the husband's consent acquire any property by gratuitous title, except from her
ascendants, descendants, parents-in-law, and collateral relatives within the fourth degree. (n)

Art. 115. The wife manages the affairs of the household. She may purchase things necessary for the support of the
family, and the conjugal partnership shall be bound thereby. She may borrow money for this purpose, if the
husband fails to deliver the proper sum. The purchase of jewelry and precious objects is voidable, unless the
transaction has been expressly or tacitly approved by the husband, or unless the price paid is from her paraphernal
property. (62a)

Art. 116. When one of the spouses neglects his or her duties to the conjugal union or brings danger, dishonor or
material injury upon the other, the injured party may apply to the court for relief.

The court may counsel the offender to comply with his or her duties, and take such measures as may be proper. (n)

Art. 117. The wife may exercise any profession or occupation or engage in business. However, the husband may
object, provided:

(1) His income is sufficient for the family, according to its social standing, and

(2) His opposition is founded on serious and valid grounds.

In case of disagreement on this question, the parents and grandparents as well as the family council, if any, shall be
consulted. If no agreement is still arrived at, the court will decide whatever may be proper and in the best interest
of the family. (n)

Title VI. - PROPERTY RELATIONS

BETWEEN HUSBAND AND WIFE

CHAPTER 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS

Art. 118. The property relations between husband and wife shall be governed in the following order:
(1) By contract executed before the marriage;

(2) By the provisions of this Code; and

(3) By custom. (1315a)

Art. 119. The future spouses may in the marriage settlements agree upon absolute or relative community of
property, or upon complete separation of property, or upon any other regime. In the absence of marriage
settlements, or when the same are void, the system of relative community or conjugal partnership of gains as
established in this Code, shall govern the property relations between husband and wife. (n)

Art. 120. A minor who according to law may contract marriage, may also execute his or her marriage settlements;
but they shall be valid only if the persons designated by law to give consent to the marriage of the minor take part
in the ante-nuptial agreement. In the absence of the parents or of a guardian, the consent to the marriage
settlements will be given by the family council. (1318a)

231
Art. 121. In order that any modification in the marriage settlements may be valid, it must be made before the
celebration of the marriage, subject to the provisions of Article 191. (1319a)

Art. 122. The marriage settlements and any modification thereof shall be governed by the Statute of Frauds, and
executed before the celebration of the marriage. They shall not prejudice third persons unless they are recorded in
the Registry of Property. (1321a)

Art. 123. For the validity of marriage settlements executed by any person upon whom a sentence of civil
interdiction has been pronounced, the presence and participation of the guardian shall be indispensable, who for
this purpose shall be designated by a competent court, in accordance with the provisions of the Rules of Court.
(1323a)

Art. 124. If the marriage is between a citizen of the Philippines and a foreigner, whether celebrated in the
Philippines or abroad, the following rules shall prevail:

(1) If the husband is a citizen of the Philippines while the wife is a foreigner, the provisions of this Code
shall govern their relations;

(2) If the husband is a foreigner and the wife is a citizen of the Philippines, the laws of the husband's
country shall be followed, without prejudice to the provisions of this Code with regard to immovable
property. (1325a)

Art. 125. Everything stipulated in the settlements or contracts referred to in the preceding articles in consideration
of a future marriage shall be rendered void and without effect whatever, if the marriage should not take place.
However, those stipulations that do not depend upon the celebration of the marriage shall be valid. (1326a)

CHAPTER 2
DONATIONS BY REASON OF MARRIAGE

Art. 126. Donations by reasons of marriage are those which are made before its celebration, in consideration of the
same and in favor of one or both of the future spouses. (1327)

Art. 127. These donations are governed by the rules on ordinary donations established in Title III of Book III, except
as to their form which shall be regulated by the Statute of Frauds; and insofar as they are not modified by the
following articles. (1328a)

Art. 128. Minors may make and receive donations in their ante-nuptial contract, provided they are authorized by
the persons who are to give their consent to the marriage of said minors. (1329a)

Art. 129. Express acceptance is not necessary for the validity of these donations. (1330)

Art. 130. The future spouses may give each other in their marriage settlements as much as one-fifth of their
present property, and with respect to their future property, only in the event of death, to the extent laid down by
the provisions of this Code referring to testamentary succession. (1331a)

Art. 131. The donor by reason of marriage shall release the property donated from mortgages and all other
encumbrances upon the same, with the exception of easements, unless in the marriage settlements or in the
contracts the contrary has been stipulated. (1332a)

231
Art. 132. A donation by reason of marriage is not revocable, save in the following cases:

(1) If it is conditional and the condition is not complied with;

(2) If the marriage is not celebrated;

(3) When the marriage takes place without the consent of the parents or guardian, as required by law;

(4) When the marriage is annulled, and the donee acted in bad faith;

(5) Upon legal separation, the donee being the guilty spouse;

(6) When the donee has committed an act of ingratitude as specified by the provisions of this Code on
donations in general. (1333a)

Art. 133. Every donation between the spouses during the marriage shall be void. This prohibition does not apply
when the donation takes effect after the death of the donor.

Neither does this prohibition apply to moderate gifts which the spouses may give each other on the occasion of any
family rejoicing. (1334a)

Art. 134. Donations during the marriage by one of the spouses to the children whom the other spouse had by
another marriage, or to persons of whom the other spouse is a presumptive heir at the time of the donation are
voidable, at the instance of the donor's heirs after his death. (1335a)

CHAPTER 3
PARAPHERNAL PROPERTY

Art. 135. All property brought by the wife to the marriage, as well as all property she acquires during the marriage,
in accordance with article 148, is paraphernal. (1381a)

Art. 136. The wife retains the ownership of the paraphernal property. (1382)

Art. 137. The wife shall have the administration of the paraphernal property, unless she delivers the same to the
husband by means of a public instrument empowering him to administer it.

In this case, the public instrument shall be recorded in the Registry of Property. As for the movables, the husband
shall give adequate security. (1384a)

Art. 138. The fruits of the paraphernal property form part of the assets of the conjugal partnership, and shall be
subject to the payment of the expenses of the marriage.

The property itself shall also be subject to the daily expenses of the family, if the property of the conjugal
partnership and the husband's capital are not sufficient therefor. (1385a)

Art. 139. The personal obligations of the husband can not be enforced against the fruits of the paraphernal
property, unless it be proved that they redounded to the benefit of the family. (1386)

231
Art. 140. A married woman of age may mortgage, encumber, alienate or otherwise dispose of her paraphernal
property, without the permission of the husband, and appear alone in court to litigate with regard to the same. (n)

Art. 141. The alienation of any paraphernal property administered by the husband gives a right to the wife to
require the constitution of a mortgage or any other security for the amount of the price which the husband may
have received. (1390a)

CHAPTER 4
CONJUGAL PARTNERSHIP OF GAINS

SECTION 1. - General Provisions

Art. 142. By means of the conjugal partnership of gains the husband and wife place in a common fund the fruits of
their separate property and the income from their work or industry, and divide equally, upon the dissolution of the
marriage or of the partnership, the net gains or benefits obtained indiscriminately by either spouse during the
marriage. (1392a)

Art. 143. All property of the conjugal partnership of gains is owned in common by the husband and wife. (n)

Art. 144. When a man and a woman live together as husband and wife, but they are not married, or their marriage
is void from the beginning, the property acquired by either or both of them through their work or industry or their
wages and salaries shall be governed by the rules on co-ownership. (n)

Art. 145. The conjugal partnership shall commence precisely on the date of the celebration of the marriage. Any
stipulation to the contrary shall be void. (1393)

Art. 146. Waiver of the gains or of the effects of this partnership during marriage cannot be made except in case of
judicial separation.

When the waiver takes place by reason of separation, or after the marriage has been dissolved or annulled, the
same shall appear in a public instrument, and the creditors shall have the right which Article 1052 grants them.
(1394a)

Art. 147. The conjugal partnership shall be governed by the rules on the contract of partnership in all that is not in
conflict with what is expressly determined in this Chapter. (1395)

SECTION 2. - Exclusive Property of Each Spouse

Art. 148. The following shall be the exclusive property of each spouse:
(1) That which is brought to the marriage as his or her own;

(2) That which each acquires, during the marriage, by lucrative title;

(3) That which is acquired by right of redemption or by exchange with other property belonging to only
one of the spouses;

231
 (4) That which is purchased with exclusive money of the wife or of the husband. (1396)

Art. 149. Whoever gives or promises capital to the husband shall not be subject to warranty against eviction, except
in case of fraud. (1937)

Art. 150. Property donated or left by will to the spouses, jointly and with designation of determinate shares, shall
pertain to the wife as paraphernal property, and to the husband as capital, in the proportion specified by the donor
or testator, and in the absence of designation, share and share alike, without prejudice to what is provided in
Article 753. (1398a)

Art. 151. If the donations are onerous, the amount of the charges shall be deducted from the paraphernal property
or from the husband's capital, whenever they have been borne by the conjugal partnership. (1399a)

Art. 152. If some credit payable in a certain number of years, or a life pension, should pertain to one of the
spouses, the provisions of Articles 156 and 157 shall be observed to determine what constitutes the paraphernal
property and what forms the capital of the husband. (1400a)

SECTION 3. - Conjugal Partnership Property

Art. 153. The following are conjugal partnership property:

(1) That which is acquired by onerous title during the marriage at the expense of the common fund,
whether the acquisition be for the partnership, or for only one of the spouses;

(2) That which is obtained by the industry, or work, or as salary of the spouses, or of either of them;

(3) The fruits, rents or interests received or due during the marriage, coming from the common property
or from the exclusive property of each spouse. (1401)

Art. 154. That share of the hidden treasure which the law awards to the finder or the proprietor belongs to the
conjugal partnership. (n)

Art. 155. Things acquired by occupation, such as fishing and hunting, pertain to the conjugal partnership of gains.
(n)

Art. 156. Whenever an amount or credit payable in a certain number of years belongs to one of the spouses, the
sums which may be collected by installments due during the marriage shall not pertain to the conjugal partnership,
but shall be considered capital of the husband or of the wife, as the credit may belong to one or the other spouse.
(1402)

Art. 157. The right to an annuity, whether perpetual or of life, and the right of usufruct, belonging to one of the
spouses shall form a part of his or her separate property, but the fruits, pensions and interests due during the
marriage shall belong to the partnership.

The usufruct which the spouses have over the property of their children, though of another marriage, shall be
included in this provision. (1403a)

Art. 158. Improvements, whether for utility or adornment, made on the separate property of the spouses through
advancements from the partnership or through the industry of either the husband or the wife, belong to the
conjugal partnership.

231
Buildings constructed, at the expense of the partnership, during the marriage on land belonging to one of the
spouses, also pertain to the partnership, but the value of the land shall be reimbursed to the spouse who owns the
same. (1404a)

Art. 159. Whenever the paraphernal property or the husband's capital consists, in whole or in part, of livestock
existing upon the dissolution of the partnership, the number of animals exceeding that brought to the marriage
shall be deemed to be of the conjugal partnership. (1405a)

Art. 160. All property of the marriage is presumed to belong to the conjugal partnership, unless it be proved that it
pertains exclusively to the husband or to the wife. (1407)

SECTION 4. - Charges Upon and Obligation

of the Conjugal Partnership

Art. 161. The conjugal partnership shall be liable for:

(1) All debts and obligations contracted by the husband for the benefit of the conjugal partnership, and
those contracted by the wife, also for the same purpose, in the cases where she may legally bind the
partnership;

(2) Arrears or income due, during the marriage, from obligations which constitute a charge upon property
of either spouse or of the partnership;

(3) Minor repairs or for mere preservation made during the marriage upon the separate property of either
the husband or the wife; major repairs shall not be charged to the partnership;

(4) Major or minor repairs upon the conjugal partnership property;

(5) The maintenance of the family and the education of the children of both husband and wife, and of
legitimate children of one of the spouses;

(6) Expenses to permit the spouses to complete a professional, vocational or other course. (1408a)

Art. 162. The value of what is donated or promised to the common children by the husband, only for securing their
future or the finishing of a career, or by both spouses through a common agreement, shall also be charged to the
conjugal partnership, when they have not stipulated that it is to be satisfied from the property of one of them, in
whole or in part. (1409)

Art. 163. The payment of debts contracted by the husband or the wife before the marriage shall not be charged to
the conjugal partnership.

Neither shall the fines and pecuniary indemnities imposed upon them be charged to the partnership.

However, the payment of debts contracted by the husband or the wife before the marriage, and that of fines and
indemnities imposed upon them, may be enforced against the partnership assets after the responsibilities
enumerated in Article 161 have been covered, if the spouse who is bound should have no exclusive property or if it
should be insufficient; but at the time of the liquidation of the partnership such spouse shall be charged for what
has been paid for the purpose above-mentioned. (1410)

231
Art. 164. Whatever may be lost during the marriage in any kind of gambling, betting or game, whether permitted or
prohibited by law, shall be borne by the loser, and shall not be charged to the conjugal partnership. (1411a)

SECTION 5. - Administration of the Conjugal Partnership

Art. 165. The husband is the administrator of the conjugal partnership. (1412a)

Art. 166. Unless the wife has been declared a non compos mentis or a spendthrift, or is under civil interdiction or is
confined in a leprosarium, the husband cannot alienate or encumber any real property of the conjugal partnership
without the wife's consent. If she refuses unreasonably to give her consent, the court may compel her to grant the
same.

This article shall not apply to property acquired by the conjugal partnership before the effective date of this Code.
(1413a)

Art. 167. In case of abuse of powers of administration of the conjugal partnership property by the husband, the
courts, on petition of the wife, may provide for receivership, or administration by the wife, or separation of
property. (n)

Art. 168. The wife may, by express authority of the husband embodied in a public instrument, administer the
conjugal partnership property. (n)

Art. 169. The wife may also by express authority of the husband appearing in a public instrument, administer the
latter's estate. (n)

Art. 170. The husband or the wife may dispose by will of his or her half of the conjugal partnership profits. (1414a)

Art. 171. The husband may dispose of the conjugal partnership property for the purposes specified in Articles 161
and 162. (1415a)

Art. 172. The wife cannot bind the conjugal partnership without the husband's consent except in cases provided by
law. (1416a)

Art. 173. The wife may, during the marriage, and within ten years from the transaction questioned, ask the courts
for the annulment of any contract of the husband entered into without her consent, when such consent is required,
or any act or contract of the husband which tends to defraud her or impair her interest in the conjugal partnership
property. Should the wife fail to exercise this right, she or her heirs, after the dissolution of the marriage, may
demand the value of property fraudulently alienated by the husband. (n)

Art. 174. With the exception of moderate donations for charity, neither husband nor wife can donate any property
of the conjugal partnership without the consent of the other. (n)

231
 SECTION 6. - Dissolution of the Conjugal Partnership

Art. 175. The conjugal partnership of gains terminates:

(1) Upon the death of either spouse;

(2) When there is a decree of legal separation;

(3) When the marriage is annulled;

(4) In case of judicial separation of property under Article 191. (1417a)

Art. 176. In case of legal separation, the guilty spouse shall forfeit his or her share of the conjugal partnership
profits, which shall be awarded to the children of both, and the children of the guilty spouse had by a prior
marriage. However, if the conjugal partnership property came mostly or entirely from the work or industry, or from
the wages and salaries, or from the fruits of the separate property of the guilty spouse, this forfeiture shall not
apply.

In case there are no children, the innocent spouse shall be entitled to all the net profits. (n)

Art. 177. In case of annulment of the marriage, the spouse who acted in bad faith or gave cause for annulment shall
forfeit his or her share of the conjugal partnership profits. The provision of the preceding article shall govern. (n)

Art. 178. The separation in fact between husband and wife without judicial approval, shall not affect the conjugal
partnership, except that:

(1) The spouse who leaves the conjugal home or refuses to live therein, without just cause, shall not have
a right to be supported;

(2) When the consent of one spouse to any transaction of the other is required by law, judicial
authorization shall be necessary;

(3) If the husband has abandoned the wife without just cause for at least one year, she may petition the
court for a receivership, or administration by her of the conjugal partnership property, or separation of
property. (n)

SECTION 7. - Liquidation of the Conjugal Partnership

Art. 179. Upon the dissolution of the conjugal partnership, an inventory shall be formed, but such inventory shall
not be necessary:
(1) If, after the dissolution of the partnership, one of the spouses should have renounced its effects and
consequences in due time; or

(2) When separation of property has preceded the dissolution of the partnership. (1418a)

Art. 180. The bed and bedding which the spouses ordinarily use shall not be included in the inventory. These
effects, as well as the clothing for their ordinary use, shall be delivered to the surviving spouse. (1420)

Art. 181. The inventory having been completed, the paraphernal property shall first be paid. Then, the debts and
charges against the conjugal partnership shall be paid. (1422a)

231
Art. 182. The debts, charges and obligations of the conjugal partnership having been paid; the capital of the
husband shall be liquidated and paid to the amount of the property inventoried. (1423a)

Art. 183. The deductions from the inventoried property having been made as provided in the two preceding
articles, the remainder of said property shall constitute the credit of the conjugal partnership. (1424)

Art. 184. The loss or deterioration of the movables belonging to either spouse, although through fortuitous event,
shall be paid from the conjugal partnership of gains, should there be any.

Those suffered by real property shall not be reimbursable in any case, except those on paraphernal property
administered by the husband, when the losses were due to his fault. He shall pay for the same. (1425a)

Art. 185. The net remainder of the conjugal partnership of gains shall be divided equally between the husband and
the wife or their respective heirs, unless a different basis of division was agreed upon in the marriage settlements.
(1426a)

Art. 186. The mourning apparel of the widow shall be paid for out of the estate of the deceased husband. (1427a)

Art. 187. With regard to the formation of the inventory, rules for appraisal and sale of property of the conjugal
partnership, and other matters which are not expressly determined in the present Chapter, the Rules of Court on
the administration of estates of deceased persons shall be observed. (1428a)

Art. 188. From the common mass of property support shall be given to the surviving spouse and to the children
during the liquidation of the inventoried property and until what belongs to them is delivered; but from this shall
be deducted that amount received for support which exceeds the fruits or rents pertaining to them. (1430)

Art. 189. Whenever the liquidation of the partnership of two or more marriages contracted by the same person
should be carried out at the same time, in order to determine the capital of each partnership all kinds of proof in
the absence of inventories shall be admitted; and in case of doubt, the partnership property shall be divided
between the different partnerships in proportion to the duration of each and to the property belonging to the
respective spouses. (1431)

CHAPTER 5
SEPARATION OF PROPERTY OF THE SPOUSES
AND ADMINISTRATION OF PROPERTY
BY THE WIFE DURING THE MARRIAGE

Art. 190. In the absence of an express declaration in the marriage settlements, the separation of property between
spouses during the marriage shall not take place save in virtue of a judicial order. (1432a)

Art. 191. The husband or the wife may ask for the separation of property, and it shall be decreed when the spouse
of the petitioner has been sentenced to a penalty which carries with it civil interdiction, or has been declared
absent, or when legal separation has been granted.

In case of abuse of powers of administration of the conjugal partnership property by the husband, or in case of
abandonment by the husband, separation of property may also be ordered by the court, according to the
provisions of Articles 167 and 178, No. 3.

231
In all these cases, it is sufficient to present the final judgment which has been entered against the guilty or absent
spouse. (1433a)

The husband and the wife may agree upon the dissolution of the conjugal partnership during the marriage, subject
to judicial approval. All the creditors of the husband and of the wife, as well as of the conjugal partnership shall be
notified of any petition for judicial approval or the voluntary dissolution of the conjugal partnership, so that any
such creditors may appear at the hearing to safeguard his interests. Upon approval of the petition for dissolution of
the conjugal partnership, the court shall take such measures as may protect the creditors and other third persons.

After dissolution of the conjugal partnership, the provisions of Articles 214 and 215 shall apply. The provisions of
this Code concerning the effect of partition stated in Articles 498 to 501 shall be applicable. (1433a)

Art. 192. Once the separation of property has been ordered, the conjugal partnership shall be dissolved, and its
liquidation shall be made in conformity with what has been established by this Code.

However, without prejudice to the provisions of Article 292, the husband and the wife shall be reciprocally liable for
their support during the separation, and for the support and education of their children; all in proportion to their
respective property.

The share of the spouse who is under civil interdiction or absent shall be administered in accordance with the Rules
of Court. (1434a)

Art. 193. The complaint for separation and the final judgment declaring the same, shall be noted and recorded in
the proper registers of property, if the judgment should refer to immovable property. (1437)

Art. 194. The separation of property shall not prejudice the rights previously acquired by creditors. (1438)

Art. 195. The separation of property ceases:

(1) Upon reconciliation of the spouses, in case of legal separation;

(2) When the civil interdiction terminates;

(3) When the absent spouse appears;

(4) When the court, at the instance of the wife, authorizes the husband to resume the administration of
the conjugal partnership, the court being satisfied that the husband will not again abuse his powers as an
administrator;

(5) When the husband, who has abandoned the wife, rejoins her.

In the above cases, the property relations between the spouses shall be governed by the same rules as before the
separation, without prejudice to the acts and contracts legally executed during the separation.

The spouses shall state, in a public document, all the property which they return to the marriage and which shall
constitute the separate property of each.

This public document shall be recorded in the Registry of Property.

231
In the cases referred to in this article, all the property brought in shall be deemed to be newly contributed, even
though all or some may be the same which existed before the liquidation effected by reason of the separation.
(1439a)

Art. 196. With the conjugal partnership subsisting, the administration of all classes of property in the marriage may
be transferred by the courts to the wife:

(1) When she becomes the guardian of her husband;

(2) When she asks for the declaration of his absence;

(3) In case of civil interdiction of the husband.

The courts may also confer the administration to the wife, with such limitation as they may deem advisable, if the
husband should become a fugitive from justice or be in hiding as a defendant in a criminal case, or if, being
absolutely unable to administer, he should have failed to provide for administration. (1441a)

Art. 197. The wife to whom the administration of all the property of the marriage is transferred shall have, with
respect to said property, the same powers and responsibility which the husband has when he is the administrator,
but always subject to the provisions of the last paragraph of the preceding article. (1442a)

CHAPTER 6
SYSTEM OF ABSOLUTE COMMUNITY (n)

Art. 198. In case the future spouses agree in the marriage settlements that the system of absolute community shall
govern their property relations during marriage, the following provisions shall be of supplementary application.

Art. 199. In the absence of stipulation to the contrary, the community shall consist of all present and future
property of the spouses not excepted by law.

Art. 200. Neither spouse may renounce any inheritance without the consent of the other. In case of conflict, the
court shall decide the question, after consulting the family council, if there is any.

Art. 201. The following shall be excluded from the community:

(1) Property acquired by gratuitous title by either spouse, when it is provided by the donor or testator that
it shall not become a part of the community;

(2) Property inherited by either husband or wife through the death of a child by a former marriage, there
being brothers or sisters of the full blood of the deceased child;

(3) A portion of the property of either spouse equivalent to the presumptive legitime of the children by a
former marriage;

(4) Personal belongings of either spouse.

However, all the fruits and income of the foregoing classes of property shall be included in the community.

231
Art. 202. Ante-nuptial debts of either spouse shall not be paid from the community, unless the same have
redounded to the benefit of the family.

Art. 203. Debts contracted by both spouses or by one of them with the consent of the other shall be paid from the
community. If the common property is insufficient to cover common debts, the same may be enforced against the
separate property of the spouses, who shall be equally liable.

Art. 204. Debts contracted by either spouse without the consent of the other shall be chargeable against the
community to the extent that the family may have been benefited thereby.

Art. 205. Indemnities that must be paid by either spouse on account of a crime or of a quasi-delict shall be paid
from the common assets, without any obligation to make reimbursement.

Art. 206. The ownership, administration, possession and enjoyment of the common property belong to both
spouses jointly. In case of disagreement, the courts shall settle the difficulty.

Art. 207. Neither spouse may alienate or encumber any common property without the consent of the other. In case
of unjustifiable refusal by the other spouse, the courts may grant the necessary consent.

Art. 208. The absolute community of property shall be dissolved on any of the grounds specified in Article 175.

Art. 209. When there is a separation in fact between husband and wife, without judicial approval, the provisions of
Article 178 shall apply.

Art. 210. Upon the dissolution and liquidation of the community, the net assets shall be divided equally between
the husband and the wife or their heirs. In case of legal separation or annulment of marriage, the provisions of
Articles 176 and 177 shall apply to the net profits acquired during the marriage.

Art. 211. Liquidation of the absolute community shall be governed by the Rules of Court on the administration of
the estate of deceased persons.

CHAPTER 7
SYSTEM OF COMPLETE SEPARATION OF PROPERTY (n)

Art. 212. Should the future spouses agree in the marriage settlements that their property relations during marriage
shall be based upon the system of complete separation of property, the following provisions shall supplement the
marriage settlements.

Art. 213. Separation of property may refer to present or future property or both. It may be total or partial. In the
latter case, the property not agreed upon as separate shall pertain to the conjugal partnership of gains.

Art. 214. Each spouse shall own, dispose of, possess, administer and enjoy his or her own separate estate, without
the consent of the other. All earnings from any profession, business or industry shall likewise belong to each
spouse.

Art. 215. Each spouse shall proportionately bear the family expenses.

231
 Title VII. - THE FAMILY (n)

CHAPTER 1
THE FAMILY AS AN INSTITUTION

Art. 216. The family is a basic social institution which public policy cherishes and protects.

Art. 217. Family relations shall include those:

(1) Between husband and wife;

(2) Between parent and child;

(3) Among other ascendants and their descendants;

(4) Among brothers and sisters.

Art. 218. The law governs family relations. No custom, practice or agreement which is destructive of the family shall
be recognized or given any effect.

Art. 219. Mutual aid, both moral and material, shall be rendered among members of the same family. Judicial and
administrative officials shall foster this mutual assistance.

Art. 220. In case of doubt, all presumptions favor the solidarity of the family. Thus, every intendment of law or facts
leans toward the validity of marriage, the indissolubility of the marriage bonds, the legitimacy of children, the
community of property during marriage, the authority of parents over their children, and the validity of defense for
any member of the family in case of unlawful aggression.

Art. 221. The following shall be void and of no effect:

(1) Any contract for personal separation between husband and wife;

(2) Every extra-judicial agreement, during marriage, for the dissolution of the conjugal partnership of gains
or of the absolute community of property between husband and wife;

(3) Every collusion to obtain a decree of legal separation, or of annulment of marriage;

(4) Any simulated alienation of property with intent to deprive the compulsory heirs of their legitime.

Art. 222. No suit shall be filed or maintained between members of the same family unless it should appear that
earnest efforts toward a compromise have been made, but that the same have failed, subject to the limitations in
Article 2035.

231
 CHAPTER 2
THE FAMILY HOME (n)

SECTION 1. - General Provisions

Art. 223. The family home is the dwelling house where a person and his family reside, and the land on which it is
situated. If constituted as herein provided, the family home shall be exempt from execution, forced sale or
attachment, except as provided in Articles 232 and 243.

Art. 224. The family home may be established judicially or extrajudicially.

SECTION 2. - Judicial Constitution of the Family Home

Art. 225. The family home may be constituted by a verified petition to the Court of First Instance by the owner of
the property, and by approval thereof by the court.

Art. 226. The following shall be beneficiaries of the family home:

(1) The person establishing the same;

(2) His or her spouse;

(3) His or her parents, ascendants, descendants, brothers and sisters, whether the relationship be
legitimate or otherwise, who are living in the family home and who depend upon him for support.
Art. 227. The family home may also be set up by an unmarried person who is the head of a family or household.

Art. 228. If the petitioner is married, the family home may be selected from the conjugal partnership or community
property, or from the separate property of the husband, or, with the consent of the wife, from her paraphernal
property.

Art. 229. The petition shall contain the following particulars:

(1) Description of the property;

(2) An estimate of its actual value;

(3) A statement that the petitioner is actually residing in the premises;

(4) The encumbrances thereon;

(5) The names and addresses of all the creditors of the petitioner and of all mortgagees and other persons
who have an interest in the property;

(6) The names of the other beneficiaries specified in Article 226.

Art. 230. Creditors, mortgagees and all other persons who have an interest in the estate shall be notified of the
petition, and given an opportunity to present their objections thereto. The petition shall, moreover, be published
once a week for three consecutive weeks in a newspaper of general circulation.

231
Art. 231. If the court finds that the actual value of the proposed family home does not exceed twenty thousand
pesos, or thirty thousand pesos in chartered cities, and that no third person is prejudiced, the petition shall be
approved. Should any creditor whose claim is unsecured, oppose the establishment of the family home, the court
shall grant the petition if the debtor gives sufficient security for the debt.

Art. 232. The family home, after its creation by virtue of judicial approval, shall be exempt from execution, forced
sale, or attachment, except:

(1) For nonpayment of taxes; or

(2) In satisfaction of a judgment on a debt secured by a mortgage constituted on the immovable before or
after the establishment of the family home.

In case of insolvency of the person constituting the family home, the property shall not be considered one of the
assets to be taken possession of by the assignee for the benefit of creditors.

Art. 233. The order of the court approving the establishment of the family home shall be recorded in the Registry of
Property.

Art. 234. When there is danger that a person obliged to give support may lose his or her fortune because of grave
mismanagement or on account of riotous living, his or her spouse, if any, and a majority of those entitled to be
supported by him or by her may petition the Court of First Instance for the creation of the family home.

Art. 235. The family home may be sold, alienated or encumbered by the person who has constituted the same,
with the consent of his or her spouse, and with the approval of the court. However, the family home shall under no
circumstances be donated as long as there are beneficiaries. In case of sale, the price or such portion thereof as
may be determined by the court shall be used in acquiring property which shall be formed into a new family home.
Any sum of money obtained through an encumbrance on the family home shall be used in the interest of the
beneficiaries. The court shall take measures to implement the last two provisions.

Art. 236. The family home may be dissolved upon the petition of the person who has constituted the same, with
the written consent of his or her spouse and of at least one half of all the other beneficiaries who are eighteen
years of age or over. The court may grant the petition if it is satisfactorily shown that the best interest of the family
requires the dissolution of the family home.

Art. 237. In case of legal separation or annulment of marriage, the family home shall be dissolved, and the property
shall cease to be exempt from execution, forced sale or attachment.

Art. 238. Upon the death of the person who has set up the family home, the same shall continue, unless he desired
otherwise in his will. The heirs cannot ask for its partition during the first ten years following the death of the
person constituting the same, unless the court finds powerful reasons therefor.

Art. 239. The family home shall not be subject to payment of the debts of the deceased, unless in his will the
contrary is stated. However, the claims mentioned in Article 232 shall not be adversely affected by the death of the
person who has established the family home.

231
 SECTION 3. - Extra-judicial Creation of the Family Home

Art. 240. The family home may be extrajudicially constituted by recording in the Registry of Property a public
instrument wherein a person declares that he thereby establishes a family home out of a dwelling place with the
land on which it is situated.

Art. 241. The declaration setting up the family home shall be under oath and shall contain:

(1) A statement that the claimant is the owner of, and is actually residing in the premises;

(2) A description of the property;

(3) An estimate of its actual value; and

(4) The names of the claimant's spouse and the other beneficiaries mentioned in Article 226.

Art. 242. The recording in the Registry of Property of the declaration referred to in the two preceding articles is the
operative act which creates the family home.

Art. 243. The family home extrajudicially formed shall be exempt from execution, forced sale or attachment,
except:

(1) For nonpayment of taxes;

(2) For debts incurred before the declaration was recorded in the Registry of Property;

(3) For debts secured by mortgages on the premises before or after such record of the declaration;

(4) For debts due to laborers, mechanics, architects, builders, material-men and others who have rendered
service or furnished material for the prosecution of the building.

Art. 244. The provisions of Articles 226 to 228 and 235 to 238 are likewise applicable to family homes extrajudicially
established.

Art. 245. Upon the death of the person who has extrajudicially constituted the family home, the property shall not
be liable for his debts other than those mentioned in Article 243. However, he may provide in his will that the
family home shall be subject to payment of debts not specified in Article 243.

Art. 246. No declaration for the extrajudicial establishment of the family home shall be recorded in the Registry of
Property if the estimated actual value of the building and the land exceeds the amount stated in Article 231.

Art. 247. When a creditor whose claim is not mentioned in Article 243 obtains a judgment in his favor, and he has
reasonable grounds to believe that the family home of the judgment debtor is worth more than the amount
mentioned in Article 231, he may apply to the Court of First Instance for an order directing the sale of the property
under execution.

Art. 248. The hearing on the petition, appraisal of the value of the family home, the sale under execution and other
matters relative to the proceedings shall be governed by such provisions in the Rules of Court as the Supreme Court
shall promulgate on the subject, provided they are not inconsistent with this Code.

231
Art. 249. At the sale under execution referred to in the two preceding articles, no bid shall be considered unless it
exceeds the amount specified in Article 231. The proceeds of the sale shall be applied in the following order:

(1) To the amount mentioned in Article 231;

(2) To the judgment and the costs.

The excess, if any, belongs to the person constituting the family home.

Art. 250. The amount mentioned in Article 231 thus received by the person who has established the family home,
or as much thereof as the court may determine, shall be invested in constitution of a new family home. The court
shall take measures to enforce this provision.

Art. 251. In case of insolvency of the person creating the family home, the claims specified in Article 243 may be
satisfied notwithstanding the insolvency proceedings.

If the assignee has reasonable grounds to believe that the actual value of the family home exceeds the amount
fixed in Article 231, he may take action under the provisions of Articles 247, 248 and 249.

CHAPTER 3
THE FAMILY COUNCIL (n)

Art. 252. The Court of First Instance may, upon application of any member of the family, a relative, or a friend,
appoint a family council, whose duty it shall be to advise the court, the spouses, the parents, guardians and the
family on important family questions.

Art. 253. The family council shall be composed of five members, who shall be relatives of the parties concerned.
But the court may appoint one or two friends of the family.

Art. 254. The family council shall elect its chairman, and shall meet at the call of the latter or upon order of the
court.

Title VIII. - PATERNITY AND FILIATION

CHAPTER 1
LEGITIMATE CHILDREN

Art. 255. Children born after one hundred and eighty days following the celebration of the marriage, and before
three hundred days following its dissolution or the separation of the spouses shall be presumed to be legitimate.

Against this presumption no evidence shall be admitted other than that of the physical impossibility of the
husband's having access to his wife within the first one hundred and twenty days of three hundred which preceded
the birth of the child.

This physical impossibility may be caused:

(1) By the impotence of the husband;

231
 (2) By the fact that the husband and wife were living separately, in such a way that access was not
possible;

(3) By the serious illness of the husband. (108a)

Art. 256. The child shall be presumed legitimate, although the mother may have declared against its legitimacy or
may have been sentenced as an adulteress. (109)

Art. 257. Should the wife commit adultery at or about the time of the conception of the child, but there was no
physical impossibility of access between her and her husband as set forth in Article 255, the child is prima facie
presumed to be illegitimate if it appears highly improbable, for ethnic reasons, that the child is that of the husband.
For the purposes of this article, the wife's adultery need not be proved in a criminal case. (n)

Art. 258. A child born within one hundred eighty days following the celebration of the marriage is prima facie
presumed to be legitimate. Such a child is conclusively presumed to be legitimate in any of these cases:

(1) If the husband, before the marriage, knew of the pregnancy of the wife;

(2) If he consented, being present, to the putting of his surname on the record of birth of the child;

(3) If he expressly or tacitly recognized the child as his own. (110a)

Art. 259. If the marriage is dissolved by the death of the husband, and the mother contracted another marriage
within three hundred days following such death, these rules shall govern:
(1) A child born before one hundred eighty days after the solemnization of the subsequent marriage is
disputably presumed to have been conceived during the former marriage, provided it be born within three
hundred days after the death of the former husband:

(2) A child born after one hundred eighty days following the celebration of the subsequent marriage is
prima facie presumed to have been conceived during such marriage, even though it be born within the
three hundred days after the death of the former husband. (n)

Art. 260. If after a judgment annulling a marriage, the former wife should believe herself to be pregnant by the
former husband, she shall, within thirty days from the time she became aware of her pregnancy, notify the former
husband or his heirs of that fact. He or his heirs may ask the court to take measures to prevent a simulation of
birth.

The same obligation shall devolve upon a widow who believes herself to have been left pregnant by the deceased
husband, or upon the wife who believes herself to be pregnant by her husband from whom she has been legally
separated. (n)

Art. 261. There is no presumption of legitimacy or illegitimacy of a child born after three hundred days following
the dissolution of the marriage or the separation of the spouses. Whoever alleges the legitimacy or the illegitimacy
of such child must prove his allegation. (n)

Art. 262. The heirs of the husband may impugn the legitimacy of the child only in the following cases:

(1) If the husband should die before the expiration of the period fixed for bringing his action;

(2) If he should die after the filing of the complaint, without having desisted from the same;

231
 (3) If the child was born after the death of the husband. (112)

Art. 263. The action to impugn the legitimacy of the child shall be brought within one year from the recording of
the birth in the Civil Register, if the husband should be in the same place, or in a proper case, any of his heirs.

If he or his heirs are absent, the period shall be eighteen months if they should reside in the Philippines; and two
years if abroad. If the birth of the child has been concealed, the term shall be counted from the discovery of the
fraud. (113a)

Art. 264. Legitimate children shall have the right:

(1) To bear the surnames of the father and of the mother;

(2) To receive support from them, from their ascendants and in a proper case, from their brothers and
sisters, in conformity with Article 291;

(3) To the legitime and other successional rights which this Code recognizes in their favor. (114)

CHAPTER 2
PROOF OF FILIATION OF LEGITIMATE CHILDREN

Art. 265. The filiation of legitimate children is proved by the record of birth appearing in the Civil Register, or by an
authentic document or a final judgment. (115)

Art. 266. In the absence of the titles indicated in the preceding article, the filiation shall be proved by the
continuous possession of status of a legitimate child. (116)

Art. 267. In the absence of a record of birth, authentic document, final judgment or possession of status, legitimate
filiation may be proved by any other means allowed by the Rules of Court and special laws. (117a)

Art. 268. The action to claim his legitimacy may be brought by the child during all his lifetime, and shall be
transmitted to his heirs if he should die during his minority or in a state of insanity. In these cases the heirs shall
have a period of five years within which to institute the action.

The action already commenced by the child is transmitted upon his death to the heirs, if the proceeding has not yet
lapsed. (118)

CHAPTER 3
LEGITIMATED CHILDREN

Art. 269. Only natural children can be legitimated. Children born outside wedlock of parents who, at the time of
the conception of the former, were not disqualified by any impediment to marry each other, are natural. (119a)

Art. 270. Legitimation shall take place by the subsequent marriage between the parents. (120a)

231
Art. 271. Only natural children who have been recognized by the parents before or after the celebration of the
marriage, or have been declared natural children by final judgment, may be considered legitimated by subsequent
marriage.

If a natural child is recognized or judicially declared as natural, such recognition or declaration shall extend to his or
her brothers or sisters of the full blood: Provided, That the consent of the latter shall be implied if they do not
impugn the recognition within four years from the time of such recognition, or in case they are minors, within four
years following the attainment of majority. (121a)

Art. 272. Children who are legitimated by subsequent marriage shall enjoy the same rights as legitimate children.
(122)

Art. 273. Legitimation shall take effect from the time of the child's birth. (123a)

Art. 274. The legitimation of children who died before the celebration of the marriage shall benefit their
descendants. (124)

Art. 275. Legitimation may be impugned by those who are prejudiced in their rights, when it takes place in favor of
those who do not have the legal condition of natural children or when the requisites laid down in this Chapter are
not complied with. (128a)

CHAPTER 4
ILLEGITIMATE CHILDREN

SECTION 1. - Recognition of Natural Children

Art. 276. A natural child may be recognized by the father and mother jointly, or by only one of them. (129)

Art. 277. In case the recognition is made by only one of the parents, it shall be presumed that the child is natural, if
the parent recognizing it had legal capacity to contract marriage at the time of the conception. (130)

Art. 278. Recognition shall be made in the record of birth, a will, a statement before a court of record, or in any
authentic writing. (131a)

Art. 279. A minor who may not contract marriage without parental consent cannot acknowledge a natural child,
unless the parent or guardian approves the acknowledgment or unless the recognition is made in a will. (n)

Art. 280. When the father or the mother makes the recognition separately, he or she shall not reveal the name of
the person with whom he or she had the child; neither shall he or she state any circumstance whereby the other
parent may be identified. (132a)

Art. 281. A child who is of age cannot be recognized without his consent.

When the recognition of a minor does not take place in a record of birth or in a will, judicial approval shall be
necessary.

A minor can in any case impugn the recognition within four years following the attainment of his majority. (133a)

231
Art. 282. A recognized natural child has the right:

(1) To bear the surname of the parent recognizing him:

(2) To receive support from such parent, in conformity with article 291;

(3) To receive, in a proper case, the hereditary portion which is determined in this Code. (134)

Art. 283. In any of the following cases, the father is obliged to recognize the child as his natural child:
(1) In cases of rape, abduction or seduction, when the period of the offense coincides more or less with
that of the conception;

(2) When the child is in continuous possession of status of a child of the alleged father by the direct acts of
the latter or of his family;

(3) When the child was conceived during the time when the mother cohabited with the supposed father;

(4) When the child has in his favor any evidence or proof that the defendant is his father. (n)

Art. 284. The mother is obliged to recognize her natural child:

(1) In any of the cases referred to in the preceding article, as between the child and the mother;

(2) When the birth and the identity of the child are clearly proved. (136a)

Art. 285. The action for the recognition of natural children may be brought only during the lifetime of the presumed
parents, except in the following cases:
(1) If the father or mother died during the minority of the child, in which case the latter may file the action
before the expiration of four years from the attainment of his majority;

(2) If after the death of the father or of the mother a document should appear of which nothing had been
heard and in which either or both parents recognize the child.

In this case, the action must be commenced within four years from the finding of the document. (137a)

Art. 286. The recognition made in favor of a child who does not possess all the conditions stated in Article 269, or in
which the requirements of the law have not been fulfilled, may be impugned by those who are prejudiced by such
recognition. (137)

SECTION 2. - Other Illegitimate Children

Art. 287. Illegitimate children other than natural in accordance with Article 269 and other than natural children by
legal fiction are entitled to support and such successional rights as are granted in this Code. (n)

Art. 288. Minor children mentioned in the preceding article are under the parental authority of the mother. (n)

Art. 289. Investigation of the paternity or maternity of children mentioned in the two preceding articles is
permitted under the circumstances specified in Articles 283 and 284. (n)

231
 Title IX. - SUPPORT

Art. 290. Support is everything that is indispensable for sustenance, dwelling, clothing and medical attendance,
according to the social position of the family.

Support also includes the education of the person entitled to be supported until he completes his education or
training for some profession, trade or vocation, even beyond the age of majority. (124a)

Art. 291. The following are obliged to support each other to the whole extent set forth in the preceding article:

(1) The spouses;

(2) Legitimate ascendants and descendants;

(3) Parents and acknowledged natural children and the legitimate or illegitimate descendants of the latter;

(4) Parents and natural children by legal fiction and the legitimate and illegitimate descendants of the
latter;

(5) Parents and illegitimate children who are not natural.

Brothers and sisters owe their legitimate and natural brothers and sisters, although they are only of the half-blood,
the necessaries for life, when by a physical or mental defect, or any other cause not imputable to the recipients, the
latter cannot secure their subsistence. This assistance includes, in a proper case, expenses necessary for
elementary education and for professional or vocational training. (143a)

Art. 292. During the proceedings for legal separation, or for annulment of marriage, the spouses and children, shall
be supported from the conjugal partnership property. After the final judgment of legal separation, or of annulment
of marriage, the obligation of mutual support between the spouses ceases. However, in case of legal separation,
the court may order that the guilty spouse shall give support to the innocent one, the judgment specifying the
terms of such order. (n)

Art. 293. In an action for legal separation or annulment of marriage, attorney's fees and expenses for litigation shall
be charged to the conjugal partnership property, unless the action fails. (n)

Art. 294. The claim for support, when proper and two or more persons are obliged to give it, shall be made in the
following order:

(1) From the spouse;

(2) From the descendants of the nearest degree;

(3) From the ascendants, also of the nearest degree;

(4) From the brothers and sisters.

Among descendants and ascendants the order in which they are called to the intestate succession of the person
who has a right to claim support shall be observed. (144)

231
Art. 295. When the obligation to give support falls upon two or more persons, the payment of the same shall be
divided between them in proportion to the resources of each.

However, in case of urgent need and by special circumstances, the judge may order only one of them to furnish the
support provisionally, without prejudice to his right to claim from the other obligors the share due from them.

When two or more recipients at the same time claim support from one and the same person legally obliged to give
it, and the latter should not have sufficient means to satisfy all, the order established in the preceding article shall
be followed, unless the concurrent obligees should be the spouse and a child subject to parental authority, in which
case the latter shall be preferred. (145)

Art. 296. The amount of support, in the cases referred to in the five numbers of article 291, shall be in proportion
to the resources or means of the giver and to the necessities of the recipient. (146a)

Art. 297. Support in the cases referred to in the preceding article shall be reduced or increased proportionately,
according to the reduction or increase of the needs of the recipient and the resources of the person obliged to
furnish the same. (147)

Art. 298. The obligation to give support shall be demandable from the time the person who has a right to receive
the same needs it for maintenance, but it shall not be paid except from the date it is extrajudicially demanded.

Payment shall be made monthly in advance, and when the recipient dies, his heirs shall not be obliged to return
what he has received in advance. (148a)

Art. 299. The person obliged to give support may, at his option, fulfill his obligation either by paying the allowance
fixed, or by receiving and maintaining in his house the person who has a right to receive support. The latter
alternative cannot be availed of in case there is a moral or legal obstacle thereto. (149a)

Art. 300. The obligation to furnish support ceases upon the death of the obligor, even if he may be bound to give it
in compliance with a final judgment. (150)

Art. 301. The right to receive support cannot be renounced; nor can it be transmitted to a third person. Neither can
it be compensated with what the recipient owes the obligor.

However, support in arrears may be compensated and renounced, and the right to demand the same may be
transmitted by onerous or gratuitous title. (151)

Art. 302. Neither the right to receive legal support nor any money or property obtained as such support or any
pension or gratuity from the government is subject to attachment or execution. (n)

Art. 303. The obligation to give support shall also cease:

(1) Upon the death of the recipient;

(2) When the resources of the obligor have been reduced to the point where he cannot give the support
without neglecting his own needs and those of his family;

(3) When the recipient may engage in a trade, profession, or industry, or has obtained work, or has
improved his fortune in such a way that he no longer needs the allowance for his subsistence;

231
 (4) When the recipient, be he a forced heir or not, has committed some act which gives rise to
disinheritance;

(5) When the recipient is a descendant, brother or sister of the obligor and the need for support is caused
by his or her bad conduct or by the lack of application to work, so long as this cause subsists. (152a)

Art. 304. The foregoing provisions shall be applicable to other cases where, in virtue of this Code or of any other
law, by will, or by stipulation there is a right to receive support, save what is stipulated, ordered by the testator or
provided by law for the special case. (153a)

Title X. - FUNERALS (n)

Art. 305. The duty and the right to make arrangements for the funeral of a relative shall be in accordance with the
order established for support, under Article 294. In case of descendants of the same degree, or of brothers and
sisters, the oldest shall be preferred. In case of ascendants, the paternal shall have a better right.

Art. 306. Every funeral shall be in keeping with the social position of the deceased.

Art. 307. The funeral shall be in accordance with the expressed wishes of the deceased. In the absence of such
expression, his religious beliefs or affiliation shall determine the funeral rites. In case of doubt, the form of the
funeral shall be decided upon by the person obliged to make arrangements for the same, after consulting the other
members of the family.

Art. 308. No human remains shall be retained, interred, disposed of or exhumed without the consent of the
persons mentioned in articles 294 and 305.

Art. 309. Any person who shows disrespect to the dead, or wrongfully interferes with a funeral shall be liable to the
family of the deceased for damages, material and moral.

Art. 310. The construction of a tombstone or mausoleum shall be deemed a part of the funeral expenses, and shall
be chargeable to the conjugal partnership property, if the deceased is one of the spouses.

Title XI. - PARENTAL AUTHORITY

CHAPTER 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS

Art. 311. The father and mother jointly exercise parental authority over their legitimate children who are not
emancipated. In case of disagreement, the father's decision shall prevail, unless there is a judicial order to the
contrary.

Children are obliged to obey their parents so long as they are under parental power, and to observe respect and
reverence toward them always.

Recognized natural and adopted children who are under the age of majority are under the parental authority of the
father or mother recognizing or adopting them, and are under the same obligation stated in the preceding
paragraph.

231
Natural children by legal fiction are under the joint authority of the father and mother, as provided in the first
paragraph of this article. (154a)

Art. 312. Grandparents shall be consulted by all members of the family on all important family questions. (n)

Art. 313. Parental authority cannot be renounced or transferred, except in cases of guardianship or adoption
approved by the courts, or emancipation by concession.

The courts may, in cases specified by law, deprive parents of their authority. (n)

Art. 314. A foundling shall be under the parental authority of the person or institution that has reared the same. (n)

Art. 315. No descendant can be compelled, in a criminal case, to testify against his parents and ascendants. (n)

CHAPTER 2
EFFECT OF PARENTAL AUTHORITY
UPON THE PERSONS OF THE CHILDREN

Art. 316. The father and the mother have, with respect to their unemancipated children:
(1) The duty to support them, to have them in their company, educate and instruct them in keeping with
their means and to represent them in all actions which may redound to their benefit;

(2) The power to correct them and to punish them moderately. (155)

Art. 317. The courts may appoint a guardian of the child' s property, or a guardian ad litem when the best interest
of the child so requires. (n)

Art. 318. Upon cause being shown by the parents, the local mayor may aid them in the exercise of their authority
over the child. If the child is to be kept in a children's home or similar institution for not more than one month, an
order of the justice of the peace or municipal judge shall be necessary, after due hearing, where the child shall be
heard. For his purpose, the court may appoint a guardian ad litem. (156a)

Art. 319. The father and the mother shall satisfy the support for the detained child; but they shall not have any
intervention in the regime of the institution where the child is detained. They may lift the detention when they
deem it opportune, with the approval of the court. (158a)

CHAPTER 3
EFFECT OF PARENTAL AUTHORITY
ON THE PROPERTY OF THE CHILDREN

Art. 320. The father, or in his absence the mother, is the legal administrator of the property pertaining to the child
under parental authority. If the property is worth more than two thousand pesos, the father or mother shall give a
bond subject to the approval of the Court of First Instance. (159a)

231
Art. 321. The property which the unemancipated child has acquired or may acquire with his work or industry, or by
any lucrative title, belongs to the child in ownership, and in usufruct to the father or mother under whom he is
under parental authority and in whose company he lives; but if the child, with the parent's consent, should live
independently from them, he shall be considered as emancipated for all purposes relative to said property, and he
shall have over it dominion, usufruct and administration. (160)

Art. 322. A child who earns money or acquires property with his own work or industry shall be entitled to a
reasonable allowance from the earnings, in addition to the expenses made by the parents for his support and
education. (n)

Art. 323. The fruits and interest of the child's property referred to in article 321 shall be applied first to the
expenses for the support and education of the child. After they have been fully met, the debts of the conjugal
partnership which have redounded to the benefit of the family may be paid from said fruits and interest. (n)

Art. 324. Whatever the child may acquire with the capital or property of the parents belongs to the latter in
ownership and in usufruct. But if the parents should expressly grant him all or part of the profits that he may
obtain, such profits shall not be charged against his legitime. (161)

Art. 325. The property or income donated, bequeathed or devised to the unemancipated child for the expenses of
his education and instruction shall pertain to him in ownership and usufruct; but the father or mother shall
administer the same, if in the donation or testamentary provision the contrary has not been stated. (162)

Art. 326. When the property of the child is worth more than two thousand pesos, the father or mother shall be
considered a guardian of the child's property, subject to the duties and obligations of guardians under the Rules of
Court. (n)

CHAPTER 4
EXTINGUISHMENT OF PARENTAL AUTHORITY

Art. 327. Parental authority terminates:

(1) Upon the death of the parents or of the child;

(2) Upon emancipation;

(3) Upon adoption of the child;

(4) Upon the appointment of a general guardian. (167a)

Art. 328. The mother who contracts a subsequent marriage loses the parental authority over her children, unless
the deceased husband, father of the latter, has expressly provided in his will that his widow might marry again, and
has ordered that in such case she should keep and exercise parental authority over their children.

The court may also appoint a guardian of the child's property in case the father should contract a subsequent
marriage. (168a)

Art. 329. When the mother of an illegitimate child marries a man other than its father, the court may appoint a
guardian for the child. (n)

231
Art. 330. The father and in a proper case the mother, shall lose authority over their children:

(1) When by final judgment in a criminal case the penalty of deprivation of said authority is imposed upon
him or her;

(2) When by a final judgment in legal separation proceedings such loss of authority is declared. (169a)

Art. 331. Parental authority is suspended by the incapacity or absence of the father, or in a proper case of the
mother, judicially declared, and also by civil interdiction. (170)

Art. 332. The courts may deprive the parents of their authority or suspend the exercise of the same if they should
treat their children with excessive harshness or should give them corrupting orders, counsels, or examples, or
should make them beg or abandon them. In these cases, the courts may also deprive the parents in whole or in
part, of the usufruct over the child's property, or adopt such measures as they may deem advisable in the interest
of the child. (171a)

Art. 333. If the widowed mother who has contracted a subsequent marriage should again become a widow, she
shall recover from this moment her parental authority over all her unemancipated children. (172)

CHAPTER 5
ADOPTION

Art. 334. Every person of age, who is in full possession of his civil rights, may adopt. (173a)

Art. 335. The following cannot adopt:

(1) Those who have legitimate, legitimated, acknowledged natural children, or natural children by legal
fiction;

(2) The guardian, with respect to the ward, before the final approval of his accounts;

(3) A married person, without the consent of the other spouse;

(4) Non-resident aliens;

(5) Resident aliens with whose government the Republic of the Philippines has broken diplomatic
relations;

(6) Any person who has been convicted of a crime involving moral turpitude, when the penalty imposed
was six months' imprisonment or more. (174a)

Art. 336. The husband and wife may jointly adopt. Parental authority shall, in such case, be exercised as if the child
were their own by nature. (n)

Art. 337. Any person, even if of age, may be adopted, provided the adopter is sixteen years older. (173a)

231
Art. 338. The following may be adopted:

(1) The natural child, by the natural father or mother;

(2) Other illegitimate children, by the father or mother;

(3) A step-child, by the step-father or step-mother. (n)

Art. 339. The following cannot be adopted:

(1) A married person, without the written consent of the other spouse;

(2) An alien with whose government the Republic of the Philippines has broken diplomatic relations;

(3) A person who has already been adopted. (n)

Art. 340. The written consent of the following to the adoption shall be necessary:
(1) The person to be adopted, if fourteen years of age or over;

(2) The parents, guardian or person in charge of the person to be adopted. (n)

Art. 341. The adoption shall:

(1) Give to the adopted person the same rights and duties as if he were a legitimate child of the adopter:

(2) Dissolve the authority vested in the parents by nature;

(3) Make the adopted person a legal heir of the adopter;

(4) Entitle the adopted person to use the adopter's surname. (n)

Art. 342. The adopter shall not be a legal heir of the adopted person, whose parents by nature shall inherit from
him. (177a)

Art. 343. If the adopter is survived by legitimate parents or ascendants and by an adopted person, the latter shall
not have more succession rights than an acknowledged natural child. (n)

Art. 344. The adopter may donate property, by an act inter vivo or by will, to the adopted person, who shall acquire
ownership thereof. (n)

Art. 345. The proceedings for adoption shall be governed by the Rules of Court insofar as they are not in conflict
with this Code. (n)

Art. 346. The adoption shall be recorded in the local civil register. (179a)

Art. 347. A minor or other incapacitated person may, through a guardian ad litem, ask for the rescission of the
adoption on the same grounds that cause the loss of parental authority. (n)

Art. 348. The adopter may petition the court for revocation of the adoption in any of these cases:

(1) If the adopted person has attempted against the life of the adopter;

231
 (2) When the adopted minor has abandoned the home of the adopter for more than three years;

(3) When by other acts the adopted person has definitely repudiated the adoption. (n)

CHAPTER 6
SUBSTITUTE PARENTAL AUTHORITY (n)

Art. 349. The following persons shall exercise substitute parental authority:
(1) Guardians;

(2) Teachers and professors;

(3) Heads of children's homes, orphanages, and similar institutions;

(4) Directors of trade establishments, with regard to apprentices;

(5) Grandparents;

(6) The oldest brother or sister.

Art. 350. The persons named in the preceding article shall exercise reasonable supervision over the conduct of the
child.

Art. 351. A general guardian or a guardian over the person shall have the same authority over the ward's person as
the parents. With regard to the child's property, the Rules of Court on guardianship shall govern.

Art. 352. The relations between teacher and pupil, professor and student, are fixed by government regulations and
those of each school or institution. In no case shall corporal punishment be countenanced. The teacher or
professor shall cultivate the best potentialities of the heart and mind of the pupil or student.

Art. 353. Apprentices shall be treated humanely. No corporal punishment against the apprentice shall be permitted.

Art. 354. Grandparents and in their default the oldest brother or sister shall exercise parental authority in case of
death or absence of the child's parents. If the parents are living, or if the child is under guardianship, the
grandparents may give advice and counsel to the child, to the parents or to the guardian.

Art. 355. Substitute parental authority shall be exercised by the grandparents in the following order:

(1) Paternal grandparents;

(2) Maternal grandparents.

Title XII. - CARE AND EDUCATION OF CHILDREN

Art. 356. Every child:

(1) Is entitled to parental care;

(2) Shall receive at least elementary education;

231
 (3) Shall be given moral and civic training by the parents or guardian;

(4) Has a right to live in an atmosphere conducive to his physical, moral and intellectual development.

Art. 357. Every child shall:

(1) Obey and honor his parents or guardian;

(2) Respect his grandparents, old relatives, and persons holding substitute parental authority;

(3) Exert his utmost for his education and training;

(4) Cooperate with the family in all matters that make for the good of the same.

Art. 358. Every parent and every person holding substitute parental authority shall see to it that the rights of the
child are respected and his duties complied with, and shall particularly, by precept and example, imbue the child
with highmindedness, love of country, veneration for the national heroes, fidelity to democracy as a way of life, and
attachment to the ideal of permanent world peace.

Art. 359. The government promotes the full growth of the faculties of every child. For this purpose, the government
will establish, whenever possible:

(1) Schools in every barrio, municipality and city where optional religious instruction shall be taught as
part of the curriculum at the option of the parent or guardian;

(2) Puericulture and similar centers;

(3) Councils for the Protection of Children; and

(4) Juvenile courts.

Art. 360. The Council for the Protection of Children shall look after the welfare of children in the municipality. It
shall, among other functions:
(1) Foster the education of every child in the municipality;

(2) Encourage the cultivation of the duties of parents;

(3) Protect and assist abandoned or mistreated children, and orphans;

(4) Take steps to prevent juvenile delinquency;

(5) Adopt measures for the health of children;

(6) Promote the opening and maintenance of playgrounds;

(7) Coordinate the activities of organizations devoted to the welfare of children, and secure their
cooperation.

Art. 361. Juvenile courts will be established, as far as practicable, in every chartered city or large municipality.

231
Art. 362. Whenever a child is found delinquent by any court, the father, mother, or guardian may in a proper case
be judicially admonished.

Art. 363. In all questions on the care, custody, education and property of children the latter's welfare shall be
paramount. No mother shall be separated from her child under seven years of age, unless the court finds
compelling reasons for such measure.

Title XIII. - USE OF SURNAMES (n)

Art. 364. Legitimate and legitimated children shall principally use the surname of the father.

Art. 365. An adopted child shall bear the surname of the adopter.

Art. 366. A natural child acknowledged by both parents shall principally use the surname of the father. If recognized
by only one of the parents, a natural child shall employ the surname of the recognizing parent.

Art. 367. Natural children by legal fiction shall principally employ the surname of the father.

Art. 368. Illegitimate children referred to in Article 287 shall bear the surname of the mother.

Art. 369. Children conceived before the decree annulling a voidable marriage shall principally use the surname of
the father.

Art. 370. A married woman may use:

(1) Her maiden first name and surname and add her husband's surname, or

(2) Her maiden first name and her husband's surname or

(3) Her husband's full name, but prefixing a word indicating that she is his wife, such as "Mrs."

Art. 371. In case of annulment of marriage, and the wife is the guilty party, she shall resume her maiden name and
surname. If she is the innocent spouse, she may resume her maiden name and surname. However, she may choose
to continue employing her former husband's surname, unless:
(1) The court decrees otherwise, or

(2) She or the former husband is married again to another person.

Art. 372. When legal separation has been granted, the wife shall continue using her name and surname employed
before the legal separation.

Art. 373. A widow may use the deceased husband's surname as though he were still living, in accordance with
Article 370.

Art. 374. In case of identity of names and surnames, the younger person shall be obliged to use such additional
name or surname as will avoid confusion.

231
Art. 375. In case of identity of names and surnames between ascendants and descendants, the word "Junior" can
be used only by a son. Grandsons and other direct male descendants shall either:

(1) Add a middle name or the mother's surname, or

(2) Add the Roman Numerals II, III, and so on.

Art. 376. No person can change his name or surname without judicial authority.

Art. 377. Usurpation of a name and surname may be the subject of an action for damages and other relief.

Art. 378. The unauthorized or unlawful use of another person's surname gives a right of action to the latter.

Art. 379. The employment of pen names or stage names is permitted, provided it is done in good faith and there is
no injury to third persons. Pen names and stage names cannot be usurped.

Art. 380. Except as provided in the preceding article, no person shall use different names and surnames.

Title XIV. - ABSENCE

CHAPTER 1
PROVISIONAL MEASURES IN CASE OF ABSENCE

Art. 381. When a person disappears from his domicile, his whereabouts being unknown, and without leaving an
agent to administer his property, the judge, at the instance of an interested party, a relative, or a friend, may
appoint a person to represent him in all that may be necessary.

This same rule shall be observed when under similar circumstances the power conferred by the absentee has
expired. (181a)

Art. 382. The appointment referred to in the preceding article having been made, the judge shall take the necessary
measures to safeguard the rights and interests of the absentee and shall specify the powers, obligations and
remuneration of his representative, regulating them, according to the circumstances, by the rules concerning
guardians. (182)

Art. 383. In the appointment of a representative, the spouse present shall be preferred when there is no legal
separation.

If the absentee left no spouse, or if the spouse present is a minor, any competent person may be appointed by the
court. (183a)

231
 CHAPTER 2
DECLARATION OF ABSENCE

Art. 384. Two years having elapsed without any news about the absentee or since the receipt of the last news, and
five years in case the absentee has left a person in charge of the administration of his property, his absence may be
declared. (184)

Art. 385. The following may ask for the declaration of absence:

(1) The spouse present;

(2) The heirs instituted in a will, who may present an authentic copy of the same;

(3) The relatives who may succeed by the law of intestacy;

(4) Those who may have over the property of the absentee some right subordinated to the condition of his
death. (185)

Art. 386. The judicial declaration of absence shall not take effect until six months after its publication in a
newspaper of general circulation. (186a)

CHAPTER 3
ADMINISTRATION OF THE PROPERTY OF THE ABSENTEE

Art. 387. An administrator of the absentee's property shall be appointed in accordance with Article 383. (187a)

Art. 388. The wife who is appointed as an administratrix of the husband's property cannot alienate or encumber
the husband's property, or that of the conjugal partnership, without judicial authority. (188a)

Art. 389. The administration shall cease in any of the following cases:

(1) When the absentee appears personally or by means of an agent;

(2) When the death of the absentee is proved and his testate or intestate heirs appear;

(3) When a third person appears, showing by a proper document that he has acquired the absentee's
property by purchase or other title.

In these cases the administrator shall cease in the performance of his office, and the property shall be at the
disposal of those who may have a right thereto. (190)

CHAPTER 4
PRESUMPTION OF DEATH

Art. 390. After an absence of seven years, it being unknown whether or not the absentee still lives, he shall be
presumed dead for all purposes, except for those of succession.

231
The absentee shall not be presumed dead for the purpose of opening his succession till after an absence of ten
years. If he disappeared after the age of seventy-five years, an absence of five years shall be sufficient in order that
his succession may be opened. (n)

Art. 391. The following shall be presumed dead for all purposes, including the division of the estate among the
heirs:

(1) A person on board a vessel lost during a sea voyage, or an aeroplane which is missing, who has not
been heard of for four years since the loss of the vessel or aeroplane;

(2) A person in the armed forces who has taken part in war, and has been missing for four years;

(3) A person who has been in danger of death under other circumstances and his existence has not been
known for four years. (n)

Art. 392. If the absentee appears, or without appearing his existence is proved, he shall recover his property in the
condition in which it may be found, and the price of any property that may have been alienated or the property
acquired therewith; but he cannot claim either fruits or rents. (194)

CHAPTER 5
EFFECT OF ABSENCE UPON THE
CONTINGENT RIGHTS OF THE ABSENTEE

Art. 393. Whoever claims a right pertaining to a person whose existence is not recognized must prove that he was
living at the time his existence was necessary in order to acquire said right. (195)

Art. 394. Without prejudice to the provision of the preceding article, upon the opening of a succession to which an
absentee is called, his share shall accrue to his co-heirs, unless he has heirs, assigns, or a representative. They shall
all, as the case may be, make an inventory of the property. (196a)

Art. 395. The provisions of the preceding article are understood to be without prejudice to the action of petition for
inheritance or other rights which are vested in the absentee, his representatives or successors in interest. These
rights shall not be extinguished save by lapse of time fixed for prescription. In the record that is made in the
Registry of the real estate which accrues to the coheirs, the circumstance of its being subject to the provisions of
this article shall be stated. (197)

Art. 396. Those who may have entered upon the inheritance shall appropriate the fruits received in good faith so
long as the absentee does not appear, or while his representatives or successors in interest do not bring the proper
actions. (198)

231
 Title XV. - EMANCIPATION AND AGE OF MAJORITY

CHAPTER 1
EMANCIPATION

Art. 397. Emancipation takes place:

(1) By the marriage of the minor;

(2) By the attainment of majority;

(3) By the concession of the father or of the mother who exercise parental authority. (314)

Art. 398. Emancipation treated of in No. 3 of the preceding article shall be effected in a public instrument which
shall be recorded in the Civil Register, and unless so recorded, it shall take no effect against third persons. (316a)

Art. 399. Emancipation by marriage or by voluntary concession shall terminate parental authority over the child's
person. It shall enable the minor to administer his property as though he were of age, but he cannot borrow money
or alienate or encumber real property without the consent of his father or mother, or guardian. He can sue and be
sued in court only with the assistance of his father, mother or guardian. (317a)

Art. 400. In order that emancipation by concession of the father or of the mother may take place, it is required that
the minor be eighteen years of age, and that he give his consent thereto. (318)

Art. 401. Emancipation is final or irrevocable. (319a)

CHAPTER 2
AGE OF MAJORITY

Art. 402. Majority commences upon the attainment of the age of twenty-one years.

The person who has reached majority is qualified for all acts of civil life, save the exceptions established by this
Code in special cases. (320a)

Art. 403. Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding article, a daughter above twenty-one but below twenty-
three years of age cannot leave the parental home without the consent of the father or mother in whose company
she lives, except to become a wife, or when she exercises a profession or calling, or when the father or mother has
contracted a subsequent marriage. (321a)

Art. 404. An orphan who is minor may, at the instance of any relative or other person, obtain emancipation by
concession upon an order of the Court of First Instance. (322a)

Art. 405. For the concession and approval referred to in the preceding article it is necessary:

(1) That the minor be eighteen years of age;

(2) That he consent thereto; and

231
 (3) That the concession be deemed convenient for the minor.

The concession shall be recorded in the Civil Register. (323a)

Art. 406. The provisions of Article 399 are applicable to an orphan who has been emancipated according to Article
404. The court will give the necessary approval with respect to the contracts mentioned in Article 399. In litigations,
a guardian ad litem for the minor shall be appointed by the court. (324a)

Title XVI. - CIVIL REGISTER

Art. 407. Acts, events and judicial decrees concerning the civil status of persons shall be recorded in the civil
register. (325a)

Art. 408. The following shall be entered in the civil register:

(1) Births;
(2) marriages;
(3) deaths;
(4) legal separations;
(5) annulments of marriage;
(6) judgments declaring marriages void from the beginning;
(7) legitimations;
(8) adoptions;
(9) acknowledgments of natural children;
(10) naturalization;
(11) loss, or (12) recovery of citizenship;
(13) civil interdiction;
(14) judicial determination of filiation;
(15) voluntary emancipation of a minor; and
(16) changes of name. (326a)
Art. 409. In cases of legal separation, adoption, naturalization and other judicial orders mentioned in the preceding
article, it shall be the duty of the clerk of the court which issued the decree to ascertain whether the same has
been registered, and if this has not been done, to send a copy of said decree to the civil registry of the city or
municipality where the court is functioning. (n)

Art. 410. The books making up the civil register and all documents relating thereto shall be considered public
documents and shall be prima facie evidence of the facts therein contained. (n)

Art. 411. Every civil registrar shall be civilly responsible for any unauthorized alteration made in any civil register, to
any person suffering damage thereby. However, the civil registrar may exempt himself from such liability if he
proves that he has taken every reasonable precaution to prevent the unlawful alteration. (n)

Art. 412. No entry in a civil register shall be changed or corrected, without a judicial order. (n)

Art. 413. All other matters pertaining to the registration of civil status shall be governed by special laws. (n)

231
 REPUBLIC ACT NO. 386
AN ACT TO ORDAIN AND INSTITUTE
THE CIVIL CODE OF THE PHILIPPINES

BOOK II

PROPERTY, OWNERSHIP, AND ITS MODIFICATIONS

Title I. - CLASSIFICATION OF PROPERTY

PRELIMINARY PROVISIONS

Art. 414. All things which are or may be the object of appropriation are considered either:
(1) Immovable or real property; or

(2) Movable or personal property. (333)

CHAPTER 1
IMMOVABLE PROPERTY

Art. 415. The following are immovable property:

(1) Land, buildings, roads and constructions of all kinds adhered to the soil;

(2) Trees, plants, and growing fruits, while they are attached to the land or form an integral part of an
immovable;

(3) Everything attached to an immovable in a fixed manner, in such a way that it cannot be separated
therefrom without breaking the material or deterioration of the object;

(4) Statues, reliefs, paintings or other objects for use or ornamentation, placed in buildings or on lands by
the owner of the immovable in such a manner that it reveals the intention to attach them permanently to
the tenements;

(5) Machinery, receptacles, instruments or implements intended by the owner of the tenement for an
industry or works which may be carried on in a building or on a piece of land, and which tend directly to
meet the needs of the said industry or works;

(6) Animal houses, pigeon-houses, beehives, fish ponds or breeding places of similar nature, in case their
owner has placed them or preserves them with the intention to have them permanently attached to the
land, and forming a permanent part of it; the animals in these places are included;

(7) Fertilizer actually used on a piece of land;

(8) Mines, quarries, and slag dumps, while the matter thereof forms part of the bed, and waters either
running or stagnant;

231
 (9) Docks and structures which, though floating, are intended by their nature and object to remain at a
fixed place on a river, lake, or coast;

(10) Contracts for public works, and servitudes and other real rights over immovable property. (334a)

CHAPTER 2
MOVABLE PROPERTY

Art. 416. The following things are deemed to be personal property:

(1) Those movables susceptible of appropriation which are not included in the preceding article;

(2) Real property which by any special provision of law is considered as personal property;

(3) Forces of nature which are brought under control by science; and

(4) In general, all things which can be transported from place to place without impairment of the real
property to which they are fixed. (335a)

Art. 417. The following are also considered as personal property:

(1) Obligations and actions which have for their object movables or demandable sums; and

(2) Shares of stock of agricultural, commercial and industrial entities, although they may have real estate.
(336a)

Art. 418. Movable property is either consumable or nonconsumable. To the first class belong those movables which
cannot be used in a manner appropriate to their nature without their being consumed; to the second class belong
all the others. (337)

CHAPTER 3
PROPERTY IN RELATION TO THE PERSON TO WHOM IT BELONGS

Art. 419. Property is either of public dominion or of private ownership. (338)

Art. 420. The following things are property of public dominion:

(1) Those intended for public use, such as roads, canals, rivers, torrents, ports and bridges constructed by
the State, banks, shores, roadsteads, and others of similar character;

(2) Those which belong to the State, without being for public use, and are intended for some public
service or for the development of the national wealth. (339a)

Art. 421. All other property of the State, which is not of the character stated in the preceding article, is patrimonial
property. (340a)

Art. 422. Property of public dominion, when no longer intended for public use or for public service, shall form part
of the patrimonial property of the State. (341a)

231
Art. 423. The property of provinces, cities, and municipalities is divided into property for public use and patrimonial
property. (343)

Art. 424. Property for public use, in the provinces, cities, and municipalities, consist of the provincial roads, city
streets, municipal streets, the squares, fountains, public waters, promenades, and public works for public service
paid for by said provinces, cities, or municipalities.

All other property possessed by any of them is patrimonial and shall be governed by this Code, without prejudice
to the provisions of special laws. (344a)

Art. 425. Property of private ownership, besides the patrimonial property of the State, provinces, cities, and
municipalities, consists of all property belonging to private persons, either individually or collectively. (345a)

PROVISIONS COMMON TO THE THREE PRECEDING CHAPTERS

Art. 426. Whenever by provision of the law, or an individual declaration, the expression "immovable things or
property," or "movable things or property," is used, it shall be deemed to include, respectively, the things
enumerated in Chapter 1 and Chapter 2.

Whenever the word "muebles," or "furniture," is used alone, it shall not be deemed to include money, credits,
commercial securities, stocks and bonds, jewelry, scientific or artistic collections, books, medals, arms, clothing,
horses or carriages and their accessories, grains, liquids and merchandise, or other things which do not have as
their principal object the furnishing or ornamenting of a building, except where from the context of the law, or the
individual declaration, the contrary clearly appears. (346a)

Title II. - OWNERSHIP

CHAPTER 1
OWNERSHIP IN GENERAL

Art. 427. Ownership may be exercised over things or rights. (n)

Art. 428. The owner has the right to enjoy and dispose of a thing, without other limitations than those established
by law.

The owner has also a right of action against the holder and possessor of the thing in order to recover it. (348a)

Art. 429. The owner or lawful possessor of a thing has the right to exclude any person from the enjoyment and
disposal thereof. For this purpose, he may use such force as may be reasonably necessary to repel or prevent an
actual or threatened unlawful physical invasion or usurpation of his property. (n)

Art. 430. Every owner may enclose or fence his land or tenements by means of walls, ditches, live or dead hedges,
or by any other means without detriment to servitudes constituted thereon. (388)

Art. 431. The owner of a thing cannot make use thereof in such manner as to injure the rights of a third person. (n)

231
Art. 432. The owner of a thing has no right to prohibit the interference of another with the same, if the
interference is necessary to avert an imminent danger and the threatened damage, compared to the damage
arising to the owner from the interference, is much greater. The owner may demand from the person benefited
indemnity for the damage to him. (n)

Art. 433. Actual possession under claim of ownership raises disputable presumption of ownership. The true owner
must resort to judicial process for the recovery of the property. (n)

Art. 434. In an action to recover, the property must be identified, and the plaintiff must rely on the strength of his
title and not on the weakness of the defendant's claim. (n)

Art. 435. No person shall be deprived of his property except by competent authority and for public use and always
upon payment of just compensation.

Should this requirement be not first complied with, the courts shall protect and, in a proper case, restore the
owner in his possession. (349a)

Art. 436. When any property is condemned or seized by competent authority in the interest of health, safety or
security, the owner thereof shall not be entitled to compensation, unless he can show that such condemnation or
seizure is unjustified. (n)

Art. 437. The owner of a parcel of land is the owner of its surface and of everything under it, and he can construct
thereon any works or make any plantations and excavations which he may deem proper, without detriment to
servitudes and subject to special laws and ordinances. He cannot complain of the reasonable requirements of
aerial navigation. (350a)

Art. 438. Hidden treasure belongs to the owner of the land, building, or other property on which it is found.

Nevertheless, when the discovery is made on the property of another, or of the State or any of its subdivisions, and
by chance, one-half thereof shall be allowed to the finder. If the finder is a trespasser, he shall not be entitled to
any share of the treasure.

If the things found be of interest to science of the arts, the State may acquire them at their just price, which shall
be divided in conformity with the rule stated. (351a)

Art. 439. By treasure is understood, for legal purposes, any hidden and unknown deposit of money, jewelry, or
other precious objects, the lawful ownership of which does not appear. (352)

CHAPTER 3
RIGHT OF ACCESSION

GENERAL PROVISIONS

Art. 440. The ownership of property gives the right by accession to everything which is produced thereby, or which
is incorporated or attached thereto, either naturally or artificially. (353)

231
 SECTION 1. - Right of Accession with Respect to
What is Produced by Property

Art. 441. To the owner belongs:

(1) The natural fruits;

(2) The industrial fruits;

(3) The civil fruits. (354)

Art. 442. Natural fruits are the spontaneous products of the soil, and the young and other products of animals.

Industrial fruits are those produced by lands of any kind through cultivation or labor.

Civil fruits are the rents of buildings, the price of leases of lands and other property and the amount of perpetual or
life annuities or other similar income. (355a)

Art. 443. He who receives the fruits has the obligation to pay the expenses made by a third person in their
production, gathering, and preservation. (356)

Art. 444. Only such as are manifest or born are considered as natural or industrial fruits.

With respect to animals, it is sufficient that they are in the womb of the mother, although unborn. (357)

SECTION 2. - Right of Accession with Respect

to Immovable Property

Art. 445. Whatever is built, planted or sown on the land of another and the improvements or repairs made
thereon, belong to the owner of the land, subject to the provisions of the following articles. (358)

Art. 446. All works, sowing, and planting are presumed made by the owner and at his expense, unless the contrary
is proved. (359)

Art. 447. The owner of the land who makes thereon, personally or through another, plantings, constructions or
works with the materials of another, shall pay their value; and, if he acted in bad faith, he shall also be obliged to
the reparation of damages. The owner of the materials shall have the right to remove them only in case he can do
so without injury to the work constructed, or without the plantings, constructions or works being destroyed.
However, if the landowner acted in bad faith, the owner of the materials may remove them in any event, with a
right to be indemnified for damages. (360a)

Art. 448. The owner of the land on which anything has been built, sown or planted in good faith, shall have the
right to appropriate as his own the works, sowing or planting, after payment of the indemnity provided for in
Articles 546 and 548, or to oblige the one who built or planted to pay the price of the land, and the one who
sowed, the proper rent. However, the builder or planter cannot be obliged to buy the land if its value is
considerably more than that of the building or trees. In such case, he shall pay reasonable rent, if the owner of the
land does not choose to appropriate the building or trees after proper indemnity. The parties shall agree upon the
terms of the lease and in case of disagreement, the court shall fix the terms thereof. (361a)

231
Art. 449. He who builds, plants or sows in bad faith on the land of another, loses what is built, planted or sown
without right to indemnity. (362)

Art. 450. The owner of the land on which anything has been built, planted or sown in bad faith may demand the
demolition of the work, or that the planting or sowing be removed, in order to replace things in their former
condition at the expense of the person who built, planted or sowed; or he may compel the builder or planter to pay
the price of the land, and the sower the proper rent. (363a)

Art. 451. In the cases of the two preceding articles, the landowner is entitled to damages from the builder, planter
or sower. (n)

Art. 452. The builder, planter or sower in bad faith is entitled to reimbursement for the necessary expenses of
preservation of the land. (n)

Art. 453. If there was bad faith, not only on the part of the person who built, planted or sowed on the land of
another, but also on the part of the owner of such land, the rights of one and the other shall be the same as though
both had acted in good faith.

It is understood that there is bad faith on the part of the landowner whenever the act was done with his
knowledge and without opposition on his part. (354a)

Art. 454. When the landowner acted in bad faith and the builder, planter or sower proceeded in good faith, the
provisions of article 447 shall apply. (n)

Art. 455. If the materials, plants or seeds belong to a third person who has not acted in bad faith, the owner of the
land shall answer subsidiarily for their value and only in the event that the one who made use of them has no
property with which to pay.

This provision shall not apply if the owner makes use of the right granted by article 450. If the owner of the
materials, plants or seeds has been paid by the builder, planter or sower, the latter may demand from the
landowner the value of the materials and labor. (365a)

Art. 456. In the cases regulated in the preceding articles, good faith does not necessarily exclude negligence, which
gives right to damages under article 2176. (n)

Art. 457. To the owners of lands adjoining the banks of rivers belong the accretion which they gradually receive
from the effects of the current of the waters. (336)

Art. 458. The owners of estates adjoining ponds or lagoons do not acquire the land left dry by the natural decrease
of the waters, or lose that inundated by them in extraordinary floods. (367)

Art. 459. Whenever the current of a river, creek or torrent segregates from an estate on its bank a known portion of
land and transfers it to another estate, the owner of the land to which the segregated portion belonged retains the
ownership of it, provided that he removes the same within two years. (368a)

Art. 460. Trees uprooted and carried away by the current of the waters belong to the owner of the land upon which
they may be cast, if the owners do not claim them within six months. If such owners claim them, they shall pay the
expenses incurred in gathering them or putting them in a safe place. (369a)

Art. 461. River beds which are abandoned through the natural change in the course of the waters ipso facto belong
to the owners whose lands are occupied by the new course in proportion to the area lost. However, the owners of

231
the lands adjoining the old bed shall have the right to acquire the same by paying the value thereof, which value
shall not exceed the value of the area occupied by the new bed. (370a)

Art. 462. Whenever a river, changing its course by natural causes, opens a new bed through a private estate, this
bed shall become of public dominion. (372a)

Art. 463. Whenever the current of a river divides itself into branches, leaving a piece of land or part thereof
isolated, the owner of the land retains his ownership. He also retains it if a portion of land is separated from the
estate by the current. (374)

Art. 464. Islands which may be formed on the seas within the jurisdiction of the Philippines, on lakes, and on
navigable or floatable rivers belong to the State. (371a)

Art. 465. Islands which through successive accumulation of alluvial deposits are formed in non-navigable and non-
floatable rivers, belong to the owners of the margins or banks nearest to each of them, or to the owners of both
margins if the island is in the middle of the river, in which case it shall be divided longitudinally in halves. If a single
island thus formed be more distant from one margin than from the other, the owner of the nearer margin shall be
the sole owner thereof. (373a)

SECTION 3. - Right of Accession

with Respect to Movable Property

Art. 466. Whenever two movable things belonging to different owners are, without bad faith, united in such a way
that they form a single object, the owner of the principal thing acquires the accessory, indemnifying the former
owner thereof for its value. (375)

Art. 467. The principal thing, as between two things incorporated, is deemed to be that to which the other has
been united as an ornament, or for its use or perfection. (376)

Art. 468. If it cannot be determined by the rule given in the preceding article which of the two things incorporated
is the principal one, the thing of the greater value shall be so considered, and as between two things of equal
value, that of the greater volume.

In painting and sculpture, writings, printed matter, engraving and lithographs, the board, metal, stone, canvas,
paper or parchment shall be deemed the accessory thing. (377)

Art. 469. Whenever the things united can be separated without injury, their respective owners may demand their
separation.

Nevertheless, in case the thing united for the use, embellishment or perfection of the other, is much more precious
than the principal thing, the owner of the former may demand its separation, even though the thing to which it has
been incorporated may suffer some injury. (378)

Art. 470. Whenever the owner of the accessory thing has made the incorporation in bad faith, he shall lose the
thing incorporated and shall have the obligation to indemnify the owner of the principal thing for the damages he
may have suffered.

231
If the one who has acted in bad faith is the owner of the principal thing, the owner of the accessory thing shall have
a right to choose between the former paying him its value or that the thing belonging to him be separated, even
though for this purpose it be necessary to destroy the principal thing; and in both cases, furthermore, there shall
be indemnity for damages.

If either one of the owners has made the incorporation with the knowledge and without the objection of the other,
their respective rights shall be determined as though both acted in good faith. (379a)

Art. 471. Whenever the owner of the material employed without his consent has a right to an indemnity, he may
demand that this consist in the delivery of a thing equal in kind and value, and in all other respects, to that
employed, or else in the price thereof, according to expert appraisal. (380)

Art. 472. If by the will of their owners two things of the same or different kinds are mixed, or if the mixture occurs
by chance, and in the latter case the things are not separable without injury, each owner shall acquire a right
proportional to the part belonging to him, bearing in mind the value of the things mixed or confused. (381)

Art. 473. If by the will of only one owner, but in good faith, two things of the same or different kinds are mixed or
confused, the rights of the owners shall be determined by the provisions of the preceding article.

If the one who caused the mixture or confusion acted in bad faith, he shall lose the thing belonging to him thus
mixed or confused, besides being obliged to pay indemnity for the damages caused to the owner of the other thing
with which his own was mixed. (382)

Art. 474. One who in good faith employs the material of another in whole or in part in order to make a thing of a
different kind, shall appropriate the thing thus transformed as his own, indemnifying the owner of the material for
its value.

If the material is more precious than the transformed thing or is of more value, its owner may, at his option,
appropriate the new thing to himself, after first paying indemnity for the value of the work, or demand indemnity
for the material.

If in the making of the thing bad faith intervened, the owner of the material shall have the right to appropriate the
work to himself without paying anything to the maker, or to demand of the latter that he indemnify him for the
value of the material and the damages he may have suffered. However, the owner of the material cannot
appropriate the work in case the value of the latter, for artistic or scientific reasons, is considerably more than that
of the material. (383a)

Art. 475. In the preceding articles, sentimental value shall be duly appreciated. (n)

CHAPTER 3
QUIETING OF TITLE (n)

Art. 476. Whenever there is a cloud on title to real property or any interest therein, by reason of any instrument,
record, claim, encumbrance or proceeding which is apparently valid or effective but is in truth and in fact invalid,
ineffective, voidable, or unenforceable, and may be prejudicial to said title, an action may be brought to remove
such cloud or to quiet the title.

An action may also be brought to prevent a cloud from being cast upon title to real property or any interest therein.

231
Art. 477. The plaintiff must have legal or equitable title to, or interest in the real property which is the subject
matter of the action. He need not be in possession of said property.

Art. 478. There may also be an action to quiet title or remove a cloud therefrom when the contract, instrument or
other obligation has been extinguished or has terminated, or has been barred by extinctive prescription.

Art. 479. The plaintiff must return to the defendant all benefits he may have received from the latter, or reimburse
him for expenses that may have redounded to the plaintiff's benefit.

Art. 480. The principles of the general law on the quieting of title are hereby adopted insofar as they are not in
conflict with this Code.

Art. 481. The procedure for the quieting of title or the removal of a cloud therefrom shall be governed by such rules
of court as the Supreme Court shall promulgated.

CHAPTER 4
RUINOUS BUILDINGS AND TREES IN DANGER OF FALLING

Art. 482. If a building, wall, column, or any other construction is in danger of falling, the owner shall be obliged to
demolish it or to execute the necessary work in order to prevent it from falling.

If the proprietor does not comply with this obligation, the administrative authorities may order the demolition of
the structure at the expense of the owner, or take measures to insure public safety. (389a)

Art. 483. Whenever a large tree threatens to fall in such a way as to cause damage to the land or tenement of
another or to travelers over a public or private road, the owner of the tree shall be obliged to fell and remove it;
and should he not do so, it shall be done at his expense by order of the administrative authorities. (390a)

Title III. - CO-OWNERSHIP

Art. 484. There is co-ownership whenever the ownership of an undivided thing or right belongs to different
persons.

In default of contracts, or of special provisions, co-ownership shall be governed by the provisions of this Title. (392)

Art. 485. The share of the co-owners, in the benefits as well as in the charges, shall be proportional to their
respective interests. Any stipulation in a contract to the contrary shall be void.

The portions belonging to the co-owners in the co-ownership shall be presumed equal, unless the contrary is
proved. (393a)

Art. 486. Each co-owner may use the thing owned in common, provided he does so in accordance with the purpose
for which it is intended and in such a way as not to injure the interest of the co-ownership or prevent the other co-
owners from using it according to their rights. The purpose of the co-ownership may be changed by agreement,
express or implied. (394a)

231
Art. 487. Any one of the co-owners may bring an action in ejectment. (n)

Art. 488. Each co-owner shall have a right to compel the other co-owners to contribute to the expenses of
preservation of the thing or right owned in common and to the taxes. Any one of the latter may exempt himself
from this obligation by renouncing so much of his undivided interest as may be equivalent to his share of the
expenses and taxes. No such waiver shall be made if it is prejudicial to the co-ownership. (395a)

Art. 489. Repairs for preservation may be made at the will of one of the co-owners, but he must, if practicable, first
notify his co-owners of the necessity for such repairs. Expenses to improve or embellish the thing shall be decided
upon by a majority as determined in Article 492. (n)

Art. 490. Whenever the different stories of a house belong to different owners, if the titles of ownership do not
specify the terms under which they should contribute to the necessary expenses and there exists no agreement on
the subject, the following rules shall be observed:

(1) The main and party walls, the roof and the other things used in common, shall be preserved at the
expense of all the owners in proportion to the value of the story belonging to each;

(2) Each owner shall bear the cost of maintaining the floor of his story; the floor of the entrance, front
door, common yard and sanitary works common to all, shall be maintained at the expense of all the
owners pro rata;

(3) The stairs from the entrance to the first story shall be maintained at the expense of all the owners pro
rata, with the exception of the owner of the ground floor; the stairs from the first to the second story shall
be preserved at the expense of all, except the owner of the ground floor and the owner of the first story;
and so on successively. (396)

Art. 491. None of the co-owners shall, without the consent of the others, make alterations in the thing owned in
common, even though benefits for all would result therefrom. However, if the withholding of the consent by one or
more of the co-owners is clearly prejudicial to the common interest, the courts may afford adequate relief. (397a)

Art. 492. For the administration and better enjoyment of the thing owned in common, the resolutions of the
majority of the co-owners shall be binding.

There shall be no majority unless the resolution is approved by the co-owners who represent the controlling
interest in the object of the co-ownership.

Should there be no majority, or should the resolution of the majority be seriously prejudicial to those interested in
the property owned in common, the court, at the instance of an interested party, shall order such measures as it
may deem proper, including the appointment of an administrator.

Whenever a part of the thing belongs exclusively to one of the co-owners, and the remainder is owned in common,
the preceding provision shall apply only to the part owned in common. (398)

Art. 493. Each co-owner shall have the full ownership of his part and of the fruits and benefits pertaining thereto,
and he may therefore alienate, assign or mortgage it, and even substitute another person in its enjoyment, except
when personal rights are involved. But the effect of the alienation or the mortgage, with respect to the co-owners,
shall be limited to the portion which may be alloted to him in the division upon the termination of the co-
ownership. (399)

231
Art. 494. No co-owner shall be obliged to remain in the co-ownership. Each co-owner may demand at any time the
partition of the thing owned in common, insofar as his share is concerned.

Nevertheless, an agreement to keep the thing undivided for a certain period of time, not exceeding ten years, shall
be valid. This term may be extended by a new agreement.

A donor or testator may prohibit partition for a period which shall not exceed twenty years.

Neither shall there be any partition when it is prohibited by law.

No prescription shall run in favor of a co-owner or co-heir against his co-owners or co-heirs so long as he expressly
or impliedly recognizes the co-ownership. (400a)

Art. 495. Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding article, the co-owners cannot demand a physical division
of the thing owned in common, when to do so would render it unserviceable for the use for which it is intended.
But the co-ownership may be terminated in accordance with Article 498. (401a)

Art. 496. Partition may be made by agreement between the parties or by judicial proceedings. Partition shall be
governed by the Rules of Court insofar as they are consistent with this Code. (402)

Art. 497. The creditors or assignees of the co-owners may take part in the division of the thing owned in common
and object to its being effected without their concurrence. But they cannot impugn any partition already executed,
unless there has been fraud, or in case it was made notwithstanding a formal opposition presented to prevent it,
without prejudice to the right of the debtor or assignor to maintain its validity. (403)

Art. 498. Whenever the thing is essentially indivisible and the co-owners cannot agree that it be allotted to one of
them who shall indemnify the others, it shall be sold and its proceeds distributed. (404)

Art. 499. The partition of a thing owned in common shall not prejudice third persons, who shall retain the rights of
mortgage, servitude or any other real rights belonging to them before the division was made. Personal rights
pertaining to third persons against the co-ownership shall also remain in force, notwithstanding the partition. (405)

Art. 500. Upon partition, there shall be a mutual accounting for benefits received and reimbursements for expenses
made. Likewise, each co-owner shall pay for damages caused by reason of his negligence or fraud. (n)

Art. 501. Every co-owner shall, after partition, be liable for defects of title and quality of the portion assigned to
each of the other co-owners. (n)

Title IV. - SOME SPECIAL PROPERTIES

CHAPTER I

231
 WATERS

SECTION 1. - Ownership of Waters

Art. 502. The following are of public dominion:

(1) Rivers and their natural beds;

(2) Continuous or intermittent waters of springs and brooks running in their natural beds and the beds
themselves;

(3) Waters rising continuously or intermittently on lands of public dominion;

(4) Lakes and lagoons formed by Nature on public lands, and their beds;

(5) Rain waters running through ravines or sand beds, which are also of public dominion;

(6) Subterranean waters on public lands;

(7) Waters found within the zone of operation of public works, even if constructed by a contractor;

(8) Waters rising continuously or intermittently on lands belonging to private persons, to the State, to a
province, or to a city or a municipality from the moment they leave such lands;

(9) The waste waters of fountains, sewers and public establishments. (407)

Art. 503. The following are of private ownership:

(1) Continuous or intermittent waters rising on lands of private ownership, while running through the
same;

(2) Lakes and lagoons, and their beds, formed by Nature on such lands;

(3) Subterranean waters found on the same;

(4) Rain waters falling on said lands, as long as they remain within the boundaries;

(5) The beds of flowing waters, continuous or intermittent, formed by rain water, and those of brooks,
crossing lands which are not of public dominion.

In every drain or aqueduct, the water, bed, banks and floodgates shall be considered as an integral part of
the land of building for which the waters are intended. The owners of lands, through which or along the
boundaries of which the aqueduct passes, cannot claim ownership over it, or any right to the use of its
bed or banks, unless the claim is based on titles of ownership specifying the right or ownership claimed.
(408)

SECTION 2. - The Use of Public Waters

Art. 504. The use of public waters is acquired:

231
 (1) By administrative concession;

(2) By prescription for ten years.

The extent of the rights and obligations of the use shall be that established, in the first case, by the terms of the
concession, and, in the second case, by the manner and form in which the waters have been used. (409a)

Art. 505. Every concession for the use of waters is understood to be without prejudice to third persons. (410)

Art. 506. The right to make use of public waters is extinguished by the lapse of the concession and by non-user for
five years. (411a)

SECTION 3. - The Use of Waters of Private Ownership

Art. 507. The owner of a piece of land on which a spring or brook rises, be it continuous or intermittent, may use its
waters while they run through the same, but after the waters leave the land they shall become public, and their use
shall be governed by the Special Law of Waters of August 3, 1866, and by the Irrigation Law. (412a)

Art. 508. The private ownership of the beds of rain waters does not give a right to make works or constructions
which may change their course to the damage of third persons, or whose destruction, by the force of floods, may
cause such damage. (413)

Art. 509. No one may enter private property to search waters or make use of them without permission from the
owners, except as provided by the Mining Law. (414a)

Art. 510. The ownership which the proprietor of a piece of land has over the waters rising thereon does not
prejudice the rights which the owners of lower estates may have legally acquired to the use thereof. (415)

Art. 511. Every owner of a piece of land has the right to construct within his property, reservoirs for rain waters,
provided he causes no damage to the public or to third persons. (416)

SECTION 4. - Subterranean Waters

Art. 512. Only the owner of a piece of land, or another person with his permission, may make explorations thereon
for subterranean waters, except as provided by the Mining Law.

Explorations for subterranean waters on lands of public dominion may be made only with the permission of the
administrative authorities. (417a)

Art. 513. Waters artificially brought forth in accordance with the Special Law of Waters of August 3, 1866, belong to
the person who brought them up. (418)

Art. 514. When the owner of waters artificially brought to the surface abandons them to their natural course, they
shall become of public dominion. (419)

231
 SECTION 5. - General Provisions

Art. 515. The owner of a piece of land on which there are defensive works to check waters, or on which, due to a
change of their course, it may be necessary to reconstruct such works, shall be obliged, at his election, either to
make the necessary repairs or construction himself, or to permit them to be done, without damage to him, by the
owners of the lands which suffer or are clearly exposed to suffer injury. (420)

Art. 516. The provisions of the preceding article are applicable to the case in which it may be necessary to clear a
piece of land of matter, whose accumulation or fall may obstruct the course of the waters, to the damage or peril of
third persons. (421)

Art. 517. All the owners who participate in the benefits arising from the works referred to in the two preceding
articles, shall be obliged to contribute to the expenses of construction in proportion to their respective interests.
Those who by their fault may have caused the damage shall be liable for the expenses. (422)

Art. 518. All matters not expressly determined by the provisions of this Chapter shall be governed by the special
Law of Waters of August 3, 1866, and by the Irrigation Law. (425a)

CHAPTER 2
MINERALS

Art. 519. Mining claims and rights and other matters concerning minerals and mineral lands are governed by
special laws. (427a)

CHAPTER 3
TRADE-MARKS AND TRADE-NAMES

Art. 520. A trade-mark or trade-name duly registered in the proper government bureau or office is owned by and
pertains to the person, corporation, or firm registering the same, subject to the provisions of special laws. (n)

Art. 521. The goodwill of a business is property, and may be transferred together with the right to use the name
under which the business is conducted. (n)

Art. 522. Trade-marks and trade-names are governed by special laws. (n)

Title V. - POSSESSION

231
 CHAPTER 1
POSSESSION AND THE KINDS THEREOF

Art. 523. Possession is the holding of a thing or the enjoyment of a right. (430a)

Art. 524. Possession may be exercised in one's own name or in that of another. (413a)

Art. 525. The possession of things or rights may be had in one of two concepts: either in the concept of owner, or in
that of the holder of the thing or right to keep or enjoy it, the ownership pertaining to another person. (432)

Art. 526. He is deemed a possessor in good faith who is not aware that there exists in his title or mode of
acquisition any flaw which invalidates it.

He is deemed a possessor in bad faith who possesses in any case contrary to the foregoing.

Mistake upon a doubtful or difficult question of law may be the basis of good faith. (433a)

Art. 527. Good faith is always presumed, and upon him who alleges bad faith on the part of a possessor rests the
burden of proof. (434)

Art. 528. Possession acquired in good faith does not lose this character except in the case and from the moment
facts exist which show that the possessor is not unaware that he possesses the thing improperly or wrongfully.
(435a)

Art. 529. It is presumed that possession continues to be enjoyed in the same character in which it was acquired,
until the contrary is proved. (436)

Art. 530. Only things and rights which are susceptible of being appropriated may be the object of possession. (437)

CHAPTER 2
ACQUISITION OF POSSESSION

Art. 531. Possession is acquired by the material occupation of a thing or the exercise of a right, or by the fact that it
is subject to the action of our will, or by the proper acts and legal formalities established for acquiring such right.
(438a)

Art. 532. Possession may be acquired by the same person who is to enjoy it, by his legal representative, by his
agent, or by any person without any power whatever: but in the last case, the possession shall not be considered as
acquired until the person in whose name the act of possession was executed has ratified the same, without
prejudice to the juridical consequences of negotiorum gestio in a proper case. (439a)

Art. 533. The possession of hereditary property is deemed transmitted to the heir without interruption and from
the moment of the death of the decedent, in case the inheritance is accepted.

One who validly renounces an inheritance is deemed never to have possessed the same. (440)

231
Art. 534. On who succeeds by hereditary title shall not suffer the consequences of the wrongful possession of the
decedent, if it is not shown that he was aware of the flaws affecting it; but the effects of possession in good faith
shall not benefit him except from the date of the death of the decedent. (442)

Art. 535. Minors and incapacitated persons may acquire the possession of things; but they need the assistance of
their legal representatives in order to exercise the rights which from the possession arise in their favor. (443)

Art. 536. In no case may possession be acquired through force or intimidation as long as there is a possessor who
objects thereto. He who believes that he has an action or a right to deprive another of the holding of a thing, must
invoke the aid of the competent court, if the holder should refuse to deliver the thing. (441a)

Art. 537. Acts merely tolerated, and those executed clandestinely and without the knowledge of the possessor of a
thing, or by violence, do not affect possession. (444)

Art. 538. Possession as a fact cannot be recognized at the same time in two different personalities except in the
cases of co-possession. Should a question arise regarding the fact of possession, the present possessor shall be
preferred; if there are two possessors, the one longer in possession; if the dates of the possession are the same,
the one who presents a title; and if all these conditions are equal, the thing shall be placed in judicial deposit
pending determination of its possession or ownership through proper proceedings. (445)

CHAPTER 3
EFFECTS OF POSSESSION

Art. 539. Every possessor has a right to be respected in his possession; and should he be disturbed therein he shall
be protected in or restored to said possession by the means established by the laws and the Rules of Court.

A possessor deprived of his possession through forcible entry may within ten days from the filing of the complaint
present a motion to secure from the competent court, in the action for forcible entry, a writ of preliminary
mandatory injunction to restore him in his possession. The court shall decide the motion within thirty (30) days
from the filing thereof. (446a)

Art. 540. Only the possession acquired and enjoyed in the concept of owner can serve as a title for acquiring
dominion. (447)

Art. 541. A possessor in the concept of owner has in his favor the legal presumption that he possesses with a just
title and he cannot be obliged to show or prove it. (448a)

Art. 542. The possession of real property presumes that of the movables therein, so long as it is not shown or
proved that they should be excluded. (449)

Art. 543. Each one of the participants of a thing possessed in common shall be deemed to have exclusively
possessed the part which may be allotted to him upon the division thereof, for the entire period during which the
co-possession lasted. Interruption in the possession of the whole or a part of a thing possessed in common shall be
to the prejudice of all the possessors. However, in case of civil interruption, the Rules of Court shall apply. (450a)

Art. 544. A possessor in good faith is entitled to the fruits received before the possession is legally interrupted.

Natural and industrial fruits are considered received from the time they are gathered or severed.

231
Civil fruits are deemed to accrue daily and belong to the possessor in good faith in that proportion. (451)

Art. 545. If at the time the good faith ceases, there should be any natural or industrial fruits, the possessor shall
have a right to a part of the expenses of cultivation, and to a part of the net harvest, both in proportion to the time
of the possession.

The charges shall be divided on the same basis by the two possessors.

The owner of the thing may, should he so desire, give the possessor in good faith the right to finish the cultivation
and gathering of the growing fruits, as an indemnity for his part of the expenses of cultivation and the net
proceeds; the possessor in good faith who for any reason whatever should refuse to accept this concession, shall
lose the right to be indemnified in any other manner. (452a)

Art. 546. Necessary expenses shall be refunded to every possessor; but only the possessor in good faith may retain
the thing until he has been reimbursed therefor.

Useful expenses shall be refunded only to the possessor in good faith with the same right of retention, the person
who has defeated him in the possession having the option of refunding the amount of the expenses or of paying
the increase in value which the thing may have acquired by reason thereof. (453a)

Art. 547. If the useful improvements can be removed without damage to the principal thing, the possessor in good
faith may remove them, unless the person who recovers the possession exercises the option under paragraph 2 of
the preceding article. (n)

Art. 548. Expenses for pure luxury or mere pleasure shall not be refunded to the possessor in good faith; but he
may remove the ornaments with which he has embellished the principal thing if it suffers no injury thereby, and if
his successor in the possession does not prefer to refund the amount expended. (454)

Art. 549. The possessor in bad faith shall reimburse the fruits received and those which the legitimate possessor
could have received, and shall have a right only to the expenses mentioned in paragraph 1 of Article 546 and in
Article 443. The expenses incurred in improvements for pure luxury or mere pleasure shall not be refunded to the
possessor in bad faith, but he may remove the objects for which such expenses have been incurred, provided that
the thing suffers no injury thereby, and that the lawful possessor does not prefer to retain them by paying the value
they may have at the time he enters into possession. (445a)

Art. 550. The costs of litigation over the property shall be borne by every possessor. (n)

Art. 551. Improvements caused by nature or time shall always insure to the benefit of the person who has
succeeded in recovering possession. (456)

Art. 552. A possessor in good faith shall not be liable for the deterioration or loss of the thing possessed, except in
cases in which it is proved that he has acted with fraudulent intent or negligence, after the judicial summons.

A possessor in bad faith shall be liable for deterioration or loss in every case, even if caused by a fortuitous event.
(457a)

Art. 553. One who recovers possession shall not be obliged to pay for improvements which have ceased to exist at
the time he takes possession of the thing. (458)

Art. 554. A present possessor who shows his possession at some previous time, is presumed to have held
possession also during the intermediate period, in the absence of proof to the contrary. (459)

231
Art. 555. A possessor may lose his possession:

(1) By the abandonment of the thing;

(2) By an assignment made to another either by onerous or gratuitous title;

(3) By the destruction or total loss of the thing, or because it goes out of commerce;

(4) By the possession of another, subject to the provisions of Article 537, if the new possession has lasted
longer than one year. But the real right of possession is not lost till after the lapse of ten years. (460a)

Art. 556. The possession of movables is not deemed lost so long as they remain under the control of the possessor,
even though for the time being he may not know their whereabouts. (461)

Art. 557. The possession of immovables and of real rights is not deemed lost, or transferred for purposes of
prescription to the prejudice of third persons, except in accordance with the provisions of the Mortgage Law and
the Land Registration laws. (462a)

Art. 558. Acts relating to possession, executed or agreed to by one who possesses a thing belonging to another as a
mere holder to enjoy or keep it, in any character, do not bind or prejudice the owner, unless he gave said holder
express authority to do such acts, or ratifies them subsequently. (463)

Art. 559. The possession of movable property acquired in good faith is equivalent to a title. Nevertheless, one who
has lost any movable or has been unlawfully deprived thereof may recover it from the person in possession of the
same.

If the possessor of a movable lost or which the owner has been unlawfully deprived, has acquired it in good faith at
a public sale, the owner cannot obtain its return without reimbursing the price paid therefor. (464a)

Art. 560. Wild animals are possessed only while they are under one's control; domesticated or tamed animals are
considered domestic or tame if they retain the habit of returning to the premises of the possessor. (465)

Art. 561. One who recovers, according to law, possession unjustly lost, shall be deemed for all purposes which may
redound to his benefit, to have enjoyed it without interruption. (466)

Title VI. - USUFRUCT

CHAPTER 1
USUFRUCT IN GENERAL

Art. 562. Usufruct gives a right to enjoy the property of another with the obligation of preserving its form and
substance, unless the title constituting it or the law otherwise provides. (467)

Art. 563. Usufruct is constituted by law, by the will of private persons expressed in acts inter vivos or in a last will
and testament, and by prescription. (468)

231
Art. 564. Usufruct may be constituted on the whole or a part of the fruits of the thing, in favor of one more
persons, simultaneously or successively, and in every case from or to a certain day, purely or conditionally. It may
also be constituted on a right, provided it is not strictly personal or intransmissible. (469)

Art. 565. The rights and obligations of the usufructuary shall be those provided in the title constituting the usufruct;
in default of such title, or in case it is deficient, the provisions contained in the two following Chapters shall be
observed. (470)

CHAPTER 2
RIGHTS OF THE USUFRUCTUARY

Art. 566. The usufructuary shall be entitled to all the natural, industrial and civil fruits of the property in usufruct.
With respect to hidden treasure which may be found on the land or tenement, he shall be considered a stranger.
(471)

Art. 567. Natural or industrial fruits growing at the time the usufruct begins, belong to the usufructuary.

Those growing at the time the usufruct terminates, belong to the owner.

In the preceding cases, the usufructuary, at the beginning of the usufruct, has no obligation to refund to the owner
any expenses incurred; but the owner shall be obliged to reimburse at the termination of the usufruct, from the
proceeds of the growing fruits, the ordinary expenses of cultivation, for seed, and other similar expenses incurred
by the usufructuary.

The provisions of this article shall not prejudice the rights of third persons, acquired either at the beginning or at
the termination of the usufruct. (472)

Art. 568. If the usufructuary has leased the lands or tenements given in usufruct, and the usufruct should expire
before the termination of the lease, he or his heirs and successors shall receive only the proportionate share of the
rent that must be paid by the lessee. (473)

Art. 569. Civil fruits are deemed to accrue daily, and belong to the usufructuary in proportion to the time the
usufruct may last. (474)

Art. 570. Whenever a usufruct is constituted on the right to receive a rent or periodical pension, whether in money
or in fruits, or in the interest on bonds or securities payable to bearer, each payment due shall be considered as the
proceeds or fruits of such right.

Whenever it consists in the enjoyment of benefits accruing from a participation in any industrial or commercial
enterprise, the date of the distribution of which is not fixed, such benefits shall have the same character.

In either case they shall be distributed as civil fruits, and shall be applied in the manner prescribed in the preceding
article. (475)

Art. 571. The usufructuary shall have the right to enjoy any increase which the thing in usufruct may acquire
through accession, the servitudes established in its favor, and, in general, all the benefits inherent therein. (479)

231
Art. 572. The usufructuary may personally enjoy the thing in usufruct, lease it to another, or alienate his right of
usufruct, even by a gratuitous title; but all the contracts he may enter into as such usufructuary shall terminate
upon the expiration of the usufruct, saving leases of rural lands, which shall be considered as subsisting during the
agricultural year. (480)

Art. 573. Whenever the usufruct includes things which, without being consumed, gradually deteriorate through
wear and tear, the usufructuary shall have the right to make use thereof in accordance with the purpose for which
they are intended, and shall not be obliged to return them at the termination of the usufruct except in their
condition at that time; but he shall be obliged to indemnify the owner for any deterioration they may have suffered
by reason of his fraud or negligence. (481)

Art. 574. Whenever the usufruct includes things which cannot be used without being consumed, the usufructuary
shall have the right to make use of them under the obligation of paying their appraised value at the termination of
the usufruct, if they were appraised when delivered. In case they were not appraised, he shall have the right to
return at the same quantity and quality, or pay their current price at the time the usufruct ceases. (482)

Art. 575. The usufructuary of fruit-bearing trees and shrubs may make use of the dead trunks, and even of those
cut off or uprooted by accident, under the obligation to replace them with new plants. (483a)

Art. 576. If in consequence of a calamity or extraordinary event, the trees or shrubs shall have disappeared in such
considerable number that it would not be possible or it would be too burdensome to replace them, the
usufructuary may leave the dead, fallen or uprooted trunks at the disposal of the owner, and demand that the
latter remove them and clear the land. (484a)

Art. 577. The usufructuary of woodland may enjoy all the benefits which it may produce according to its nature.

If the woodland is a copse or consists of timber for building, the usufructuary may do such ordinary cutting or
felling as the owner was in the habit of doing, and in default of this, he may do so in accordance with the custom of
the place, as to the manner, amount and season.

In any case the felling or cutting of trees shall be made in such manner as not to prejudice the preservation of the
land.

In nurseries, the usufructuary may make the necessary thinnings in order that the remaining trees may properly
grow.

With the exception of the provisions of the preceding paragraphs, the usufructuary cannot cut down trees unless it
be to restore or improve some of the things in usufruct, and in such case shall first inform the owner of the
necessity for the work. (485)

Art. 578. The usufructuary of an action to recover real property or a real right, or any movable property, has the
right to bring the action and to oblige the owner thereof to give him the authority for this purpose and to furnish
him whatever proof he may have. If in consequence of the enforcement of the action he acquires the thing
claimed, the usufruct shall be limited to the fruits, the dominion remaining with the owner. (486)

Art. 579. The usufructuary may make on the property held in usufruct such useful improvements or expenses for
mere pleasure as he may deem proper, provided he does not alter its form or substance; but he shall have no right
to be indemnified therefor. He may, however, remove such improvements, should it be possible to do so without
damage to the property. (487)

231
Art. 580. The usufructuary may set off the improvements he may have made on the property against any damage
to the same. (488)

Art. 581. The owner of property the usufruct of which is held by another, may alienate it, but he cannot alter its
form or substance, or do anything thereon which may be prejudicial to the usufructuary. (489)

Art. 582. The usufructuary of a part of a thing held in common shall exercise all the rights pertaining to the owner
thereof with respect to the administration and the collection of fruits or interest. Should the co-ownership cease by
reason of the division of the thing held in common, the usufruct of the part allotted to the co-owner shall belong to
the usufructuary. (490)

CHAPTER 3
OBLIGATIONS OF THE USUFRUCTUARY

Art. 583. The usufructuary, before entering upon the enjoyment of the property, is obliged:
(1) To make, after notice to the owner or his legitimate representative, an inventory of all the property,
which shall contain an appraisal of the movables and a description of the condition of the immovables;

(2) To give security, binding himself to fulfill the obligations imposed upon him in accordance with this
Chapter. (491)

Art. 584. The provisions of No. 2 of the preceding article shall not apply to the donor who has reserved the usufruct
of the property donated, or to the parents who are usufructuaries of their children's property, except when the
parents contract a second marriage. (492a)

Art. 585. The usufructuary, whatever may be the title of the usufruct, may be excused from the obligation of
making an inventory or of giving security, when no one will be injured thereby. (493)

Art. 586. Should the usufructuary fail to give security in the cases in which he is bound to give it, the owner may
demand that the immovables be placed under administration, that the movables be sold, that the public bonds,
instruments of credit payable to order or to bearer be converted into registered certificates or deposited in a bank
or public institution, and that the capital or sums in cash and the proceeds of the sale of the movable property be
invested in safe securities.

The interest on the proceeds of the sale of the movables and that on public securities and bonds, and the proceeds
of the property placed under administration, shall belong to the usufructuary.

Furthermore, the owner may, if he so prefers, until the usufructuary gives security or is excused from so doing,
retain in his possession the property in usufruct as administrator, subject to the obligation to deliver to the
usufructuary the net proceeds thereof, after deducting the sums which may be agreed upon or judicially allowed
him for such administration. (494)

Art. 587. If the usufructuary who has not given security claims, by virtue of a promise under oath, the delivery of
the furniture necessary for his use, and that he and his family be allowed to live in a house included in the usufruct,
the court may grant this petition, after due consideration of the facts of the case.

231
The same rule shall be observed with respect to implements, tools and other movable property necessary for an
industry or vocation in which he is engaged.

If the owner does not wish that certain articles be sold because of their artistic worth or because they have a
sentimental value, he may demand their delivery to him upon his giving security for the payment of the legal
interest on their appraised value. (495)

Art. 588. After the security has been given by the usufructuary, he shall have a right to all the proceeds and benefits
from the day on which, in accordance with the title constituting the usufruct, he should have commenced to
receive them. (496)

Art. 589. The usufructuary shall take care of the things given in usufruct as a good father of a family. (497)

Art. 590. A usufructuary who alienates or leases his right of usufruct shall answer for any damage which the things
in usufruct may suffer through the fault or negligence of the person who substitutes him. (498)

Art. 591. If the usufruct be constituted on a flock or herd of livestock, the usufructuary shall be obliged to replace
with the young thereof the animals that die each year from natural causes, or are lost due to the rapacity of beasts
of prey.

If the animals on which the usufruct is constituted should all perish, without the fault of the usufructuary, on
account of some contagious disease or any other uncommon event, the usufructuary shall fulfill his obligation by
delivering to the owner the remains which may have been saved from the misfortune.

Should the herd or flock perish in part, also by accident and without the fault of the usufructuary, the usufruct shall
continue on the part saved.

Should the usufruct be on sterile animals, it shall be considered, with respect to its effects, as though constituted
on fungible things. (499a)

Art. 592. The usufructuary is obliged to make the ordinary repairs needed by the thing given in usufruct.

By ordinary repairs are understood such as are required by the wear and tear due to the natural use of the thing
and are indispensable for its preservation. Should the usufructuary fail to make them after demand by the owner,
the latter may make them at the expense of the usufructuary. (500)

Art. 593. Extraordinary repairs shall be at the expense of the owner. The usufructuary is obliged to notify the owner
when the need for such repairs is urgent. (501)

Art. 594. If the owner should make the extraordinary repairs, he shall have a right to demand of the usufructuary
the legal interest on the amount expended for the time that the usufruct lasts.

Should he not make them when they are indispensable for the preservation of the thing, the usufructuary may
make them; but he shall have a right to demand of the owner, at the termination of the usufruct, the increase in
value which the immovable may have acquired by reason of the repairs. (502a)

Art. 595. The owner may construct any works and make any improvements of which the immovable in usufruct is
susceptible, or make new plantings thereon if it be rural, provided that such acts do not cause a diminution in the
value of the usufruct or prejudice the right of the usufructuary. (503)

231
Art. 596. The payment of annual charges and taxes and of those considered as a lien on the fruits, shall be at the
expense of the usufructuary for all the time that the usufruct lasts. (504)

Art. 597. The taxes which, during the usufruct, may be imposed directly on the capital, shall be at the expense of
the owner.

If the latter has paid them, the usufructuary shall pay him the proper interest on the sums which may have been
paid in that character; and, if the said sums have been advanced by the usufructuary, he shall recover the amount
thereof at the termination of the usufruct. (505)

Art. 598. If the usufruct be constituted on the whole of a patrimony, and if at the time of its constitution the owner
has debts, the provisions of Articles 758 and 759 relating to donations shall be applied, both with respect to the
maintenance of the usufruct and to the obligation of the usufructuary to pay such debts.

The same rule shall be applied in case the owner is obliged, at the time the usufruct is constituted, to make
periodical payments, even if there should be no known capital. (506)

Art. 599. The usufructuary may claim any matured credits which form a part of the usufruct if he has given or gives
the proper security. If he has been excused from giving security or has been able to give it, or if that given is not
sufficient, he shall need the authorization of the owner, or of the court in default thereof, to collect such credits.

The usufructuary who has given security may use the capital he has collected in any manner he may deem proper.
The usufructuary who has not given security shall invest the said capital at interest upon agreement with the
owner; in default of such agreement, with judicial authorization; and, in every case, with security sufficient to
preserve the integrity of the capital in usufruct. (507)

Art. 600. The usufructuary of a mortgaged immovable shall not be obliged to pay the debt for the security of which
the mortgage was constituted.

Should the immovable be attached or sold judicially for the payment of the debt, the owner shall be liable to the
usufructuary for whatever the latter may lose by reason thereof. (509)

Art. 601. The usufructuary shall be obliged to notify the owner of any act of a third person, of which he may have
knowledge, that may be prejudicial to the rights of ownership, and he shall be liable should he not do so, for
damages, as if they had been caused through his own fault. (511)

Art. 602. The expenses, costs and liabilities in suits brought with regard to the usufruct shall be borne by the
usufructuary. (512)

CHAPTER 4
EXTINGUISHMENT OF USUFRUCT

Art. 603. Usufruct is extinguished:

(1) By the death of the usufructuary, unless a contrary intention clearly appears;

(2) By the expiration of the period for which it was constituted, or by the fulfillment of any resolutory
condition provided in the title creating the usufruct;

231
 (3) By merger of the usufruct and ownership in the same person;

(4) By renunciation of the usufructuary;

(5) By the total loss of the thing in usufruct;

(6) By the termination of the right of the person constituting the usufruct;

(7) By prescription. (513a)

Art. 604. If the thing given in usufruct should be lost only in part, the right shall continue on the remaining part.
(514)

Art. 605. Usufruct cannot be constituted in favor of a town, corporation, or association for more than fifty years. If
it has been constituted, and before the expiration of such period the town is abandoned, or the corporation or
association is dissolved, the usufruct shall be extinguished by reason thereof. (515a)

Art. 606. A usufruct granted for the time that may elapse before a third person attains a certain age, shall subsist
for the number of years specified, even if the third person should die before the period expires, unless such
usufruct has been expressly granted only in consideration of the existence of such person. (516)

Art. 607. If the usufruct is constituted on immovable property of which a building forms part, and the latter should
be destroyed in any manner whatsoever, the usufructuary shall have a right to make use of the land and the
materials.

The same rule shall be applied if the usufruct is constituted on a building only and the same should be destroyed.
But in such a case, if the owner should wish to construct another building, he shall have a right to occupy the land
and to make use of the materials, being obliged to pay to the usufructuary, during the continuance of the usufruct,
the interest upon the sum equivalent to the value of the land and of the materials. (517)

Art. 608. If the usufructuary shares with the owner the insurance of the tenement given in usufruct, the former
shall, in case of loss, continue in the enjoyment of the new building, should one be constructed, or shall receive the
interest on the insurance indemnity if the owner does not wish to rebuild.

Should the usufructuary have refused to contribute to the insurance, the owner insuring the tenement alone, the
latter shall receive the full amount of the insurance indemnity in case of loss, saving always the right granted to the
usufructuary in the preceding article. (518a)

Art. 609. Should the thing in usufruct be expropriated for public use, the owner shall be obliged either to replace it
with another thing of the same value and of similar conditions, or to pay the usufructuary the legal interest on the
amount of the indemnity for the whole period of the usufruct. If the owner chooses the latter alternative, he shall
give security for the payment of the interest. (519)

Art. 610. A usufruct is not extinguished by bad use of the thing in usufruct; but if the abuse should cause
considerable injury to the owner, the latter may demand that the thing be delivered to him, binding himself to pay
annually to the usufructuary the net proceeds of the same, after deducting the expenses and the compensation
which may be allowed him for its administration. (520)

Art. 611. A usufruct constituted in favor of several persons living at the time of its constitution shall not be
extinguished until death of the last survivor. (521)

231
Art. 612. Upon the termination of the usufruct, the thing in usufruct shall be delivered to the owner, without
prejudice to the right of retention pertaining to the usufructuary or his heirs for taxes and extraordinary expenses
which should be reimbursed. After the delivery has been made, the security or mortgage shall be cancelled. (522a)

Title VII. - EASEMENTS OF SERVITUDES

CHAPTER 1
EASEMENTS IN GENERAL

SECTION 1. - Different Kinds of Easements

Art. 613. An easement or servitude is an encumbrance imposed upon an immovable for the benefit of another
immovable belonging to a different owner.

The immovable in favor of which the easement is established is called the dominant estate; that which is subject
thereto, the servient estate. (530)

Art. 614. Servitudes may also be established for the benefit of a community, or of one or more persons to whom
the encumbered estate does not belong. (531)

Art. 615. Easements may be continuous or discontinuous, apparent or nonapparent.

Continuous easements are those the use of which is or may be incessant, without the intervention of any act of
man.

Discontinuous easements are those which are used at intervals and depend upon the acts of man.

Apparent easements are those which are made known and are continually kept in view by external signs that reveal
the use and enjoyment of the same.

Nonapparent easements are those which show no external indication of their existence. (532)

Art. 616. Easements are also positive or negative.

A positive easement is one which imposes upon the owner of the servient estate the obligation of allowing
something to be done or of doing it himself, and a negative easement, that which prohibits the owner of the
servient estate from doing something which he could lawfully do if the easement did not exist. (533)

Art. 617. Easements are inseparable from the estate to which they actively or passively belong. (534)

Art. 618. Easements are indivisible. If the servient estate is divided between two or more persons, the easement is
not modified, and each of them must bear it on the part which corresponds to him.

If it is the dominant estate that is divided between two or more persons, each of them may use the easement in its
entirety, without changing the place of its use, or making it more burdensome in any other way. (535)

Art. 619. Easements are established either by law or by the will of the owners. The former are called legal and the
latter voluntary easements. (536)

231
 SECTION 2. - Modes of Acquiring Easements

Art. 620. Continuous and apparent easements are acquired either by virtue of a title or by prescription of ten years.
(537a)

Art. 621. In order to acquire by prescription the easements referred to in the preceding article, the time of
possession shall be computed thus: in positive easements, from the day on which the owner of the dominant
estate, or the person who may have made use of the easement, commenced to exercise it upon the servient
estate; and in negative easements, from the day on which the owner of the dominant estate forbade, by an
instrument acknowledged before a notary public, the owner of the servient estate, from executing an act which
would be lawful without the easement. (538a)

Art. 622. Continuous nonapparent easements, and discontinuous ones, whether apparent or not, may be acquired
only by virtue of a title. (539)

Art. 623. The absence of a document or proof showing the origin of an easement which cannot be acquired by
prescription may be cured by a deed of recognition by the owner of the servient estate or by a final judgment.
(540a)

Art. 624. The existence of an apparent sign of easement between two estates, established or maintained by the
owner of both, shall be considered, should either of them be alienated, as a title in order that the easement may
continue actively and passively, unless, at the time the ownership of the two estates is divided, the contrary should
be provided in the title of conveyance of either of them, or the sign aforesaid should be removed before the
execution of the deed. This provision shall also apply in case of the division of a thing owned in common by two or
more persons. (541a)

Art. 625. Upon the establishment of an easement, all the rights necessary for its use are considered granted. (542)

Art. 626. The owner of the dominant estate cannot use the easement except for the benefit of the immovable
originally contemplated. Neither can he exercise the easement in any other manner than that previously
established. (n)

SECTION 3. - Rights and Obligations

of the Owners of the Dominant and Servient Estates

Art. 627. The owner of the dominant estate may make, at his own expense, on the servient state any works
necessary for the use and preservation of the servitude, but without altering it or rendering it more burdensome.

For this purpose he shall notify the owner of the servient estate, and shall choose the most convenient time and
manner so as to cause the least inconvenience to the owner of the servient estate. (543a)

Art. 628. Should there be several dominant estates, the owners of all of them shall be obliged to contribute to the
expenses referred to in the preceding article, in proportion to the benefits which each may derive from the work.
Any one who does not wish to contribute may exempt himself by renouncing the easement for the benefit of the
others.

231
If the owner of the servient estate should make use of the easement in any manner whatsoever, he shall also be
obliged to contribute to the expenses in the proportion stated, saving an agreement to the contrary. (544)

Art. 629. The owner of the servient estate cannot impair, in any manner whatsoever, the use of the servitude.

Nevertheless, if by reason of the place originally assigned, or of the manner established for the use of the
easement, the same should become very inconvenient to the owner of the servient estate, or should prevent him
from making any important works, repairs or improvements thereon, it may be changed at his expense, provided
he offers another place or manner equally convenient and in such a way that no injury is caused thereby to the
owner of the dominant estate or to those who may have a right to the use of the easement. (545)

Art. 630. The owner of the servient estate retains the ownership of the portion on which the easement is
established, and may use the same in such a manner as not to affect the exercise of the easement. (n)

SECTION 4. - Modes of Extinguishment of Easements

Art. 631. Easements are extinguished:

(1) By merger in the same person of the ownership of the dominant and servient estates;

(2) By nonuser for ten years; with respect to discontinuous easements, this period shall be computed from
the day on which they ceased to be used; and, with respect to continuous easements, from the day on
which an act contrary to the same took place;

(3) When either or both of the estates fall into such condition that the easement cannot be used; but it
shall revive if the subsequent condition of the estates or either of them should again permit its use, unless
when the use becomes possible, sufficient time for prescription has elapsed, in accordance with the
provisions of the preceding number;

(4) By the expiration of the term or the fulfillment of the condition, if the easement is temporary or
conditional;

(5) By the renunciation of the owner of the dominant estate;

(6) By the redemption agreed upon between the owners of the dominant and servient estates. (546a)

Art. 632. The form or manner of using the easement may prescribe as the easement itself, and in the same way.
(547a)

Art. 633. If the dominant estate belongs to several persons in common, the use of the easement by any one of
them prevents prescription with respect to the others. (548)

231
 CHAPTER 2
LEGAL EASEMENTS

SECTION 1. - General Provisions

Art. 634. Easements imposed by law have for their object either public use or the interest of private persons. (549)

Art. 635. All matters concerning easements established for public or communal use shall be governed by the special
laws and regulations relating thereto, and, in the absence thereof, by the provisions of this Title. (550)

Art. 636. Easements established by law in the interest of private persons or for private use shall be governed by the
provisions of this Title, without prejudice to the provisions of general or local laws and ordinances for the general
welfare.

These easements may be modified by agreement of the interested parties, whenever the law does not prohibit it
or no injury is suffered by a third person. (551a)

SECTION 2. - Easements Relating to Waters

Art. 637. Lower estates are obliged to receive the waters which naturally and without the intervention of man
descend from the higher estates, as well as the stones or earth which they carry with them.

The owner of the lower estate cannot construct works which will impede this easement; neither can the owner of
the higher estate make works which will increase the burden. (552)

Art. 638. The banks of rivers and streams, even in case they are of private ownership, are subject throughout their
entire length and within a zone of three meters along their margins, to the easement of public use in the general
interest of navigation, floatage, fishing and salvage.

Estates adjoining the banks of navigable or floatable rivers are, furthermore, subject to the easement of towpath
for the exclusive service of river navigation and floatage.

If it be necessary for such purpose to occupy lands of private ownership, the proper indemnity shall first be paid.
(553a)

Art. 639. Whenever for the diversion or taking of water from a river or brook, or for the use of any other
continuous or discontinuous stream, it should be necessary to build a dam, and the person who is to construct it is
not the owner of the banks, or lands which must support it, he may establish the easement of abutment of a dam,
after payment of the proper indemnity. (554)

Art. 640. Compulsory easements for drawing water or for watering animals can be imposed only for reasons of
public use in favor of a town or village, after payment of the proper indemnity. (555)

Art. 641. Easements for drawing water and for watering animals carry with them the obligation of the owners of
the servient estates to allow passage to persons and animals to the place where such easements are to be used,
and the indemnity shall include this service. (556)

231
Art. 642. Any person who may wish to use upon his own estate any water of which he can dispose shall have the
right to make it flow through the intervening estates, with the obligation to indemnify their owners, as well as the
owners of the lower estates upon which the waters may filter or descend. (557)

Art. 643. One desiring to make use of the right granted in the preceding article is obliged:

(1) To prove that he can dispose of the water and that it is sufficient for the use for which it is intended;

(2) To show that the proposed right of way is the most convenient and the least onerous to third persons;

(3) To indemnify the owner of the servient estate in the manner determined by the laws and regulations.
(558)

Art. 644. The easement of aqueduct for private interest cannot be imposed on buildings, courtyards, annexes, or
outhouses, or on orchards or gardens already existing. (559)

Art. 645. The easement of aqueduct does not prevent the owner of the servient estate from closing or fencing it, or
from building over the aqueduct in such manner as not to cause the latter any damage, or render necessary repairs
and cleanings impossible. (560)

Art. 646. For legal purposes, the easement of aqueduct shall be considered as continuous and apparent, even
though the flow of the water may not be continuous, or its use depends upon the needs of the dominant estate, or
upon a schedule of alternate days or hours. (561)

Art. 647. One who for the purpose of irrigating or improving his estate, has to construct a stop lock or sluice gate in
the bed of the stream from which the water is to be taken, may demand that the owners of the banks permit its
construction, after payment of damages, including those caused by the new easement to such owners and to the
other irrigators. (562)

Art. 648. The establishment, extent, form and conditions of the servitudes of waters, to which this section refers,
shall be governed by the special laws relating thereto insofar as no provision therefor is made in this Code. (563a)

SECTION 3. - Easement of Right of Way

Art. 649. The owner, or any person who by virtue of a real right may cultivate or use any immovable, which is
surrounded by other immovables pertaining to other persons and without adequate outlet to a public highway, is
entitled to demand a right of way through the neighboring estates, after payment of the proper indemnity.

Should this easement be established in such a manner that its use may be continuous for all the needs of the
dominant estate, establishing a permanent passage, the indemnity shall consist of the value of the land occupied
and the amount of the damage caused to the servient estate.

In case the right of way is limited to the necessary passage for the cultivation of the estate surrounded by others
and for the gathering of its crops through the servient estate without a permanent way, the indemnity shall consist
in the payment of the damage caused by such encumbrance.

This easement is not compulsory if the isolation of the immovable is due to the proprietor's own acts. (564a)

231
Art. 650. The easement of right of way shall be established at the point least prejudicial to the servient estate, and,
insofar as consistent with this rule, where the distance from the dominant estate to a public highway may be the
shortest. (565)

Art. 651. The width of the easement of right of way shall be that which is sufficient for the needs of the dominant
estate, and may accordingly be changed from time to time. (566a)

Art. 652. Whenever a piece of land acquired by sale, exchange or partition, is surrounded by other estates of the
vendor, exchanger, or co-owner, he shall be obliged to grant a right of way without indemnity.

In case of a simple donation, the donor shall be indemnified by the donee for the establishment of the right of way.
(567a)

Art. 653. In the case of the preceding article, if it is the land of the grantor that becomes isolated, he may demand a
right of way after paying a indemnity. However, the donor shall not be liable for indemnity. (n)

Art. 654. If the right of way is permanent, the necessary repairs shall be made by the owner of the dominant
estate. A proportionate share of the taxes shall be reimbursed by said owner to the proprietor of the servient
estate. (n)

Art. 655. If the right of way granted to a surrounded estate ceases to be necessary because its owner has joined it
to another abutting on a public road, the owner of the servient estate may demand that the easement be
extinguished, returning what he may have received by way of indemnity. The interest on the indemnity shall be
deemed to be in payment of rent for the use of the easement.

The same rule shall be applied in case a new road is opened giving access to the isolated estate.

In both cases, the public highway must substantially meet the needs of the dominant estate in order that the
easement may be extinguished. (568a)

Art. 656. If it be indispensable for the construction, repair, improvement, alteration or beautification of a building,
to carry materials through the estate of another, or to raise therein scaffolding or other objects necessary for the
work, the owner of such estate shall be obliged to permit the act, after receiving payment of the proper indemnity
for the damage caused him. (569a)

Art. 657. Easements of the right of way for the passage of livestock known as animal path, animal trail or any other,
and those for watering places, resting places and animal folds, shall be governed by the ordinances and regulations
relating thereto, and, in the absence thereof, by the usages and customs of the place.

Without prejudice to rights legally acquired, the animal path shall not exceed in any case the width of 75 meters,
and the animal trail that of 37 meters and 50 centimeters.

Whenever it is necessary to establish a compulsory easement of the right of way or for a watering place for
animals, the provisions of this Section and those of Articles 640 and 641 shall be observed. In this case the width
shall not exceed 10 meters. (570a)

231
 SECTION 4. - Easement of Party Wall

Art. 658. The easement of party wall shall be governed by the provisions of this Title, by the local ordinances and
customs insofar as they do not conflict with the same, and by the rules of co-ownership. (571a)

Art. 659. The existence of an easement of party wall is presumed, unless there is a title, or exterior sign, or proof to
the contrary:

(1) In dividing walls of adjoining buildings up to the point of common elevation;

(2) In dividing walls of gardens or yards situated in cities, towns, or in rural communities;

(3) In fences, walls and live hedges dividing rural lands. (572)

Art. 660. It is understood that there is an exterior sign, contrary to the easement of party wall:
(1) Whenever in the dividing wall of buildings there is a window or opening;

(2) Whenever the dividing wall is, on one side, straight and plumb on all its facement, and on the other, it
has similar conditions on the upper part, but the lower part slants or projects outward;

(3) Whenever the entire wall is built within the boundaries of one of the estates;

(4) Whenever the dividing wall bears the burden of the binding beams, floors and roof frame of one of the
buildings, but not those of the others;

(5) Whenever the dividing wall between courtyards, gardens, and tenements is constructed in such a way
that the coping sheds the water upon only one of the estates;

(6) Whenever the dividing wall, being built of masonry, has stepping stones, which at certain intervals
project from the surface on one side only, but not on the other;

(7) Whenever lands inclosed by fences or live hedges adjoin others which are not inclosed.

In all these cases, the ownership of the walls, fences or hedges shall be deemed to belong exclusively to the owner
of the property or tenement which has in its favor the presumption based on any one of these signs. (573)

Art. 661. Ditches or drains opened between two estates are also presumed as common to both, if there is no title
or sign showing the contrary.

There is a sign contrary to the part-ownership whenever the earth or dirt removed to open the ditch or to clean it is
only on one side thereof, in which case the ownership of the ditch shall belong exclusively to the owner of the land
having this exterior sign in its favor. (574)

Art. 662. The cost of repairs and construction of party walls and the maintenance of fences, live hedges, ditches,
and drains owned in common, shall be borne by all the owners of the lands or tenements having the party wall in
their favor, in proportion to the right of each.

Nevertheless, any owner may exempt himself from contributing to this charge by renouncing his part-ownership,
except when the party wall supports a building belonging to him. (575)

231
Art. 663. If the owner of a building, supported by a party wall desires to demolish the building, he may also
renounce his part-ownership of the wall, but the cost of all repairs and work necessary to prevent any damage
which the demolition may cause to the party wall, on this occasion only, shall be borne by him. (576)

Art. 664. Every owner may increase the height of the party wall, doing at his own expense and paying for any
damage which may be caused by the work, even though such damage be temporary.

The expenses of maintaining the wall in the part newly raised or deepened at its foundation shall also be paid for
by him; and, in addition, the indemnity for the increased expenses which may be necessary for the preservation of
the party wall by reason of the greater height or depth which has been given it.

If the party wall cannot bear the increased height, the owner desiring to raise it shall be obliged to reconstruct it at
his own expense and, if for this purpose it be necessary to make it thicker, he shall give the space required from his
own land. (577)

Art. 665. The other owners who have not contributed in giving increased height, depth or thickness to the wall may,
nevertheless, acquire the right of part-ownership therein, by paying proportionally the value of the work at the
time of the acquisition and of the land used for its increased thickness. (578a)

Art. 666. Every part-owner of a party wall may use it in proportion to the right he may have in the co-ownership,
without interfering with the common and respective uses by the other co-owners. (579a)

SECTION 5. - Easement of Light and View

Art. 667. No part-owner may, without the consent of the others, open through the party wall any window or
aperture of any kind. (580)

Art. 668. The period of prescription for the acquisition of an easement of light and view shall be counted:

(1) From the time of the opening of the window, if it is through a party wall; or

(2) From the time of the formal prohibition upon the proprietor of the adjoining land or tenement, if the
window is through a wall on the dominant estate. (n)

Art. 669. When the distances in Article 670 are not observed, the owner of a wall which is not party wall, adjoining
a tenement or piece of land belonging to another, can make in it openings to admit light at the height of the ceiling
joints or immediately under the ceiling, and of the size of thirty centimeters square, and, in every case, with an iron
grating imbedded in the wall and with a wire screen.

Nevertheless, the owner of the tenement or property adjoining the wall in which the openings are made can close
them should he acquire part-ownership thereof, if there be no stipulation to the contrary.

He can also obstruct them by constructing a building on his land or by raising a wall thereon contiguous to that
having such openings, unless an easement of light has been acquired. (581a)

Art. 670. No windows, apertures, balconies, or other similar projections which afford a direct view upon or towards
an adjoining land or tenement can be made, without leaving a distance of two meters between the wall in which
they are made and such contiguous property.

231
Neither can side or oblique views upon or towards such conterminous property be had, unless there be a distance
of sixty centimeters.

The nonobservance of these distances does not give rise to prescription. (582a)

Art. 671. The distance referred to in the preceding article shall be measured in cases of direct views from the outer
line of the wall when the openings do not project, from the outer line of the latter when they do, and in cases of
oblique view from the dividing line between the two properties. (583)

Art. 672. The provisions of Article 670 are not applicable to buildings separated by a public way or alley, which is
not less than three meters wide, subject to special regulations and local ordinances. (584a)

Art. 673. Whenever by any title a right has been acquired to have direct views, balconies or belvederes overlooking
an adjoining property, the owner of the servient estate cannot build thereon at less than a distance of three meters
to be measured in the manner provided in Article 671. Any stipulation permitting distances less than those
prescribed in Article 670 is void. (585a)

SECTION 6. - Drainage of Buildings

Art. 674. The owner of a building shall be obliged to construct its roof or covering in such manner that the rain
water shall fall on his own land or on a street or public place, and not on the land of his neighbor, even though the
adjacent land may belong to two or more persons, one of whom is the owner of the roof. Even if it should fall on
his own land, the owner shall be obliged to collect the water in such a way as not to cause damage to the adjacent
land or tenement. (586a)

Art. 675. The owner of a tenement or a piece of land, subject to the easement of receiving water falling from roofs,
may build in such manner as to receive the water upon his own roof or give it another outlet in accordance with
local ordinances or customs, and in such a way as not to cause any nuisance or damage whatever to the dominant
estate. (587)

Art. 676. Whenever the yard or court of a house is surrounded by other houses, and it is not possible to give an
outlet through the house itself to the rain water collected thereon, the establishment of an easement of drainage
can be demanded, giving an outlet to the water at the point of the contiguous lands or tenements where its egress
may be easiest, and establishing a conduit for the drainage in such manner as to cause the least damage to the
servient estate, after payment of the property indemnity. (583)

SECTION 7. - Intermediate Distances

and Works for Certain Constructions and Plantings

Art. 677. No constructions can be built or plantings made near fortified places or fortresses without compliance
with the conditions required in special laws, ordinances, and regulations relating thereto. (589)

Art. 678. No person shall build any aqueduct, well, sewer, furnace, forge, chimney, stable, depository of corrosive
substances, machinery, or factory which by reason of its nature or products is dangerous or noxious, without
observing the distances prescribed by the regulations and customs of the place, and without making the necessary

231
protective works, subject, in regard to the manner thereof, to the conditions prescribed by such regulations. These
prohibitions cannot be altered or renounced by stipulation on the part of the adjoining proprietors.

In the absence of regulations, such precautions shall be taken as may be considered necessary, in order to avoid
any damage to the neighboring lands or tenements. (590a)

Art. 679. No trees shall be planted near a tenement or piece of land belonging to another except at the distance
authorized by the ordinances or customs of the place, and, in the absence thereof, at a distance of at least two
meters from the dividing line of the estates if tall trees are planted and at a distance of at least fifty centimeters if
shrubs or small trees are planted.

Every landowner shall have the right to demand that trees hereafter planted at a shorter distance from his land or
tenement be uprooted.

The provisions of this article also apply to trees which have grown spontaneously. (591a)

Art. 680. If the branches of any tree should extend over a neighboring estate, tenement, garden or yard, the owner
of the latter shall have the right to demand that they be cut off insofar as they may spread over his property, and, if
it be the roots of a neighboring tree which should penetrate into the land of another, the latter may cut them off
himself within his property. (592)

Art. 681. Fruits naturally falling upon adjacent land belong to the owner of said land. (n)

SECTION 8. - Easement Against Nuisance (n)

Art. 682. Every building or piece of land is subject to the easement which prohibits the proprietor or possessor
from committing nuisance through noise, jarring, offensive odor, smoke, heat, dust, water, glare and other causes.

Art. 683. Subject to zoning, health, police and other laws and regulations, factories and shops may be maintained
provided the least possible annoyance is caused to the neighborhood.

SECTION 9. - Lateral and Subjacent Support (n)

Sec. 684. No proprietor shall make such excavations upon his land as to deprive any adjacent land or building of
sufficient lateral or subjacent support.

Art. 685. Any stipulation or testamentary provision allowing excavations that cause danger to an adjacent land or
building shall be void.

Art. 686. The legal easement of lateral and subjacent support is not only for buildings standing at the time the
excavations are made but also for constructions that may be erected.

Art. 687. Any proprietor intending to make any excavation contemplated in the three preceding articles shall notify
all owners of adjacent lands.

231
 CHAPTER 3
VOLUNTARY EASEMENTS

Art. 688. Every owner of a tenement or piece of land may establish thereon the easements which he may deem
suitable, and in the manner and form which he may deem best, provided he does not contravene the laws, public
policy or public order. (594)

Art. 689. The owner of a tenement or piece of land, the usufruct of which belongs to another, may impose thereon,
without the consent of the usufructuary, any servitudes which will not injure the right of usufruct. (595)

Art. 690. Whenever the naked ownership of a tenement or piece of land belongs to one person and the beneficial
ownership to another, no perpetual voluntary easement may be established thereon without the consent of both
owners. (596)

Art. 691. In order to impose an easement on an undivided tenement, or piece of land, the consent of all the co-
owners shall be required.

The consent given by some only, must be held in abeyance until the last one of all the co-owners shall have
expressed his conformity.

But the consent given by one of the co-owners separately from the others shall bind the grantor and his successors
not to prevent the exercise of the right granted. (597a)

Art. 692. The title and, in a proper case, the possession of an easement acquired by prescription shall determine
the rights of the dominant estate and the obligations of the servient estate. In default thereof, the easement shall
be governed by such provisions of this Title as are applicable thereto. (598)

Art. 693. If the owner of the servient estate should have bound himself, upon the establishment of the easement,
to bear the cost of the work required for the use and preservation thereof, he may free himself from this obligation
by renouncing his property to the owner of the dominant estate. (599)

Title VIII. - NUISANCE (n)

Art. 694. A nuisance is any act, omission, establishment, business, condition of property, or anything else which:
(1) Injures or endangers the health or safety of others; or

(2) Annoys or offends the senses; or

(3) Shocks, defies or disregards decency or morality; or

(4) Obstructs or interferes with the free passage of any public highway or street, or any body of water; or

(5) Hinders or impairs the use of property.

Art. 695. Nuisance is either public or private. A public nuisance affects a community or neighborhood or any
considerable number of persons, although the extent of the annoyance, danger or damage upon individuals may
be unequal. A private nuisance is one that is not included in the foregoing definition.

231
Art. 696. Every successive owner or possessor of property who fails or refuses to abate a nuisance in that property
started by a former owner or possessor is liable therefor in the same manner as the one who created it.

Art. 697. The abatement of a nuisance does not preclude the right of any person injured to recover damages for its
past existence.

Art. 698. Lapse of time cannot legalize any nuisance, whether public or private.

Art. 699. The remedies against a public nuisance are:

(1) A prosecution under the Penal Code or any local ordinance: or

(2) A civil action; or

(3) Abatement, without judicial proceedings.

Art. 700. The district health officer shall take care that one or all of the remedies against a public nuisance are
availed of.

Art. 701. If a civil action is brought by reason of the maintenance of a public nuisance, such action shall be
commenced by the city or municipal mayor.

Art. 702. The district health officer shall determine whether or not abatement, without judicial proceedings, is the
best remedy against a public nuisance.

Art. 703. A private person may file an action on account of a public nuisance, if it is specially injurious to himself.

Art. 704. Any private person may abate a public nuisance which is specially injurious to him by removing, or if
necessary, by destroying the thing which constitutes the same, without committing a breach of the peace, or doing
unnecessary injury. But it is necessary:

(1) That demand be first made upon the owner or possessor of the property to abate the nuisance;

(2) That such demand has been rejected;

(3) That the abatement be approved by the district health officer and executed with the assistance of the
local police; and

(4) That the value of the destruction does not exceed three thousand pesos.

Art. 705. The remedies against a private nuisance are:

(1) A civil action; or

(2) Abatement, without judicial proceedings.

Art. 706. Any person injured by a private nuisance may abate it by removing, or if necessary, by destroying the
thing which constitutes the nuisance, without committing a breach of the peace or doing unnecessary injury.
However, it is indispensable that the procedure for extrajudicial abatement of a public nuisance by a private person
be followed.

231
Art. 707. A private person or a public official extrajudicially abating a nuisance shall be liable for damages:

(1) If he causes unnecessary injury; or

(2) If an alleged nuisance is later declared by the courts to be not a real nuisance.

Title IX. - REGISTRY OF PROPERTY

Art. 708. The Registry of Property has for its object the inscription or annotation of acts and contracts relating to
the ownership and other rights over immovable property. (605)

Art. 709. The titles of ownership, or of other rights over immovable property, which are not duly inscribed or
annotated in the Registry of Property shall not prejudice third persons. (606)

Art. 710. The books in the Registry of Property shall be public for those who have a known interest in ascertaining
the status of the immovables or real rights annotated or inscribed therein. (607)

Art. 711. For determining what titles are subject to inscription or annotation, as well as the form, effects, and
cancellation of inscriptions and annotations, the manner of keeping the books in the Registry, and the value of the
entries contained in said books, the provisions of the Mortgage Law, the Land Registration Act, and other special
laws shall govern. (608a

231
 REPUBLIC ACT NO. 386
AN ACT TO ORDAIN AND INSTITUTE
THE CIVIL CODE OF THE PHILIPPINES

BOOK IV

OBLIGATIONS AND CONTRACTS

Title. I. - OBLIGATIONS

CHAPTER 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS

Art. 1156. An obligation is a juridical necessity to give, to do or not to do. (n)

Art. 1157. Obligations arise from:

(1) Law;

(2) Contracts;

(3) Quasi-contracts;

(4) Acts or omissions punished by law; and

(5) Quasi-delicts. (1089a)

Art. 1158. Obligations derived from law are not presumed. Only those expressly determined in this Code or in
special laws are demandable, and shall be regulated by the precepts of the law which establishes them; and as to
what has not been foreseen, by the provisions of this Book. (1090)

Art. 1159. Obligations arising from contracts have the force of law between the contracting parties and should be
complied with in good faith. (1091a)

Art. 1160. Obligations derived from quasi-contracts shall be subject to the provisions of Chapter 1, Title XVII, of this
Book. (n)

Art. 1161. Civil obligations arising from criminal offenses shall be governed by the penal laws, subject to the
provisions of Article 2177, and of the pertinent provisions of Chapter 2, Preliminary Title, on Human Relations, and
of Title XVIII of this Book, regulating damages. (1092a)

Art. 1162. Obligations derived from quasi-delicts shall be governed by the provisions of Chapter 2, Title XVII of this
Book, and by special laws. (1093a)

231
 CHAPTER 2
NATURE AND EFFECT OF OBLIGATIONS

Art. 1163. Every person obliged to give something is also obliged to take care of it with the proper diligence of a
good father of a family, unless the law or the stipulation of the parties requires another standard of care. (1094a)

Art. 1164. The creditor has a right to the fruits of the thing from the time the obligation to deliver it arises.
However, he shall acquire no real right over it until the same has been delivered to him. (1095)

Art. 1165. When what is to be delivered is a determinate thing, the creditor, in addition to the right granted him by
Article 1170, may compel the debtor to make the delivery.

If the thing is indeterminate or generic, he may ask that the obligation be complied with at the expense of the
debtor.

If the obligor delays, or has promised to deliver the same thing to two or more persons who do not have the same
interest, he shall be responsible for any fortuitous event until he has effected the delivery. (1096)

Art. 1166. The obligation to give a determinate thing includes that of delivering all its accessions and accessories,
even though they may not have been mentioned. (1097a)

Art. 1167. If a person obliged to do something fails to do it, the same shall be executed at his cost.

This same rule shall be observed if he does it in contravention of the tenor of the obligation. Furthermore, it may
be decreed that what has been poorly done be undone. (1098)

Art. 1168. When the obligation consists in not doing, and the obligor does what has been forbidden him, it shall
also be undone at his expense. (1099a)

Art. 1169. Those obliged to deliver or to do something incur in delay from the time the obligee judicially or
extrajudicially demands from them the fulfillment of their obligation.

However, the demand by the creditor shall not be necessary in order that delay may exist:

(1) When the obligation or the law expressly so declare; or

(2) When from the nature and the circumstances of the obligation it appears that the designation of the
time when the thing is to be delivered or the service is to be rendered was a controlling motive for the
establishment of the contract; or

(3) When demand would be useless, as when the obligor has rendered it beyond his power to perform.

In reciprocal obligations, neither party incurs in delay if the other does not comply or is not ready to comply in a
proper manner with what is incumbent upon him. From the moment one of the parties fulfills his obligation, delay
by the other begins. (1100a)

Art. 1170. Those who in the performance of their obligations are guilty of fraud, negligence, or delay, and those
who in any manner contravene the tenor thereof, are liable for damages. (1101)

231
Art. 1171. Responsibility arising from fraud is demandable in all obligations. Any waiver of an action for future fraud
is void. (1102a)

Art. 1172. Responsibility arising from negligence in the performance of every kind of obligation is also demandable,
but such liability may be regulated by the courts, according to the circumstances. (1103)

Art. 1173. The fault or negligence of the obligor consists in the omission of that diligence which is required by the
nature of the obligation and corresponds with the circumstances of the persons, of the time and of the place.
When negligence shows bad faith, the provisions of Articles 1171 and 2201, paragraph 2, shall apply.

If the law or contract does not state the diligence which is to be observed in the performance, that which is
expected of a good father of a family shall be required. (1104a)

Art. 1174. Except in cases expressly specified by the law, or when it is otherwise declared by stipulation, or when
the nature of the obligation requires the assumption of risk, no person shall be responsible for those events which
could not be foreseen, or which, though foreseen, were inevitable. (1105a)

Art. 1175. Usurious transactions shall be governed by special laws. (n)

Art. 1176. The receipt of the principal by the creditor without reservation with respect to the interest, shall give rise
to the presumption that said interest has been paid.

The receipt of a later installment of a debt without reservation as to prior installments, shall likewise raise the
presumption that such installments have been paid. (1110a)

Art. 1177. The creditors, after having pursued the property in possession of the debtor to satisfy their claims, may
exercise all the rights and bring all the actions of the latter for the same purpose, save those which are inherent in
his person; they may also impugn the acts which the debtor may have done to defraud them. (1111)

Art. 1178. Subject to the laws, all rights acquired in virtue of an obligation are transmissible, if there has been no
stipulation to the contrary. (1112)

CHAPTER 3
DIFFERENT KINDS OF OBLIGATIONS

SECTION 1. - Pure and Conditional Obligations

Art. 1179. Every obligation whose performance does not depend upon a future or uncertain event, or upon a past
event unknown to the parties, is demandable at once.

Every obligation which contains a resolutory condition shall also be demandable, without prejudice to the effects of
the happening of the event. (1113)

Art. 1180. When the debtor binds himself to pay when his means permit him to do so, the obligation shall be
deemed to be one with a period, subject to the provisions of Article 1197. (n)

Art. 1181. In conditional obligations, the acquisition of rights, as well as the extinguishment or loss of those already
acquired, shall depend upon the happening of the event which constitutes the condition. (1114)

231
Art. 1182. When the fulfillment of the condition depends upon the sole will of the debtor, the conditional
obligation shall be void. If it depends upon chance or upon the will of a third person, the obligation shall take effect
in conformity with the provisions of this Code. (1115)

Art. 1183. Impossible conditions, those contrary to good customs or public policy and those prohibited by law shall
annul the obligation which depends upon them. If the obligation is divisible, that part thereof which is not affected
by the impossible or unlawful condition shall be valid.

The condition not to do an impossible thing shall be considered as not having been agreed upon. (1116a)

Art. 1184. The condition that some event happen at a determinate time shall extinguish the obligation as soon as
the time expires or if it has become indubitable that the event will not take place. (1117)

Art. 1185. The condition that some event will not happen at a determinate time shall render the obligation
effective from the moment the time indicated has elapsed, or if it has become evident that the event cannot occur.

If no time has been fixed, the condition shall be deemed fulfilled at such time as may have probably been
contemplated, bearing in mind the nature of the obligation. (1118)

Art. 1186. The condition shall be deemed fulfilled when the obligor voluntarily prevents its fulfillment. (1119)

Art. 1187. The effects of a conditional obligation to give, once the condition has been fulfilled, shall retroact to the
day of the constitution of the obligation. Nevertheless, when the obligation imposes reciprocal prestations upon
the parties, the fruits and interests during the pendency of the condition shall be deemed to have been mutually
compensated. If the obligation is unilateral, the debtor shall appropriate the fruits and interests received, unless
from the nature and circumstances of the obligation it should be inferred that the intention of the person
constituting the same was different.

In obligations to do and not to do, the courts shall determine, in each case, the retroactive effect of the condition
that has been complied with. (1120)

Art. 1188. The creditor may, before the fulfillment of the condition, bring the appropriate actions for the
preservation of his right.

The debtor may recover what during the same time he has paid by mistake in case of a suspensive condition.
(1121a)

Art. 1189. When the conditions have been imposed with the intention of suspending the efficacy of an obligation to
give, the following rules shall be observed in case of the improvement, loss or deterioration of the thing during the
pendency of the condition:

(1) If the thing is lost without the fault of the debtor, the obligation shall be extinguished;

(2) If the thing is lost through the fault of the debtor, he shall be obliged to pay damages; it is understood
that the thing is lost when it perishes, or goes out of commerce, or disappears in such a way that its
existence is unknown or it cannot be recovered;

(3) When the thing deteriorates without the fault of the debtor, the impairment is to be borne by the
creditor;

231
 (4) If it deteriorates through the fault of the debtor, the creditor may choose between the rescission of the
obligation and its fulfillment, with indemnity for damages in either case;

(5) If the thing is improved by its nature, or by time, the improvement shall inure to the benefit of the
creditor;

(6) If it is improved at the expense of the debtor, he shall have no other right than that granted to the
usufructuary. (1122)

Art. 1190. When the conditions have for their purpose the extinguishment of an obligation to give, the parties,
upon the fulfillment of said conditions, shall return to each other what they have received.

In case of the loss, deterioration or improvement of the thing, the provisions which, with respect to the debtor, are
laid down in the preceding article shall be applied to the party who is bound to return.

As for the obligations to do and not to do, the provisions of the second paragraph of Article 1187 shall be observed
as regards the effect of the extinguishment of the obligation. (1123)

Art. 1191. The power to rescind obligations is implied in reciprocal ones, in case one of the obligors should not
comply with what is incumbent upon him.

The injured party may choose between the fulfillment and the rescission of the obligation, with the payment of
damages in either case. He may also seek rescission, even after he has chosen fulfillment, if the latter should
become impossible.

The court shall decree the rescission claimed, unless there be just cause authorizing the fixing of a period.

This is understood to be without prejudice to the rights of third persons who have acquired the thing, in
accordance with Articles 1385 and 1388 and the Mortgage Law. (1124)

Art. 1192. In case both parties have committed a breach of the obligation, the liability of the first infractor shall be
equitably tempered by the courts. If it cannot be determined which of the parties first violated the contract, the
same shall be deemed extinguished, and each shall bear his own damages. (n)

SECTION 2. - Obligations with a Period

Art. 1193. Obligations for whose fulfillment a day certain has been fixed, shall be demandable only when that day
comes.

Obligations with a resolutory period take effect at once, but terminate upon arrival of the day certain.

A day certain is understood to be that which must necessarily come, although it may not be known when.

If the uncertainty consists in whether the day will come or not, the obligation is conditional, and it shall be
regulated by the rules of the preceding Section. (1125a)

Art. 1194. In case of loss, deterioration or improvement of the thing before the arrival of the day certain, the rules
in Article 1189 shall be observed. (n)

231
Art. 1195. Anything paid or delivered before the arrival of the period, the obligor being unaware of the period or
believing that the obligation has become due and demandable, may be recovered, with the fruits and interests.
(1126a)

Art. 1196. Whenever in an obligation a period is designated, it is presumed to have been established for the benefit
of both the creditor and the debtor, unless from the tenor of the same or other circumstances it should appear that
the period has been established in favor of one or of the other. (1127)

Art. 1197. If the obligation does not fix a period, but from its nature and the circumstances it can be inferred that a
period was intended, the courts may fix the duration thereof.

The courts shall also fix the duration of the period when it depends upon the will of the debtor.

In every case, the courts shall determine such period as may under the circumstances have been probably
contemplated by the parties. Once fixed by the courts, the period cannot be changed by them. (1128a)

Art. 1198. The debtor shall lose every right to make use of the period:

(1) When after the obligation has been contracted, he becomes insolvent, unless he gives a guaranty or security for
the debt;

(2) When he does not furnish to the creditor the guaranties or securities which he has promised;

(3) When by his own acts he has impaired said guaranties or securities after their establishment, and when through
a fortuitous event they disappear, unless he immediately gives new ones equally satisfactory;

(4) When the debtor violates any undertaking, in consideration of which the creditor agreed to the period;

(5) When the debtor attempts to abscond. (1129a)

SECTION 3. - Alternative Obligations

Art. 1199. A person alternatively bound by different prestations shall completely perform one of them.

The creditor cannot be compelled to receive part of one and part of the other undertaking. (1131)

Art. 1200. The right of choice belongs to the debtor, unless it has been expressly granted to the creditor.

The debtor shall have no right to choose those prestations which are impossible, unlawful or which could not have
been the object of the obligation. (1132)

Art. 1201. The choice shall produce no effect except from the time it has been communicated. (1133)

Art. 1202. The debtor shall lose the right of choice when among the prestations whereby he is alternatively bound,
only one is practicable. (1134)

231
Art. 1203. If through the creditor's acts the debtor cannot make a choice according to the terms of the obligation,
the latter may rescind the contract with damages. (n)

Art. 1204. The creditor shall have a right to indemnity for damages when, through the fault of the debtor, all the
things which are alternatively the object of the obligation have been lost, or the compliance of the obligation has
become impossible.

The indemnity shall be fixed taking as a basis the value of the last thing which disappeared, or that of the service
which last became impossible.

Damages other than the value of the last thing or service may also be awarded. (1135a)

Art. 1205. When the choice has been expressly given to the creditor, the obligation shall cease to be alternative
from the day when the selection has been communicated to the debtor.

Until then the responsibility of the debtor shall be governed by the following rules:

(1) If one of the things is lost through a fortuitous event, he shall perform the obligation by delivering that
which the creditor should choose from among the remainder, or that which remains if only one subsists;

(2) If the loss of one of the things occurs through the fault of the debtor, the creditor may claim any of
those subsisting, or the price of that which, through the fault of the former, has disappeared, with a right
to damages;

(3) If all the things are lost through the fault of the debtor, the choice by the creditor shall fall upon the
price of any one of them, also with indemnity for damages.

The same rules shall be applied to obligations to do or not to do in case one, some or all of the prestations should
become impossible. (1136a)

Art. 1206. When only one prestation has been agreed upon, but the obligor may render another in substitution, the
obligation is called facultative.

The loss or deterioration of the thing intended as a substitute, through the negligence of the obligor, does not
render him liable. But once the substitution has been made, the obligor is liable for the loss of the substitute on
account of his delay, negligence or fraud. (n)

SECTION 4. - Joint and Solidary Obligations

Art. 1207. The concurrence of two or more creditors or of two or more debtors in one and the same obligation
does not imply that each one of the former has a right to demand, or that each one of the latter is bound to render,
entire compliance with the prestation. There is a solidary liability only when the obligation expressly so states, or
when the law or the nature of the obligation requires solidarity. (1137a)

Art. 1208. If from the law, or the nature or the wording of the obligations to which the preceding article refers the
contrary does not appear, the credit or debt shall be presumed to be divided into as many shares as there are
creditors or debtors, the credits or debts being considered distinct from one another, subject to the Rules of Court
governing the multiplicity of suits. (1138a)

231
Art. 1209. If the division is impossible, the right of the creditors may be prejudiced only by their collective acts, and
the debt can be enforced only by proceeding against all the debtors. If one of the latter should be insolvent, the
others shall not be liable for his share. (1139)

Art. 1210. The indivisibility of an obligation does not necessarily give rise to solidarity. Nor does solidarity of itself
imply indivisibility. (n)

Art. 1211. Solidarity may exist although the creditors and the debtors may not be bound in the same manner and
by the same periods and conditions. (1140)

Art. 1212. Each one of the solidary creditors may do whatever may be useful to the others, but not anything which
may be prejudicial to the latter. (1141a)

Art. 1213. A solidary creditor cannot assign his rights without the consent of the others. (n)

Art. 1214. The debtor may pay any one of the solidary creditors; but if any demand, judicial or extrajudicial, has
been made by one of them, payment should be made to him. (1142a)

Art. 1215. Novation, compensation, confusion or remission of the debt, made by any of the solidary creditors or
with any of the solidary debtors, shall extinguish the obligation, without prejudice to the provisions of Article 1219.

The creditor who may have executed any of these acts, as well as he who collects the debt, shall be liable to the
others for the share in the obligation corresponding to them. (1143)

Art. 1216. The creditor may proceed against any one of the solidary debtors or some or all of them simultaneously.
The demand made against one of them shall not be an obstacle to those which may subsequently be directed
against the others, so long as the debt has not been fully collected. (1144a)

Art. 1217. Payment made by one of the solidary debtors extinguishes the obligation. If two or more solidary
debtors offer to pay, the creditor may choose which offer to accept.

He who made the payment may claim from his co-debtors only the share which corresponds to each, with the
interest for the payment already made. If the payment is made before the debt is due, no interest for the
intervening period may be demanded.

When one of the solidary debtors cannot, because of his insolvency, reimburse his share to the debtor paying the
obligation, such share shall be borne by all his co-debtors, in proportion to the debt of each. (1145a)

Art. 1218. Payment by a solidary debtor shall not entitle him to reimbursement from his co-debtors if such
payment is made after the obligation has prescribed or become illegal. (n)

Art. 1219. The remission made by the creditor of the share which affects one of the solidary debtors does not
release the latter from his responsibility towards the co-debtors, in case the debt had been totally paid by anyone
of them before the remission was effected. (1146a)

Art. 1220. The remission of the whole obligation, obtained by one of the solidary debtors, does not entitle him to
reimbursement from his co-debtors. (n)

Art. 1221. If the thing has been lost or if the prestation has become impossible without the fault of the solidary
debtors, the obligation shall be extinguished.

231
If there was fault on the part of any one of them, all shall be responsible to the creditor, for the price and the
payment of damages and interest, without prejudice to their action against the guilty or negligent debtor.

If through a fortuitous event, the thing is lost or the performance has become impossible after one of the solidary
debtors has incurred in delay through the judicial or extrajudicial demand upon him by the creditor, the provisions
of the preceding paragraph shall apply. (1147a)

Art. 1222. A solidary debtor may, in actions filed by the creditor, avail himself of all defenses which are derived from
the nature of the obligation and of those which are personal to him, or pertain to his own share. With respect to
those which personally belong to the others, he may avail himself thereof only as regards that part of the debt for
which the latter are responsible. (1148a)

SECTION 5. - Divisible and Indivisible Obligations

Art. 1223. The divisibility or indivisibility of the things that are the object of obligations in which there is only one
debtor and only one creditor does not alter or modify the provisions of Chapter 2 of this Title. (1149)

Art. 1224. A joint indivisible obligation gives rise to indemnity for damages from the time anyone of the debtors
does not comply with his undertaking. The debtors who may have been ready to fulfill their promises shall not
contribute to the indemnity beyond the corresponding portion of the price of the thing or of the value of the
service in which the obligation consists. (1150)

Art. 1225. For the purposes of the preceding articles, obligations to give definite things and those which are not
susceptible of partial performance shall be deemed to be indivisible.

When the obligation has for its object the execution of a certain number of days of work, the accomplishment of
work by metrical units, or analogous things which by their nature are susceptible of partial performance, it shall be
divisible.

However, even though the object or service may be physically divisible, an obligation is indivisible if so provided by
law or intended by the parties.

In obligations not to do, divisibility or indivisibility shall be determined by the character of the prestation in each
particular case. (1151a)

SECTION 6. - Obligations with a Penal Clause

Art. 1226. In obligations with a penal clause, the penalty shall substitute the indemnity for damages and the
payment of interests in case of noncompliance, if there is no stipulation to the contrary. Nevertheless, damages
shall be paid if the obligor refuses to pay the penalty or is guilty of fraud in the fulfillment of the obligation.

The penalty may be enforced only when it is demandable in accordance with the provisions of this Code. (1152a)

Art. 1227. The debtor cannot exempt himself from the performance of the obligation by paying the penalty, save in
the case where this right has been expressly reserved for him. Neither can the creditor demand the fulfillment of
the obligation and the satisfaction of the penalty at the same time, unless this right has been clearly granted him.

231
However, if after the creditor has decided to require the fulfillment of the obligation, the performance thereof
should become impossible without his fault, the penalty may be enforced. (1153a)

Art. 1228. Proof of actual damages suffered by the creditor is not necessary in order that the penalty may be
demanded. (n)

Art. 1229. The judge shall equitably reduce the penalty when the principal obligation has been partly or irregularly
complied with by the debtor. Even if there has been no performance, the penalty may also be reduced by the
courts if it is iniquitous or unconscionable. (1154a)

Art. 1230. The nullity of the penal clause does not carry with it that of the principal obligation.

The nullity of the principal obligation carries with it that of the penal clause. (1155)

CHAPTER 4
EXTINGUISHMENT OF OBLIGATIONS

GENERAL PROVISIONS

Art. 1231. Obligations are extinguished:

(1) By payment or performance:

(2) By the loss of the thing due:

(3) By the condonation or remission of the debt;

(4) By the confusion or merger of the rights of creditor and debtor;

(5) By compensation;

(6) By novation.

Other causes of extinguishment of obligations, such as annulment, rescission, fulfillment of a resolutory condition,
and prescription, are governed elsewhere in this Code. (1156a)

SECTION 1. - Payment or Performance

Art. 1232. Payment means not only the delivery of money but also the performance, in any other manner, of an
obligation. (n)

Art. 1233. A debt shall not be understood to have been paid unless the thing or service in which the obligation
consists has been completely delivered or rendered, as the case may be. (1157)

Art. 1234. If the obligation has been substantially performed in good faith, the obligor may recover as though there
had been a strict and complete fulfillment, less damages suffered by the obligee. (n)

Art. 1235. When the obligee accepts the performance, knowing its incompleteness or irregularity, and without
expressing any protest or objection, the obligation is deemed fully complied with. (n)

231
Art. 1236. The creditor is not bound to accept payment or performance by a third person who has no interest in the
fulfillment of the obligation, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary.

Whoever pays for another may demand from the debtor what he has paid, except that if he paid without the
knowledge or against the will of the debtor, he can recover only insofar as the payment has been beneficial to the
debtor. (1158a)

Art. 1237. Whoever pays on behalf of the debtor without the knowledge or against the will of the latter, cannot
compel the creditor to subrogate him in his rights, such as those arising from a mortgage, guaranty, or penalty.
(1159a)

Art. 1238. Payment made by a third person who does not intend to be reimbursed by the debtor is deemed to be a
donation, which requires the debtor's consent. But the payment is in any case valid as to the creditor who has
accepted it. (n)

Art. 1239. In obligations to give, payment made by one who does not have the free disposal of the thing due and
capacity to alienate it shall not be valid, without prejudice to the provisions of Article 1427 under the Title on
"Natural Obligations." (1160a)

Art. 1240. Payment shall be made to the person in whose favor the obligation has been constituted, or his
successor in interest, or any person authorized to receive it. (1162a)

Art. 1241. Payment to a person who is incapacitated to administer his property shall be valid if he has kept the
thing delivered, or insofar as the payment has been beneficial to him.

Payment made to a third person shall also be valid insofar as it has redounded to the benefit of the creditor. Such
benefit to the creditor need not be proved in the following cases:

(1) If after the payment, the third person acquires the creditor's rights;

(2) If the creditor ratifies the payment to the third person;

(3) If by the creditor's conduct, the debtor has been led to believe that the third person had authority to
receive the payment. (1163a)

Art. 1242. Payment made in good faith to any person in possession of the credit shall release the debtor.
(1164)

Art. 1243. Payment made to the creditor by the debtor after the latter has been judicially ordered to retain the
debt shall not be valid. (1165)

Art. 1244. The debtor of a thing cannot compel the creditor to receive a different one, although the latter may be
of the same value as, or more valuable than that which is due.

In obligations to do or not to do, an act or forbearance cannot be substituted by another act or forbearance against
the obligee's will. (1166a)

Art. 1245. Dation in payment, whereby property is alienated to the creditor in satisfaction of a debt in money, shall
be governed by the law of sales. (n)

231
Art. 1246. When the obligation consists in the delivery of an indeterminate or generic thing, whose quality and
circumstances have not been stated, the creditor cannot demand a thing of superior quality. Neither can the debtor
deliver a thing of inferior quality. The purpose of the obligation and other circumstances shall be taken into
consideration. (1167a)

Art. 1247. Unless it is otherwise stipulated, the extrajudicial expenses required by the payment shall be for the
account of the debtor. With regard to judicial costs, the Rules of Court shall govern. (1168a)

Art. 1248. Unless there is an express stipulation to that effect, the creditor cannot be compelled partially to receive
the prestations in which the obligation consists. Neither may the debtor be required to make partial payments.

However, when the debt is in part liquidated and in part unliquidated, the creditor may demand and the debtor
may effect the payment of the former without waiting for the liquidation of the latter. (1169a)

Art. 1249. The payment of debts in money shall be made in the currency stipulated, and if it is not possible to
deliver such currency, then in the currency which is legal tender in the Philippines.

The delivery of promissory notes payable to order, or bills of exchange or other mercantile documents shall
produce the effect of payment only when they have been cashed, or when through the fault of the creditor they
have been impaired.

In the meantime, the action derived from the original obligation shall be held in the abeyance. (1170)

Art. 1250. In case an extraordinary inflation or deflation of the currency stipulated should supervene, the value of
the currency at the time of the establishment of the obligation shall be the basis of payment, unless there is an
agreement to the contrary. (n)

Art. 1251. Payment shall be made in the place designated in the obligation.

There being no express stipulation and if the undertaking is to deliver a determinate thing, the payment shall be
made wherever the thing might be at the moment the obligation was constituted.

In any other case the place of payment shall be the domicile of the debtor.

If the debtor changes his domicile in bad faith or after he has incurred in delay, the additional expenses shall be
borne by him.

These provisions are without prejudice to venue under the Rules of Court. (1171a)

SUBSECTION 1. - Application of Payments

Art. 1252. He who has various debts of the same kind in favor of one and the same creditor, may declare at the
time of making the payment, to which of them the same must be applied. Unless the parties so stipulate, or when
the application of payment is made by the party for whose benefit the term has been constituted, application shall
not be made as to debts which are not yet due.

231
If the debtor accepts from the creditor a receipt in which an application of the payment is made, the former cannot
complain of the same, unless there is a cause for invalidating the contract. (1172a)

Art. 1253. If the debt produces interest, payment of the principal shall not be deemed to have been made until the
interests have been covered. (1173)

Art. 1254. When the payment cannot be applied in accordance with the preceding rules, or if application can not
be inferred from other circumstances, the debt which is most onerous to the debtor, among those due, shall be
deemed to have been satisfied.

If the debts due are of the same nature and burden, the payment shall be applied to all of them proportionately.
(1174a)

SUBSECTION 2. - Payment by Cession

Art. 1255. The debtor may cede or assign his property to his creditors in payment of his debts. This cession, unless
there is stipulation to the contrary, shall only release the debtor from responsibility for the net proceeds of the
thing assigned. The agreements which, on the effect of the cession, are made between the debtor and his creditors
shall be governed by special laws. (1175a)

SUBSECTION 3. - Tender of Payment and Consignation

Art. 1256. If the creditor to whom tender of payment has been made refuses without just cause to accept it, the
debtor shall be released from responsibility by the consignation of the thing or sum due.

Consignation alone shall produce the same effect in the following cases:

(1) When the creditor is absent or unknown, or does not appear at the place of payment;

(2) When he is incapacitated to receive the payment at the time it is due;

(3) When, without just cause, he refuses to give a receipt;

(4) When two or more persons claim the same right to collect;

(5) When the title of the obligation has been lost. (1176a)

Art. 1257. In order that the consignation of the thing due may release the obligor, it must first be announced to the
persons interested in the fulfillment of the obligation.

The consignation shall be ineffectual if it is not made strictly in consonance with the provisions which regulate
payment. (1177)

Art. 1258. Consignation shall be made by depositing the things due at the disposal of judicial authority, before
whom the tender of payment shall be proved, in a proper case, and the announcement of the consignation in other
cases.

The consignation having been made, the interested parties shall also be notified thereof. (1178)

231
Art. 1259. The expenses of consignation, when properly made, shall be charged against the creditor. (1178)

Art. 1260. Once the consignation has been duly made, the debtor may ask the judge to order the cancellation of
the obligation.

Before the creditor has accepted the consignation, or before a judicial declaration that the consignation has been
properly made, the debtor may withdraw the thing or the sum deposited, allowing the obligation to remain in
force. (1180)

Art. 1261. If, the consignation having been made, the creditor should authorize the debtor to withdraw the same,
he shall lose every preference which he may have over the thing. The co-debtors, guarantors and sureties shall be
released. (1181a)

SECTION 2. - Loss of the Thing Due

Art. 1262. An obligation which consists in the delivery of a determinate thing shall be extinguished if it should be
lost or destroyed without the fault of the debtor, and before he has incurred in delay.

When by law or stipulation, the obligor is liable even for fortuitous events, the loss of the thing does not extinguish
the obligation, and he shall be responsible for damages. The same rule applies when the nature of the obligation
requires the assumption of risk. (1182a)

Art. 1263. In an obligation to deliver a generic thing, the loss or destruction of anything of the same kind does not
extinguish the obligation. (n)

Art. 1264. The courts shall determine whether, under the circumstances, the partial loss of the object of the
obligation is so important as to extinguish the obligation. (n)

Art. 1265. Whenever the thing is lost in the possession of the debtor, it shall be presumed that the loss was due to
his fault, unless there is proof to the contrary, and without prejudice to the provisions of article 1165. This
presumption does not apply in case of earthquake, flood, storm, or other natural calamity. (1183a)

Art. 1266. The debtor in obligations to do shall also be released when the prestation becomes legally or physically
impossible without the fault of the obligor. (1184a)

Art. 1267. When the service has become so difficult as to be manifestly beyond the contemplation of the parties,
the obligor may also be released therefrom, in whole or in part. (n)

Art. 1268. When the debt of a thing certain and determinate proceeds from a criminal offense, the debtor shall not
be exempted from the payment of its price, whatever may be the cause for the loss, unless the thing having been
offered by him to the person who should receive it, the latter refused without justification to accept it. (1185)

Art. 1269. The obligation having been extinguished by the loss of the thing, the creditor shall have all the rights of
action which the debtor may have against third persons by reason of the loss. (1186)

231
 SECTION 3. - Condonation or Remission of the Debt

Art. 1270. Condonation or remission is essentially gratuitous, and requires the acceptance by the obligor. It may be
made expressly or impliedly.

One and the other kind shall be subject to the rules which govern inofficious donations. Express condonation shall,
furthermore, comply with the forms of donation. (1187)

Art. 1271. The delivery of a private document evidencing a credit, made voluntarily by the creditor to the debtor,
implies the renunciation of the action which the former had against the latter.

If in order to nullify this waiver it should be claimed to be inofficious, the debtor and his heirs may uphold it by
proving that the delivery of the document was made in virtue of payment of the debt. (1188)

Art. 1272. Whenever the private document in which the debt appears is found in the possession of the debtor, it
shall be presumed that the creditor delivered it voluntarily, unless the contrary is proved. (1189)

Art. 1273. The renunciation of the principal debt shall extinguish the accessory obligations; but the waiver of the
latter shall leave the former in force. (1190)

Art. 1274. It is presumed that the accessory obligation of pledge has been remitted when the thing pledged, after
its delivery to the creditor, is found in the possession of the debtor, or of a third person who owns the thing.
(1191a)

SECTION 4. - Confusion or Merger of Rights

Art. 1275. The obligation is extinguished from the time the characters of creditor and debtor are merged in the
same person. (1192a)

Art. 1276. Merger which takes place in the person of the principal debtor or creditor benefits the guarantors.
Confusion which takes place in the person of any of the latter does not extinguish the obligation. (1193)

Art. 1277. Confusion does not extinguish a joint obligation except as regards the share corresponding to the
creditor or debtor in whom the two characters concur. (1194)

SECTION 5. - Compensation

Art. 1278. Compensation shall take place when two persons, in their own right, are creditors and debtors of each
other. (1195)

Art. 1279. In order that compensation may be proper, it is necessary:

(1) That each one of the obligors be bound principally, and that he be at the same time a principal creditor
of the other;

231
 (2) That both debts consist in a sum of money, or if the things due are consumable, they be of the same
kind, and also of the same quality if the latter has been stated;

(3) That the two debts be due;

(4) That they be liquidated and demandable;

(5) That over neither of them there be any retention or controversy, commenced by third persons and
communicated in due time to the debtor. (1196)

Art. 1280. Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding article, the guarantor may set up compensation as
regards what the creditor may owe the principal debtor. (1197)

Art. 1281. Compensation may be total or partial. When the two debts are of the same amount, there is a total
compensation. (n)

Art. 1282. The parties may agree upon the compensation of debts which are not yet due. (n)

Art. 1283. If one of the parties to a suit over an obligation has a claim for damages against the other, the former
may set it off by proving his right to said damages and the amount thereof. (n)

Art. 1284. When one or both debts are rescissible or voidable, they may be compensated against each other before
they are judicially rescinded or avoided. (n)

Art. 1285. The debtor who has consented to the assignment of rights made by a creditor in favor of a third person,
cannot set up against the assignee the compensation which would pertain to him against the assignor, unless the
assignor was notified by the debtor at the time he gave his consent, that he reserved his right to the compensation.

If the creditor communicated the cession to him but the debtor did not consent thereto, the latter may set up the
compensation of debts previous to the cession, but not of subsequent ones.

If the assignment is made without the knowledge of the debtor, he may set up the compensation of all credits prior
to the same and also later ones until he had knowledge of the assignment. (1198a)

Art. 1286. Compensation takes place by operation of law, even though the debts may be payable at different
places, but there shall be an indemnity for expenses of exchange or transportation to the place of payment.
(1199a)

Art. 1287. Compensation shall not be proper when one of the debts arises from a depositum or from the
obligations of a depositary or of a bailee in commodatum.

Neither can compensation be set up against a creditor who has a claim for support due by gratuitous title, without
prejudice to the provisions of paragraph 2 of Article 301. (1200a)

Art. 1288. Neither shall there be compensation if one of the debts consists in civil liability arising from a penal
offense. (n)

Art. 1289. If a person should have against him several debts which are susceptible of compensation, the rules on
the application of payments shall apply to the order of the compensation. (1201)

231
Art. 1290. When all the requisites mentioned in Article 1279 are present, compensation takes effect by operation of
law, and extinguishes both debts to the concurrent amount, even though the creditors and debtors are not aware
of the compensation. (1202a)

SECTION 6. - Novation

Art. 1291. Obligations may be modified by:

(1) Changing their object or principal conditions;

(2) Substituting the person of the debtor;

(3) Subrogating a third person in the rights of the creditor. (1203)

Art. 1292. In order that an obligation may be extinguished by another which substitute the same, it is imperative
that it be so declared in unequivocal terms, or that the old and the new obligations be on every point incompatible
with each other. (1204)

Art. 1293. Novation which consists in substituting a new debtor in the place of the original one, may be made even
without the knowledge or against the will of the latter, but not without the consent of the creditor. Payment by the
new debtor gives him the rights mentioned in Articles 1236 and 1237. (1205a)

Art. 1294. If the substitution is without the knowledge or against the will of the debtor, the new debtor's insolvency
or non-fulfillment of the obligations shall not give rise to any liability on the part of the original debtor. (n)

Art. 1295. The insolvency of the new debtor, who has been proposed by the original debtor and accepted by the
creditor, shall not revive the action of the latter against the original obligor, except when said insolvency was
already existing and of public knowledge, or known to the debtor, when the delegated his debt. (1206a)

Art. 1296. When the principal obligation is extinguished in consequence of a novation, accessory obligations may
subsist only insofar as they may benefit third persons who did not give their consent. (1207)

Art. 1297. If the new obligation is void, the original one shall subsist, unless the parties intended that the former
relation should be extinguished in any event. (n)

Art. 1298. The novation is void if the original obligation was void, except when annulment may be claimed only by
the debtor or when ratification validates acts which are voidable. (1208a)

Art. 1299. If the original obligation was subject to a suspensive or resolutory condition, the new obligation shall be
under the same condition, unless it is otherwise stipulated. (n)

Art. 1300. Subrogation of a third person in the rights of the creditor is either legal or conventional. The former is
not presumed, except in cases expressly mentioned in this Code; the latter must be clearly established in order that
it may take effect. (1209a)

Art. 1301. Conventional subrogation of a third person requires the consent of the original parties and of the third
person. (n)

231
Art. 1302. It is presumed that there is legal subrogation:

(1) When a creditor pays another creditor who is preferred, even without the debtor's knowledge;

(2) When a third person, not interested in the obligation, pays with the express or tacit approval of the
debtor;

(3) When, even without the knowledge of the debtor, a person interested in the fulfillment of the
obligation pays, without prejudice to the effects of confusion as to the latter's share. (1210a)

Art. 1303. Subrogation transfers to the persons subrogated the credit with all the rights thereto appertaining, either
against the debtor or against third person, be they guarantors or possessors of mortgages, subject to stipulation in
a conventional subrogation. (1212a)

Art. 1304. A creditor, to whom partial payment has been made, may exercise his right for the remainder, and he
shall be preferred to the person who has been subrogated in his place in virtue of the partial payment of the same
credit. (1213)

Title II. - CONTRACTS

CHAPTER 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS

Art. 1305. A contract is a meeting of minds between two persons whereby one binds himself, with respect to the
other, to give something or to render some service. (1254a)

Art. 1306. The contracting parties may establish such stipulations, clauses, terms and conditions as they may deem
convenient, provided they are not contrary to law, morals, good customs, public order, or public policy. (1255a)

Art. 1307. Innominate contracts shall be regulated by the stipulations of the parties, by the provisions of Titles I and
II of this Book, by the rules governing the most analogous nominate contracts, and by the customs of the place. (n)

Art. 1308. The contract must bind both contracting parties; its validity or compliance cannot be left to the will of
one of them. (1256a)

Art. 1309. The determination of the performance may be left to a third person, whose decision shall not be binding
until it has been made known to both contracting parties. (n)

Art. 1310. The determination shall not be obligatory if it is evidently inequitable. In such case, the courts shall
decide what is equitable under the circumstances. (n)

Art. 1311. Contracts take effect only between the parties, their assigns and heirs, except in case where the rights
and obligations arising from the contract are not transmissible by their nature, or by stipulation or by provision of
law. The heir is not liable beyond the value of the property he received from the decedent.

If a contract should contain some stipulation in favor of a third person, he may demand its fulfillment provided he
communicated his acceptance to the obligor before its revocation. A mere incidental benefit or interest of a person
is not sufficient. The contracting parties must have clearly and deliberately conferred a favor upon a third person.
(1257a)

231
Art. 1312. In contracts creating real rights, third persons who come into possession of the object of the contract are
bound thereby, subject to the provisions of the Mortgage Law and the Land Registration Laws. (n)

Art. 1313. Creditors are protected in cases of contracts intended to defraud them. (n)

Art. 1314. Any third person who induces another to violate his contract shall be liable for damages to the other
contracting party. (n)

Art. 1315. Contracts are perfected by mere consent, and from that moment the parties are bound not only to the
fulfillment of what has been expressly stipulated but also to all the consequences which, according to their nature,
may be in keeping with good faith, usage and law. (1258)

Art. 1316. Real contracts, such as deposit, pledge and Commodatum, are not perfected until the delivery of the
object of the obligation. (n)

Art. 1317. No one may contract in the name of another without being authorized by the latter, or unless he has by
law a right to represent him.

A contract entered into in the name of another by one who has no authority or legal representation, or who has
acted beyond his powers, shall be unenforceable, unless it is ratified, expressly or impliedly, by the person on
whose behalf it has been executed, before it is revoked by the other contracting party. (1259a)

CHAPTER 2
ESSENTIAL REQUISITES OF CONTRACTS

GENERAL PROVISIONS

Art. 1318. There is no contract unless the following requisites concur:

(1) Consent of the contracting parties;

(2) Object certain which is the subject matter of the contract;

(3) Cause of the obligation which is established. (1261)

SECTION 1. - Consent

Art. 1319. Consent is manifested by the meeting of the offer and the acceptance upon the thing and the cause
which are to constitute the contract. The offer must be certain and the acceptance absolute. A qualified acceptance
constitutes a counter-offer.

Acceptance made by letter or telegram does not bind the offerer except from the time it came to his knowledge.
The contract, in such a case, is presumed to have been entered into in the place where the offer was made. (1262a)

Art. 1320. An acceptance may be express or implied. (n)

Art. 1321. The person making the offer may fix the time, place, and manner of acceptance, all of which must be
complied with. (n)

Art. 1322. An offer made through an agent is accepted from the time acceptance is communicated to him. (n)

231
Art. 1323. An offer becomes ineffective upon the death, civil interdiction, insanity, or insolvency of either party
before acceptance is conveyed. (n)

Art. 1324. When the offerer has allowed the offeree a certain period to accept, the offer may be withdrawn at any
time before acceptance by communicating such withdrawal, except when the option is founded upon a
consideration, as something paid or promised. (n)

Art. 1325. Unless it appears otherwise, business advertisements of things for sale are not definite offers, but mere
invitations to make an offer. (n)

Art. 1326. Advertisements for bidders are simply invitations to make proposals, and the advertiser is not bound to
accept the highest or lowest bidder, unless the contrary appears. (n)

Art. 1327. The following cannot give consent to a contract:

(1) Unemancipated minors;

(2) Insane or demented persons, and deaf-mutes who do not know how to write. (1263a)

Art. 1328. Contracts entered into during a lucid interval are valid. Contracts agreed to in a state of drunkenness or
during a hypnotic spell are voidable. (n)

Art. 1329. The incapacity declared in Article 1327 is subject to the modifications determined by law, and is
understood to be without prejudice to special disqualifications established in the laws. (1264)

Art. 1330. A contract where consent is given through mistake, violence, intimidation, undue influence, or fraud is
voidable. (1265a)

Art. 1331. In order that mistake may invalidate consent, it should refer to the substance of the thing which is the
object of the contract, or to those conditions which have principally moved one or both parties to enter into the
contract.

Mistake as to the identity or qualifications of one of the parties will vitiate consent only when such identity or
qualifications have been the principal cause of the contract.

A simple mistake of account shall give rise to its correction. (1266a)

Art. 1332. When one of the parties is unable to read, or if the contract is in a language not understood by him, and
mistake or fraud is alleged, the person enforcing the contract must show that the terms thereof have been fully
explained to the former. (n)

Art. 1333. There is no mistake if the party alleging it knew the doubt, contingency or risk affecting the object of the
contract. (n)

Art. 1334. Mutual error as to the legal effect of an agreement when the real purpose of the parties is frustrated,
may vitiate consent. (n)

Art. 1335. There is violence when in order to wrest consent, serious or irresistible force is employed.

231
There is intimidation when one of the contracting parties is compelled by a reasonable and well-grounded fear of
an imminent and grave evil upon his person or property, or upon the person or property of his spouse, descendants
or ascendants, to give his consent.

To determine the degree of intimidation, the age, sex and condition of the person shall be borne in mind.

A threat to enforce one's claim through competent authority, if the claim is just or legal, does not vitiate consent.
(1267a)

Art. 1336. Violence or intimidation shall annul the obligation, although it may have been employed by a third
person who did not take part in the contract. (1268)

Art. 1337. There is undue influence when a person takes improper advantage of his power over the will of another,
depriving the latter of a reasonable freedom of choice. The following circumstances shall be considered: the
confidential, family, spiritual and other relations between the parties, or the fact that the person alleged to have
been unduly influenced was suffering from mental weakness, or was ignorant or in financial distress. (n)

Art. 1338. There is fraud when, through insidious words or machinations of one of the contracting parties, the
other is induced to enter into a contract which, without them, he would not have agreed to. (1269)

Art. 1339. Failure to disclose facts, when there is a duty to reveal them, as when the parties are bound by
confidential relations, constitutes fraud. (n)

Art. 1340. The usual exaggerations in trade, when the other party had an opportunity to know the facts, are not in
themselves fraudulent. (n)

Art. 1341. A mere expression of an opinion does not signify fraud, unless made by an expert and the other party
has relied on the former's special knowledge. (n)

Art. 1342. Misrepresentation by a third person does not vitiate consent, unless such misrepresentation has created
substantial mistake and the same is mutual. (n)

Art. 1343. Misrepresentation made in good faith is not fraudulent but may constitute error. (n)

Art. 1344. In order that fraud may make a contract voidable, it should be serious and should not have been
employed by both contracting parties.

Incidental fraud only obliges the person employing it to pay damages. (1270)

Art. 1345. Simulation of a contract may be absolute or relative. The former takes place when the parties do not
intend to be bound at all; the latter, when the parties conceal their true agreement. (n)

Art. 1346. An absolutely simulated or fictitious contract is void. A relative simulation, when it does not prejudice a
third person and is not intended for any purpose contrary to law, morals, good customs, public order or public
policy binds the parties to their real agreement. (n)

SECTION 2. - Object of Contracts

231
Art. 1347. All things which are not outside the commerce of men, including future things, may be the object of a
contract. All rights which are not intransmissible may also be the object of contracts.

No contract may be entered into upon future inheritance except in cases expressly authorized by law.

All services which are not contrary to law, morals, good customs, public order or public policy may likewise be the
object of a contract. (1271a)

Art. 1348. Impossible things or services cannot be the object of contracts. (1272)

Art. 1349. The object of every contract must be determinate as to its kind. The fact that the quantity is not
determinate shall not be an obstacle to the existence of the contract, provided it is possible to determine the same,
without the need of a new contract between the parties. (1273)

SECTION 3. - Cause of Contracts

Art. 1350. In onerous contracts the cause is understood to be, for each contracting party, the prestation or promise
of a thing or service by the other; in remuneratory ones, the service or benefit which is remunerated; and in
contracts of pure beneficence, the mere liberality of the benefactor. (1274)

Art. 1351. The particular motives of the parties in entering into a contract are different from the cause thereof. (n)

Art. 1352. Contracts without cause, or with unlawful cause, produce no effect whatever. The cause is unlawful if it
is contrary to law, morals, good customs, public order or public policy. (1275a)

Art. 1353. The statement of a false cause in contracts shall render them void, if it should not be proved that they
were founded upon another cause which is true and lawful. (1276)

Art. 1354. Although the cause is not stated in the contract, it is presumed that it exists and is lawful, unless the
debtor proves the contrary. (1277)

Art. 1355. Except in cases specified by law, lesion or inadequacy of cause shall not invalidate a contract, unless
there has been fraud, mistake or undue influence. (n)

CHAPTER 3
FORM OF CONTRACTS

Art. 1356. Contracts shall be obligatory, in whatever form they may have been entered into, provided all the
essential requisites for their validity are present. However, when the law requires that a contract be in some form
in order that it may be valid or enforceable, or that a contract be proved in a certain way, that requirement is
absolute and indispensable. In such cases, the right of the parties stated in the following article cannot be
exercised. (1278a)

Art. 1357. If the law requires a document or other special form, as in the acts and contracts enumerated in the
following article, the contracting parties may compel each other to observe that form, once the contract has been
perfected. This right may be exercised simultaneously with the action upon the contract. (1279a)

231
Art. 1358. The following must appear in a public document:

(1) Acts and contracts which have for their object the creation, transmission, modification or
extinguishment of real rights over immovable property; sales of real property or of an interest therein a
governed by Articles 1403, No. 2, and 1405;

(2) The cession, repudiation or renunciation of hereditary rights or of those of the conjugal partnership of
gains;

(3) The power to administer property, or any other power which has for its object an act appearing or
which should appear in a public document, or should prejudice a third person;

(4) The cession of actions or rights proceeding from an act appearing in a public document.

All other contracts where the amount involved exceeds five hundred pesos must appear in writing, even a private
one. But sales of goods, chattels or things in action are governed by Articles, 1403, No. 2 and 1405. (1280a)

CHAPTER 4
REFORMATION OF INSTRUMENTS (n)

Art. 1359. When, there having been a meeting of the minds of the parties to a contract, their true intention is not
expressed in the instrument purporting to embody the agreement, by reason of mistake, fraud, inequitable
conduct or accident, one of the parties may ask for the reformation of the instrument to the end that such true
intention may be expressed.

If mistake, fraud, inequitable conduct, or accident has prevented a meeting of the minds of the parties, the proper
remedy is not reformation of the instrument but annulment of the contract.

Art. 1360. The principles of the general law on the reformation of instruments are hereby adopted insofar as they
are not in conflict with the provisions of this Code.

Art. 1361. When a mutual mistake of the parties causes the failure of the instrument to disclose their real
agreement, said instrument may be reformed.

Art. 1362. If one party was mistaken and the other acted fraudulently or inequitably in such a way that the
instrument does not show their true intention, the former may ask for the reformation of the instrument.

Art. 1363. When one party was mistaken and the other knew or believed that the instrument did not state their
real agreement, but concealed that fact from the former, the instrument may be reformed.

Art. 1364. When through the ignorance, lack of skill, negligence or bad faith on the part of the person drafting the
instrument or of the clerk or typist, the instrument does not express the true intention of the parties, the courts
may order that the instrument be reformed.

Art. 1365. If two parties agree upon the mortgage or pledge of real or personal property, but the instrument states
that the property is sold absolutely or with a right of repurchase, reformation of the instrument is proper.

Art. 1366. There shall be no reformation in the following cases:

(1) Simple donations inter vivos wherein no condition is imposed;

231
 (2) Wills;

(3) When the real agreement is void.

Art. 1367. When one of the parties has brought an action to enforce the instrument, he cannot subsequently ask
for its reformation.

Art. 1368. Reformation may be ordered at the instance of either party or his successors in interest, if the mistake
was mutual; otherwise, upon petition of the injured party, or his heirs and assigns.

Art. 1369. The procedure for the reformation of instrument shall be governed by rules of court to be promulgated
by the Supreme Court.

CHAPTER 5
INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACTS

Art. 1370. If the terms of a contract are clear and leave no doubt upon the intention of the contracting parties, the
literal meaning of its stipulations shall control.

If the words appear to be contrary to the evident intention of the parties, the latter shall prevail over the former.
(1281)

Art. 1371. In order to judge the intention of the contracting parties, their contemporaneous and subsequent acts
shall be principally considered. (1282)

Art. 1372. However general the terms of a contract may be, they shall not be understood to comprehend things
that are distinct and cases that are different from those upon which the parties intended to agree. (1283)

Art. 1373. If some stipulation of any contract should admit of several meanings, it shall be understood as bearing
that import which is most adequate to render it effectual. (1284)

Art. 1374. The various stipulations of a contract shall be interpreted together, attributing to the doubtful ones that
sense which may result from all of them taken jointly. (1285)

Art. 1375. Words which may have different significations shall be understood in that which is most in keeping with
the nature and object of the contract. (1286)

Art. 1376. The usage or custom of the place shall be borne in mind in the interpretation of the ambiguities of a
contract, and shall fill the omission of stipulations which are ordinarily established. (1287)

Art. 1377. The interpretation of obscure words or stipulations in a contract shall not favor the party who caused the
obscurity. (1288)

Art. 1378. When it is absolutely impossible to settle doubts by the rules established in the preceding articles, and
the doubts refer to incidental circumstances of a gratuitous contract, the least transmission of rights and interests
shall prevail. If the contract is onerous, the doubt shall be settled in favor of the greatest reciprocity of interests.

231
If the doubts are cast upon the principal object of the contract in such a way that it cannot be known what may
have been the intention or will of the parties, the contract shall be null and void. (1289)

Art. 1379. The principles of interpretation stated in Rule 123 of the Rules of Court shall likewise be observed in the
construction of contracts. (n)

CHAPTER 6
RESCISSIBLE CONTRACTS

Art. 1380. Contracts validly agreed upon may be rescinded in the cases established by law. (1290)

Art. 1381. The following contracts are rescissible:

(1) Those which are entered into by guardians whenever the wards whom they represent suffer lesion by
more than one-fourth of the value of the things which are the object thereof;

(2) Those agreed upon in representation of absentees, if the latter suffer the lesion stated in the preceding
number;

(3) Those undertaken in fraud of creditors when the latter cannot in any other manner collect the claims
due them;

(4) Those which refer to things under litigation if they have been entered into by the defendant without
the knowledge and approval of the litigants or of competent judicial authority;

(5) All other contracts specially declared by law to be subject to rescission. (1291a)

Art. 1382. Payments made in a state of insolvency for obligations to whose fulfillment the debtor could not be
compelled at the time they were effected, are also rescissible. (1292)

Art. 1383. The action for rescission is subsidiary; it cannot be instituted except when the party suffering damage
has no other legal means to obtain reparation for the same. (1294)

Art. 1384. Rescission shall be only to the extent necessary to cover the damages caused. (n)

Art. 1385. Rescission creates the obligation to return the things which were the object of the contract, together
with their fruits, and the price with its interest; consequently, it can be carried out only when he who demands
rescission can return whatever he may be obliged to restore.

Neither shall rescission take place when the things which are the object of the contract are legally in the possession
of third persons who did not act in bad faith.

In this case, indemnity for damages may be demanded from the person causing the loss. (1295)

Art. 1386. Rescission referred to in Nos. 1 and 2 of Article 1381 shall not take place with respect to contracts
approved by the courts. (1296a)

Art. 1387. All contracts by virtue of which the debtor alienates property by gratuitous title are presumed to have
been entered into in fraud of creditors, when the donor did not reserve sufficient property to pay all debts
contracted before the donation.

231
Alienations by onerous title are also presumed fraudulent when made by persons against whom some judgment
has been issued. The decision or attachment need not refer to the property alienated, and need not have been
obtained by the party seeking the rescission.

In addition to these presumptions, the design to defraud creditors may be proved in any other manner recognized
by the law of evidence. (1297a)

Art. 1388. Whoever acquires in bad faith the things alienated in fraud of creditors, shall indemnify the latter for
damages suffered by them on account of the alienation, whenever, due to any cause, it should be impossible for
him to return them.

If there are two or more alienations, the first acquirer shall be liable first, and so on successively. (1298a)

Art. 1389. The action to claim rescission must be commenced within four years.

For persons under guardianship and for absentees, the period of four years shall not begin until the termination of
the former's incapacity, or until the domicile of the latter is known. (1299)

CHAPTER 7
VOIDABLE CONTRACTS

Art. 1390. The following contracts are voidable or annullable, even though there may have been no damage to the
contracting parties:
(1) Those where one of the parties is incapable of giving consent to a contract;

(2) Those where the consent is vitiated by mistake, violence, intimidation, undue influence or fraud.

These contracts are binding, unless they are annulled by a proper action in court. They are susceptible of
ratification. (n)

Art. 1391. The action for annulment shall be brought within four years.

This period shall begin:

In cases of intimidation, violence or undue influence, from the time the defect of the consent ceases.

In case of mistake or fraud, from the time of the discovery of the same.

And when the action refers to contracts entered into by minors or other incapacitated persons, from the time the
guardianship ceases. (1301a)

Art. 1392. Ratification extinguishes the action to annul a voidable contract. (1309a)

Art. 1393. Ratification may be effected expressly or tacitly. It is understood that there is a tacit ratification if, with
knowledge of the reason which renders the contract voidable and such reason having ceased, the person who has a
right to invoke it should execute an act which necessarily implies an intention to waive his right. (1311a)

Art. 1394. Ratification may be effected by the guardian of the incapacitated person. (n)

231
Art. 1395. Ratification does not require the conformity of the contracting party who has no right to bring the action
for annulment. (1312)

Art. 1396. Ratification cleanses the contract from all its defects from the moment it was constituted. (1313)

Art. 1397. The action for the annulment of contracts may be instituted by all who are thereby obliged principally or
subsidiarily. However, persons who are capable cannot allege the incapacity of those with whom they contracted;
nor can those who exerted intimidation, violence, or undue influence, or employed fraud, or caused mistake base
their action upon these flaws of the contract. (1302a)

Art. 1398. An obligation having been annulled, the contracting parties shall restore to each other the things which
have been the subject matter of the contract, with their fruits, and the price with its interest, except in cases
provided by law.

In obligations to render service, the value thereof shall be the basis for damages. (1303a)

Art. 1399. When the defect of the contract consists in the incapacity of one of the parties, the incapacitated person
is not obliged to make any restitution except insofar as he has been benefited by the thing or price received by him.
(1304)

Art. 1400. Whenever the person obliged by the decree of annulment to return the thing can not do so because it
has been lost through his fault, he shall return the fruits received and the value of the thing at the time of the loss,
with interest from the same date. (1307a)

Art. 1401. The action for annulment of contracts shall be extinguished when the thing which is the object thereof is
lost through the fraud or fault of the person who has a right to institute the proceedings.

If the right of action is based upon the incapacity of any one of the contracting parties, the loss of the thing shall
not be an obstacle to the success of the action, unless said loss took place through the fraud or fault of the plaintiff.
(1314a)

Art. 1402. As long as one of the contracting parties does not restore what in virtue of the decree of annulment he is
bound to return, the other cannot be compelled to comply with what is incumbent upon him. (1308)

CHAPTER 8
UNENFORCEABLE CONTRACTS (n)

Art. 1403. The following contracts are unenforceable, unless they are ratified:
(1) Those entered into in the name of another person by one who has been given no authority or legal
representation, or who has acted beyond his powers;

(2) Those that do not comply with the Statute of Frauds as set forth in this number. In the following cases
an agreement hereafter made shall be unenforceable by action, unless the same, or some note or
memorandum, thereof, be in writing, and subscribed by the party charged, or by his agent; evidence,
therefore, of the agreement cannot be received without the writing, or a secondary evidence of its
contents:

(a) An agreement that by its terms is not to be performed within a year from the making thereof;

231
 (b) A special promise to answer for the debt, default, or miscarriage of another;

(c) An agreement made in consideration of marriage, other than a mutual promise to marry;

(d) An agreement for the sale of goods, chattels or things in action, at a price not less than five
hundred pesos, unless the buyer accept and receive part of such goods and chattels, or the
evidences, or some of them, of such things in action or pay at the time some part of the purchase
money; but when a sale is made by auction and entry is made by the auctioneer in his sales book,
at the time of the sale, of the amount and kind of property sold, terms of sale, price, names of
the purchasers and person on whose account the sale is made, it is a sufficient memorandum;

(e) An agreement of the leasing for a longer period than one year, or for the sale of real property
or of an interest therein;

(f) A representation as to the credit of a third person.

(3) Those where both parties are incapable of giving consent to a contract.
Art. 1404. Unauthorized contracts are governed by Article 1317 and the principles of agency in Title X of this Book.

Art. 1405. Contracts infringing the Statute of Frauds, referred to in No. 2 of Article 1403, are ratified by the failure
to object to the presentation of oral evidence to prove the same, or by the acceptance of benefit under them.

Art. 1406. When a contract is enforceable under the Statute of Frauds, and a public document is necessary for its
registration in the Registry of Deeds, the parties may avail themselves of the right under Article 1357.

Art. 1407. In a contract where both parties are incapable of giving consent, express or implied ratification by the
parent, or guardian, as the case may be, of one of the contracting parties shall give the contract the same effect as
if only one of them were incapacitated.

If ratification is made by the parents or guardians, as the case may be, of both contracting parties, the contract shall
be validated from the inception.

Art. 1408. Unenforceable contracts cannot be assailed by third persons.

CHAPTER 9
VOID AND INEXISTENT CONTRACTS

Art. 1409. The following contracts are inexistent and void from the beginning:
(1) Those whose cause, object or purpose is contrary to law, morals, good customs, public order or public
policy;

(2) Those which are absolutely simulated or fictitious;

(3) Those whose cause or object did not exist at the time of the transaction;

(4) Those whose object is outside the commerce of men;

(5) Those which contemplate an impossible service;

231
 (6) Those where the intention of the parties relative to the principal object of the contract cannot be
ascertained;

(7) Those expressly prohibited or declared void by law.

These contracts cannot be ratified. Neither can the right to set up the defense of illegality be waived.

Art. 1410. The action or defense for the declaration of the inexistence of a contract does not prescribe.

Art. 1411. When the nullity proceeds from the illegality of the cause or object of the contract, and the act
constitutes a criminal offense, both parties being in pari delicto, they shall have no action against each other, and
both shall be prosecuted. Moreover, the provisions of the Penal Code relative to the disposal of effects or
instruments of a crime shall be applicable to the things or the price of the contract.

This rule shall be applicable when only one of the parties is guilty; but the innocent one may claim what he has
given, and shall not be bound to comply with his promise. (1305)

Art. 1412. If the act in which the unlawful or forbidden cause consists does not constitute a criminal offense, the
following rules shall be observed:

(1) When the fault is on the part of both contracting parties, neither may recover what he has given by
virtue of the contract, or demand the performance of the other's undertaking;

(2) When only one of the contracting parties is at fault, he cannot recover what he has given by reason of
the contract, or ask for the fulfillment of what has been promised him. The other, who is not at fault, may
demand the return of what he has given without any obligation to comply his promise. (1306)

Art. 1413. Interest paid in excess of the interest allowed by the usury laws may be recovered by the debtor, with
interest thereon from the date of the payment.

Art. 1414. When money is paid or property delivered for an illegal purpose, the contract may be repudiated by one
of the parties before the purpose has been accomplished, or before any damage has been caused to a third person.
In such case, the courts may, if the public interest will thus be subserved, allow the party repudiating the contract
to recover the money or property.

Art. 1415. Where one of the parties to an illegal contract is incapable of giving consent, the courts may, if the
interest of justice so demands allow recovery of money or property delivered by the incapacitated person.

Art. 1416. When the agreement is not illegal per se but is merely prohibited, and the prohibition by the law is
designated for the protection of the plaintiff, he may, if public policy is thereby enhanced, recover what he has paid
or delivered.

Art. 1417. When the price of any article or commodity is determined by statute, or by authority of law, any person
paying any amount in excess of the maximum price allowed may recover such excess.

Art. 1418. When the law fixes, or authorizes the fixing of the maximum number of hours of labor, and a contract is
entered into whereby a laborer undertakes to work longer than the maximum thus fixed, he may demand
additional compensation for service rendered beyond the time limit.

231
Art. 1419. When the law sets, or authorizes the setting of a minimum wage for laborers, and a contract is agreed
upon by which a laborer accepts a lower wage, he shall be entitled to recover the deficiency.

Art. 1420. In case of a divisible contract, if the illegal terms can be separated from the legal ones, the latter may be
enforced.

Art. 1421. The defense of illegality of contract is not available to third persons whose interests are not directly
affected.

Art. 1422. A contract which is the direct result of a previous illegal contract, is also void and inexistent.

Title III. - NATURAL OBLIGATIONS

Art. 1423. Obligations are civil or natural. Civil obligations give a right of action to compel their performance.
Natural obligations, not being based on positive law but on equity and natural law, do not grant a right of action to
enforce their performance, but after voluntary fulfillment by the obligor, they authorize the retention of what has
been delivered or rendered by reason thereof. Some natural obligations are set forth in the following articles.

Art. 1424. When a right to sue upon a civil obligation has lapsed by extinctive prescription, the obligor who
voluntarily performs the contract cannot recover what he has delivered or the value of the service he has rendered.

Art. 1425. When without the knowledge or against the will of the debtor, a third person pays a debt which the
obligor is not legally bound to pay because the action thereon has prescribed, but the debtor later voluntarily
reimburses the third person, the obligor cannot recover what he has paid.

Art. 1426. When a minor between eighteen and twenty-one years of age who has entered into a contract without
the consent of the parent or guardian, after the annulment of the contract voluntarily returns the whole thing or
price received, notwithstanding the fact the he has not been benefited thereby, there is no right to demand the
thing or price thus returned.

Art. 1427. When a minor between eighteen and twenty-one years of age, who has entered into a contract without
the consent of the parent or guardian, voluntarily pays a sum of money or delivers a fungible thing in fulfillment of
the obligation, there shall be no right to recover the same from the obligee who has spent or consumed it in good
faith. (1160A)

Art. 1428. When, after an action to enforce a civil obligation has failed the defendant voluntarily performs the
obligation, he cannot demand the return of what he has delivered or the payment of the value of the service he
has rendered.

Art. 1429. When a testate or intestate heir voluntarily pays a debt of the decedent exceeding the value of the
property which he received by will or by the law of intestacy from the estate of the deceased, the payment is valid
and cannot be rescinded by the payer.

Art. 1430. When a will is declared void because it has not been executed in accordance with the formalities
required by law, but one of the intestate heirs, after the settlement of the debts of the deceased, pays a legacy in
compliance with a clause in the defective will, the payment is effective and irrevocable.

231
 Title IV. - ESTOPPEL (n)

Art. 1431. Through estoppel an admission or representation is rendered conclusive upon the person making it, and
cannot be denied or disproved as against the person relying thereon.

Art. 1432. The principles of estoppel are hereby adopted insofar as they are not in conflict with the provisions of
this Code, the Code of Commerce, the Rules of Court and special laws.

Art. 1433. Estoppel may be in pais or by deed.

Art. 1434. When a person who is not the owner of a thing sells or alienates and delivers it, and later the seller or
grantor acquires title thereto, such title passes by operation of law to the buyer or grantee.

Art. 1435. If a person in representation of another sells or alienates a thing, the former cannot subsequently set up
his own title as against the buyer or grantee.

Art. 1436. A lessee or a bailee is estopped from asserting title to the thing leased or received, as against the lessor
or bailor.

Art. 1437. When in a contract between third persons concerning immovable property, one of them is misled by a
person with respect to the ownership or real right over the real estate, the latter is precluded from asserting his
legal title or interest therein, provided all these requisites are present:

(1) There must be fraudulent representation or wrongful concealment of facts known to the party
estopped;

(2) The party precluded must intend that the other should act upon the facts as misrepresented;

(3) The party misled must have been unaware of the true facts; and

(4) The party defrauded must have acted in accordance with the misrepresentation.

Art. 1438. One who has allowed another to assume apparent ownership of personal property for the purpose of
making any transfer of it, cannot, if he received the sum for which a pledge has been constituted, set up his own
title to defeat the pledge of the property, made by the other to a pledgee who received the same in good faith and
for value.

Art. 1439. Estoppel is effective only as between the parties thereto or their successors in interest.

Title V. - TRUSTS (n)

CHAPTER 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS

Art. 1440. A person who establishes a trust is called the trustor; one in whom confidence is reposed as regards
property for the benefit of another person is known as the trustee; and the person for whose benefit the trust has
been created is referred to as the beneficiary.

231
Art. 1441. Trusts are either express or implied. Express trusts are created by the intention of the trustor or of the
parties. Implied trusts come into being by operation of law.

Art. 1442. The principles of the general law of trusts, insofar as they are not in conflict with this Code, the Code of
Commerce, the Rules of Court and special laws are hereby adopted.

CHAPTER 2
EXPRESS TRUSTS

Art. 1443. No express trusts concerning an immovable or any interest therein may be proved by parol evidence.

Art. 1444. No particular words are required for the creation of an express trust, it being sufficient that a trust is
clearly intended.

Art. 1445. No trust shall fail because the trustee appointed declines the designation, unless the contrary should
appear in the instrument constituting the trust.

Art. 1446. Acceptance by the beneficiary is necessary. Nevertheless, if the trust imposes no onerous condition upon
the beneficiary, his acceptance shall be presumed, if there is no proof to the contrary.

CHAPTER 3
IMPLIED TRUSTS

Art. 1447. The enumeration of the following cases of implied trust does not exclude others established by the
general law of trust, but the limitation laid down in Article 1442 shall be applicable.

Art. 1448. There is an implied trust when property is sold, and the legal estate is granted to one party but the price
is paid by another for the purpose of having the beneficial interest of the property. The former is the trustee, while
the latter is the beneficiary. However, if the person to whom the title is conveyed is a child, legitimate or
illegitimate, of the one paying the price of the sale, no trust is implied by law, it being disputably presumed that
there is a gift in favor of the child.

Art. 1449. There is also an implied trust when a donation is made to a person but it appears that although the legal
estate is transmitted to the donee, he nevertheless is either to have no beneficial interest or only a part thereof.

Art. 1450. If the price of a sale of property is loaned or paid by one person for the benefit of another and the
conveyance is made to the lender or payor to secure the payment of the debt, a trust arises by operation of law in
favor of the person to whom the money is loaned or for whom its is paid. The latter may redeem the property and
compel a conveyance thereof to him.

Art. 1451. When land passes by succession to any person and he causes the legal title to be put in the name of
another, a trust is established by implication of law for the benefit of the true owner.

Art. 1452. If two or more persons agree to purchase property and by common consent the legal title is taken in the
name of one of them for the benefit of all, a trust is created by force of law in favor of the others in proportion to
the interest of each.

Art. 1453. When property is conveyed to a person in reliance upon his declared intention to hold it for, or transfer it
to another or the grantor, there is an implied trust in favor of the person whose benefit is contemplated.

231
Art. 1454. If an absolute conveyance of property is made in order to secure the performance of an obligation of the
grantor toward the grantee, a trust by virtue of law is established. If the fulfillment of the obligation is offered by
the grantor when it becomes due, he may demand the reconveyance of the property to him.

Art. 1455. When any trustee, guardian or other person holding a fiduciary relationship uses trust funds for the
purchase of property and causes the conveyance to be made to him or to a third person, a trust is established by
operation of law in favor of the person to whom the funds belong.

Art. 1456. If property is acquired through mistake or fraud, the person obtaining it is, by force of law, considered a
trustee of an implied trust for the benefit of the person from whom the property comes.

Art. 1457. An implied trust may be proved by oral evidence.

Title VI. - SALES

CHAPTER 1
NATURE AND FORM OF THE CONTRACT

Art. 1458. By the contract of sale one of the contracting parties obligates himself to transfer the ownership and to
deliver a determinate thing, and the other to pay therefor a price certain in money or its equivalent.

A contract of sale may be absolute or conditional. (1445a)

Art. 1459. The thing must be licit and the vendor must have a right to transfer the ownership thereof at the time it
is delivered. (n)

Art. 1460. A thing is determinate when it is particularly designated or physical segregated from all other of the
same class.

The requisite that a thing be determinate is satisfied if at the time the contract is entered into, the thing is capable
of being made determinate without the necessity of a new or further agreement between the parties. (n)

Art. 1461. Things having a potential existence may be the object of the contract of sale.

The efficacy of the sale of a mere hope or expectancy is deemed subject to the condition that the thing will come
into existence.

The sale of a vain hope or expectancy is void. (n)

Art. 1462. The goods which form the subject of a contract of sale may be either existing goods, owned or possessed
by the seller, or goods to be manufactured, raised, or acquired by the seller after the perfection of the contract of
sale, in this Title called "future goods."

There may be a contract of sale of goods, whose acquisition by the seller depends upon a contingency which may
or may not happen. (n)

Art. 1463. The sole owner of a thing may sell an undivided interest therein. (n)

Art. 1464. In the case of fungible goods, there may be a sale of an undivided share of a specific mass, though the
seller purports to sell and the buyer to buy a definite number, weight or measure of the goods in the mass, and

231
though the number, weight or measure of the goods in the mass is undetermined. By such a sale the buyer
becomes owner in common of such a share of the mass as the number, weight or measure bought bears to the
number, weight or measure of the mass. If the mass contains less than the number, weight or measure bought, the
buyer becomes the owner of the whole mass and the seller is bound to make good the deficiency from goods of
the same kind and quality, unless a contrary intent appears. (n)

Art. 1465. Things subject to a resolutory condition may be the object of the contract of sale. (n)

Art. 1466. In construing a contract containing provisions characteristic of both the contract of sale and of the
contract of agency to sell, the essential clauses of the whole instrument shall be considered. (n)

Art. 1467. A contract for the delivery at a certain price of an article which the vendor in the ordinary course of his
business manufactures or procures for the general market, whether the same is on hand at the time or not, is a
contract of sale, but if the goods are to be manufactured specially for the customer and upon his special order, and
not for the general market, it is a contract for a piece of work. (n)

Art. 1468. If the consideration of the contract consists partly in money, and partly in another thing, the transaction
shall be characterized by the manifest intention of the parties. If such intention does not clearly appear, it shall be
considered a barter if the value of the thing given as a part of the consideration exceeds the amount of the money
or its equivalent; otherwise, it is a sale. (1446a)

Art. 1469. In order that the price may be considered certain, it shall be sufficient that it be so with reference to
another thing certain, or that the determination thereof be left to the judgment of a special person or persons.

Should such person or persons be unable or unwilling to fix it, the contract shall be inefficacious, unless the parties
subsequently agree upon the price.

If the third person or persons acted in bad faith or by mistake, the courts may fix the price.

Where such third person or persons are prevented from fixing the price or terms by fault of the seller or the buyer,
the party not in fault may have such remedies against the party in fault as are allowed the seller or the buyer, as
the case may be. (1447a)

Art. 1470. Gross inadequacy of price does not affect a contract of sale, except as it may indicate a defect in the
consent, or that the parties really intended a donation or some other act or contract. (n)

Art. 1471. If the price is simulated, the sale is void, but the act may be shown to have been in reality a donation, or
some other act or contract. (n)

Art. 1472. The price of securities, grain, liquids, and other things shall also be considered certain, when the price
fixed is that which the thing sold would have on a definite day, or in a particular exchange or market, or when an
amount is fixed above or below the price on such day, or in such exchange or market, provided said amount be
certain. (1448)

Art. 1473. The fixing of the price can never be left to the discretion of one of the contracting parties. However, if
the price fixed by one of the parties is accepted by the other, the sale is perfected. (1449a)

Art. 1474. Where the price cannot be determined in accordance with the preceding articles, or in any other
manner, the contract is inefficacious. However, if the thing or any part thereof has been delivered to and
appropriated by the buyer he must pay a reasonable price therefor. What is a reasonable price is a question of fact
dependent on the circumstances of each particular case. (n)

231
Art. 1475. The contract of sale is perfected at the moment there is a meeting of minds upon the thing which is the
object of the contract and upon the price.

From that moment, the parties may reciprocally demand performance, subject to the provisions of the law
governing the form of contracts. (1450a)

Art. 1476. In the case of a sale by auction:

(1) Where goods are put up for sale by auction in lots, each lot is the subject of a separate contract of sale.

(2) A sale by auction is perfected when the auctioneer announces its perfection by the fall of the hammer,
or in other customary manner. Until such announcement is made, any bidder may retract his bid; and the
auctioneer may withdraw the goods from the sale unless the auction has been announced to be without
reserve.

(3) A right to bid may be reserved expressly by or on behalf of the seller, unless otherwise provided by law
or by stipulation.

(4) Where notice has not been given that a sale by auction is subject to a right to bid on behalf of the
seller, it shall not be lawful for the seller to bid himself or to employ or induce any person to bid at such
sale on his behalf or for the auctioneer, to employ or induce any person to bid at such sale on behalf of the
seller or knowingly to take any bid from the seller or any person employed by him. Any sale contravening
this rule may be treated as fraudulent by the buyer. (n)

Art. 1477. The ownership of the thing sold shall be transferred to the vendee upon the actual or constructive
delivery thereof. (n)

Art. 1478. The parties may stipulate that ownership in the thing shall not pass to the purchaser until he has fully
paid the price. (n)

Art. 1479. A promise to buy and sell a determinate thing for a price certain is reciprocally demandable.

An accepted unilateral promise to buy or to sell a determinate thing for a price certain is binding upon the
promissor if the promise is supported by a consideration distinct from the price. (1451a)

Art. 1480. Any injury to or benefit from the thing sold, after the contract has been perfected, from the moment of
the perfection of the contract to the time of delivery, shall be governed by Articles 1163 to 1165, and 1262.

This rule shall apply to the sale of fungible things, made independently and for a single price, or without
consideration of their weight, number, or measure.

Should fungible things be sold for a price fixed according to weight, number, or measure, the risk shall not be
imputed to the vendee until they have been weighed, counted, or measured and delivered, unless the latter has
incurred in delay. (1452a)

Art. 1481. In the contract of sale of goods by description or by sample, the contract may be rescinded if the bulk of
the goods delivered do not correspond with the description or the sample, and if the contract be by sample as well
as description, it is not sufficient that the bulk of goods correspond with the sample if they do not also correspond
with the description.

231
The buyer shall have a reasonable opportunity of comparing the bulk with the description or the sample. (n)

Art. 1482. Whenever earnest money is given in a contract of sale, it shall be considered as part of the price and as
proof of the perfection of the contract. (1454a)

Art. 1483. Subject to the provisions of the Statute of Frauds and of any other applicable statute, a contract of sale
may be made in writing, or by word of mouth, or partly in writing and partly by word of mouth, or may be inferred
from the conduct of the parties. (n)

Art. 1484. In a contract of sale of personal property the price of which is payable in installments, the vendor may
exercise any of the following remedies:

(1) Exact fulfillment of the obligation, should the vendee fail to pay;

(2) Cancel the sale, should the vendee's failure to pay cover two or more installments;

(3) Foreclose the chattel mortgage on the thing sold, if one has been constituted, should the vendee's
failure to pay cover two or more installments. In this case, he shall have no further action against the
purchaser to recover any unpaid balance of the price. Any agreement to the contrary shall be void. (1454-
A-a)

Art. 1485. The preceding article shall be applied to contracts purporting to be leases of personal property with
option to buy, when the lessor has deprived the lessee of the possession or enjoyment of the thing. (1454-A-a)

Art. 1486. In the case referred to in two preceding articles, a stipulation that the installments or rents paid shall not
be returned to the vendee or lessee shall be valid insofar as the same may not be unconscionable under the
circumstances. (n)

Art. 1487. The expenses for the execution and registration of the sale shall be borne by the vendor, unless there is a
stipulation to the contrary. (1455a)

Art. 1488. The expropriation of property for public use is governed by special laws. (1456)

CHAPTER 2
CAPACITY TO BUY OR SELL

Art. 1489. All persons who are authorized in this Code to obligate themselves, may enter into a contract of sale,
saving the modifications contained in the following articles.

Where necessaries are those sold and delivered to a minor or other person without capacity to act, he must pay a
reasonable price therefor. Necessaries are those referred to in Article 290. (1457a)

Art. 1490. The husband and the wife cannot sell property to each other, except:

(1) When a separation of property was agreed upon in the marriage settlements; or

(2) When there has been a judicial separation or property under Article 191. (1458a)

231
Art. 1491. The following persons cannot acquire by purchase, even at a public or judicial auction, either in person
or through the mediation of another:
(1) The guardian, the property of the person or persons who may be under his guardianship;

(2) Agents, the property whose administration or sale may have been entrusted to them, unless the
consent of the principal has been given;

(3) Executors and administrators, the property of the estate under administration;

(4) Public officers and employees, the property of the State or of any subdivision thereof, or of any
government-owned or controlled corporation, or institution, the administration of which has been
intrusted to them; this provision shall apply to judges and government experts who, in any manner
whatsoever, take part in the sale;

(5) Justices, judges, prosecuting attorneys, clerks of superior and inferior courts, and other officers and
employees connected with the administration of justice, the property and rights in litigation or levied
upon an execution before the court within whose jurisdiction or territory they exercise their respective
functions; this prohibition includes the act of acquiring by assignment and shall apply to lawyers, with
respect to the property and rights which may be the object of any litigation in which they may take part by
virtue of their profession.

(6) Any others specially disqualified by law. (1459a)

Art. 1492. The prohibitions in the two preceding articles are applicable to sales in legal redemption, compromises
and renunciations. (n)
CHAPTER 3
EFFECTS OF THE CONTRACT
WHEN THE THING SOLD HAS BEEN LOST

Art. 1493. If at the time the contract of sale is perfected, the thing which is the object of the contract has been
entirely lost, the contract shall be without any effect.

But if the thing should have been lost in part only, the vendee may choose between withdrawing from the contract
and demanding the remaining part, paying its price in proportion to the total sum agreed upon. (1460a)

Art. 1494. Where the parties purport a sale of specific goods, and the goods without the knowledge of the seller
have perished in part or have wholly or in a material part so deteriorated in quality as to be substantially changed
in character, the buyer may at his option treat the sale:

(1) As avoided; or

(2) As valid in all of the existing goods or in so much thereof as have not deteriorated, and as binding the
buyer to pay the agreed price for the goods in which the ownership will pass, if the sale was divisible. (n)

231
 CHAPTER 4
OBLIGATIONS OF THE VENDOR

SECTION 1. - General Provisions

Art. 1495. The vendor is bound to transfer the ownership of and deliver, as well as warrant the thing which is the
object of the sale. (1461a)

Art. 1496. The ownership of the thing sold is acquired by the vendee from the moment it is delivered to him in any
of the ways specified in Articles 1497 to 1501, or in any other manner signifying an agreement that the possession
is transferred from the vendor to the vendee. (n)

SECTION 2. - Delivery of the Thing Sold

Art. 1497. The thing sold shall be understood as delivered, when it is placed in the control and possession of the
vendee. (1462a)

Art. 1498. When the sale is made through a public instrument, the execution thereof shall be equivalent to the
delivery of the thing which is the object of the contract, if from the deed the contrary does not appear or cannot
clearly be inferred.

With regard to movable property, its delivery may also be made by the delivery of the keys of the place or
depository where it is stored or kept. (1463a)

Art. 1499. The delivery of movable property may likewise be made by the mere consent or agreement of the
contracting parties, if the thing sold cannot be transferred to the possession of the vendee at the time of the sale,
or if the latter already had it in his possession for any other reason. (1463a)

Art. 1500. There may also be tradition constitutum possessorium. (n)

Art. 1501. With respect to incorporeal property, the provisions of the first paragraph of article 1498 shall govern. In
any other case wherein said provisions are not applicable, the placing of the titles of ownership in the possession of
the vendee or the use by the vendee of his rights, with the vendor's consent, shall be understood as a delivery.
(1464)

Art. 1502. When goods are delivered to the buyer "on sale or return" to give the buyer an option to return the
goods instead of paying the price, the ownership passes to the buyer of delivery, but he may revest the ownership
in the seller by returning or tendering the goods within the time fixed in the contract, or, if no time has been fixed,
within a reasonable time. (n)

When goods are delivered to the buyer on approval or on trial or on satisfaction, or other similar terms, the
ownership therein passes to the buyer:

(1) When he signifies his approval or acceptance to the seller or does any other act adopting the
transaction;

(2) If he does not signify his approval or acceptance to the seller, but retains the goods without giving
notice of rejection, then if a time has been fixed for the return of the goods, on the expiration of such

231
 time, and, if no time has been fixed, on the expiration of a reasonable time. What is a reasonable time is a
question of fact. (n)

Art. 1503. When there is a contract of sale of specific goods, the seller may, by the terms of the contract, reserve
the right of possession or ownership in the goods until certain conditions have been fulfilled. The right of
possession or ownership may be thus reserved notwithstanding the delivery of the goods to the buyer or to a
carrier or other bailee for the purpose of transmission to the buyer.

Where goods are shipped, and by the bill of lading the goods are deliverable to the seller or his agent, or to the
order of the seller or of his agent, the seller thereby reserves the ownership in the goods. But, if except for the
form of the bill of lading, the ownership would have passed to the buyer on shipment of the goods, the seller's
property in the goods shall be deemed to be only for the purpose of securing performance by the buyer of his
obligations under the contract.

Where goods are shipped, and by the bill of lading the goods are deliverable to order of the buyer or of his agent,
but possession of the bill of lading is retained by the seller or his agent, the seller thereby reserves a right to the
possession of the goods as against the buyer.

Where the seller of goods draws on the buyer for the price and transmits the bill of exchange and bill of lading
together to the buyer to secure acceptance or payment of the bill of exchange, the buyer is bound to return the bill
of lading if he does not honor the bill of exchange, and if he wrongfully retains the bill of lading he acquires no
added right thereby. If, however, the bill of lading provides that the goods are deliverable to the buyer or to the
order of the buyer, or is indorsed in blank, or to the buyer by the consignee named therein, one who purchases in
good faith, for value, the bill of lading, or goods from the buyer will obtain the ownership in the goods, although
the bill of exchange has not been honored, provided that such purchaser has received delivery of the bill of lading
indorsed by the consignee named therein, or of the goods, without notice of the facts making the transfer
wrongful. (n)

Art. 1504. Unless otherwise agreed, the goods remain at the seller's risk until the ownership therein is transferred
to the buyer, but when the ownership therein is transferred to the buyer the goods are at the buyer's risk whether
actual delivery has been made or not, except that:

(1) Where delivery of the goods has been made to the buyer or to a bailee for the buyer, in pursuance of
the contract and the ownership in the goods has been retained by the seller merely to secure performance
by the buyer of his obligations under the contract, the goods are at the buyer's risk from the time of such
delivery;

(2) Where actual delivery has been delayed through the fault of either the buyer or seller the goods are at
the risk of the party in fault. (n)

Art. 1505. Subject to the provisions of this Title, where goods are sold by a person who is not the owner thereof,
and who does not sell them under authority or with the consent of the owner, the buyer acquires no better title to
the goods than the seller had, unless the owner of the goods is by his conduct precluded from denying the seller's
authority to sell.

Nothing in this Title, however, shall affect:

(1) The provisions of any factors' act, recording laws, or any other provision of law enabling the apparent
owner of goods to dispose of them as if he were the true owner thereof;

231
 (2) The validity of any contract of sale under statutory power of sale or under the order of a court of
competent jurisdiction;

(3) Purchases made in a merchant's store, or in fairs, or markets, in accordance with the Code of
Commerce and special laws. (n)

Art. 1506. Where the seller of goods has a voidable title thereto, but his title has not been avoided at the time of
the sale, the buyer acquires a good title to the goods, provided he buys them in good faith, for value, and without
notice of the seller's defect of title. (n)

Art. 1507. A document of title in which it is stated that the goods referred to therein will be delivered to the bearer,
or to the order of any person named in such document is a negotiable document of title. (n)

Art. 1508. A negotiable document of title may be negotiated by delivery:

(1) Where by the terms of the document the carrier, warehouseman or other bailee issuing the same
undertakes to deliver the goods to the bearer; or

(2) Where by the terms of the document the carrier, warehouseman or other bailee issuing the same
undertakes to deliver the goods to the order of a specified person, and such person or a subsequent
endorsee of the document has indorsed it in blank or to the bearer.

Where by the terms of a negotiable document of title the goods are deliverable to bearer or where a negotiable
document of title has been indorsed in blank or to bearer, any holder may indorse the same to himself or to any
specified person, and in such case the document shall thereafter be negotiated only by the endorsement of such
endorsee. (n)

Art. 1509. A negotiable document of title may be negotiated by the endorsement of the person to whose order the
goods are by the terms of the document deliverable. Such endorsement may be in blank, to bearer or to a specified
person. If indorsed to a specified person, it may be again negotiated by the endorsement of such person in blank,
to bearer or to another specified person. Subsequent negotiations may be made in like manner. (n)

Art. 1510. If a document of title which contains an undertaking by a carrier, warehouseman or other bailee to
deliver the goods to bearer, to a specified person or order of a specified person or which contains words of like
import, has placed upon it the words "not negotiable," "non-negotiable" or the like, such document may
nevertheless be negotiated by the holder and is a negotiable document of title within the meaning of this Title. But
nothing in this Title contained shall be construed as limiting or defining the effect upon the obligations of the
carrier, warehouseman, or other bailee issuing a document of title or placing thereon the words "not negotiable,"
"non-negotiable," or the like. (n)

Art. 1511. A document of title which is not in such form that it can be negotiated by delivery may be transferred by
the holder by delivery to a purchaser or donee. A non-negotiable document cannot be negotiated and the
endorsement of such a document gives the transferee no additional right. (n)

Art. 1512. A negotiable document of title may be negotiated:

(1) By the owner therefor; or

(2) By any person to whom the possession or custody of the document has been entrusted by the owner,
if, by the terms of the document the bailee issuing the document undertakes to deliver the goods to the

231
 order of the person to whom the possession or custody of the document has been entrusted, or if at the
time of such entrusting the document is in such form that it may be negotiated by delivery. (n)

Art. 1513. A person to whom a negotiable document of title has been duly negotiated acquires thereby:
(1) Such title to the goods as the person negotiating the document to him had or had ability to convey to a
purchaser in good faith for value and also such title to the goods as the person to whose order the goods
were to be delivered by the terms of the document had or had ability to convey to a purchaser in good
faith for value; and

(2) The direct obligation of the bailee issuing the document to hold possession of the goods for him
according to the terms of the document as fully as if such bailee had contracted directly with him. (n)

Art. 1514. A person to whom a document of title has been transferred, but not negotiated, acquires thereby, as
against the transferor, the title to the goods, subject to the terms of any agreement with the transferor.

If the document is non-negotiable, such person also acquires the right to notify the bailee who issued the
document of the transfer thereof, and thereby to acquire the direct obligation of such bailee to hold possession of
the goods for him according to the terms of the document.

Prior to the notification to such bailee by the transferor or transferee of a non-negotiable document of title, the
title of the transferee to the goods and the right to acquire the obligation of such bailee may be defeated by the
levy of an attachment of execution upon the goods by a creditor of the transferor, or by a notification to such bailee
by the transferor or a subsequent purchaser from the transfer of a subsequent sale of the goods by the transferor.
(n)

Art. 1515. Where a negotiable document of title is transferred for value by delivery, and the endorsement of the
transferor is essential for negotiation, the transferee acquires a right against the transferor to compel him to
endorse the document unless a contrary intention appears. The negotiation shall take effect as of the time when
the endorsement is actually made. (n)

Art. 1516. A person who for value negotiates or transfers a document of title by endorsement or delivery, including
one who assigns for value a claim secured by a document of title unless a contrary intention appears, warrants:

(1) That the document is genuine;

(2) That he has a legal right to negotiate or transfer it;

(3) That he has knowledge of no fact which would impair the validity or worth of the document; and

(4) That he has a right to transfer the title to the goods and that the goods are merchantable or fit for a
particular purpose, whenever such warranties would have been implied if the contract of the parties had
been to transfer without a document of title the goods represented thereby. (n)

Art. 1517. The endorsement of a document of title shall not make the endorser liable for any failure on the part of
the bailee who issued the document or previous endorsers thereof to fulfill their respective obligations. (n)

Art. 1518. The validity of the negotiation of a negotiable document of title is not impaired by the fact that the
negotiation was a breach of duty on the part of the person making the negotiation, or by the fact that the owner of
the document was deprived of the possession of the same by loss, theft, fraud, accident, mistake, duress, or
conversion, if the person to whom the document was negotiated or a person to whom the document was

231
subsequently negotiated paid value therefor in good faith without notice of the breach of duty, or loss, theft, fraud,
accident, mistake, duress or conversion. (n)

Art. 1519. If goods are delivered to a bailee by the owner or by a person whose act in conveying the title to them to
a purchaser in good faith for value would bind the owner and a negotiable document of title is issued for them they
cannot thereafter, while in possession of such bailee, be attached by garnishment or otherwise or be levied under
an execution unless the document be first surrendered to the bailee or its negotiation enjoined. The bailee shall in
no case be compelled to deliver up the actual possession of the goods until the document is surrendered to him or
impounded by the court. (n)

Art. 1520. A creditor whose debtor is the owner of a negotiable document of title shall be entitled to such aid from
courts of appropriate jurisdiction by injunction and otherwise in attaching such document or in satisfying the claim
by means thereof as is allowed at law or in equity in regard to property which cannot readily be attached or levied
upon by ordinary legal process. (n)

Art. 1521. Whether it is for the buyer to take possession of the goods or of the seller to send them to the buyer is a
question depending in each case on the contract, express or implied, between the parties. Apart from any such
contract, express or implied, or usage of trade to the contrary, the place of delivery is the seller's place of business
if he has one, and if not his residence; but in case of a contract of sale of specific goods, which to the knowledge of
the parties when the contract or the sale was made were in some other place, then that place is the place of
delivery.

Where by a contract of sale the seller is bound to send the goods to the buyer, but no time for sending them is
fixed, the seller is bound to send them within a reasonable time.

Where the goods at the time of sale are in the possession of a third person, the seller has not fulfilled his obligation
to deliver to the buyer unless and until such third person acknowledges to the buyer that he holds the goods on the
buyer's behalf.

Demand or tender of delivery may be treated as ineffectual unless made at a reasonable hour. What is a reasonable
hour is a question of fact.

Unless otherwise agreed, the expenses of and incidental to putting the goods into a deliverable state must be
borne by the seller. (n)

Art. 1522. Where the seller delivers to the buyer a quantity of goods less than he contracted to sell, the buyer may
reject them, but if the buyer accepts or retains the goods so delivered, knowing that the seller is not going to
perform the contract in full, he must pay for them at the contract rate. If, however, the buyer has used or disposed
of the goods delivered before he knows that the seller is not going to perform his contract in full, the buyer shall
not be liable for more than the fair value to him of the goods so received.

Where the seller delivers to the buyer a quantity of goods larger than he contracted to sell, the buyer may accept
the goods included in the contract and reject the rest. If the buyer accepts the whole of the goods so delivered he
must pay for them at the contract rate.

Where the seller delivers to the buyer the goods he contracted to sell mixed with goods of a different description
not included in the contract, the buyer may accept the goods which are in accordance with the contract and reject
the rest.

In the preceding two paragraphs, if the subject matter is indivisible, the buyer may reject the whole of the goods.

231
The provisions of this article are subject to any usage of trade, special agreement, or course of dealing between the
parties. (n)

Art. 1523. Where, in pursuance of a contract of sale, the seller is authorized or required to send the goods to the
buyer, delivery of the goods to a carrier, whether named by the buyer or not, for the purpose of transmission to the
buyer is deemed to be a delivery of the goods to the buyer, except in the case provided for in Article 1503, first,
second and third paragraphs, or unless a contrary intent appears.

Unless otherwise authorized by the buyer, the seller must make such contract with the carrier on behalf of the
buyer as may be reasonable, having regard to the nature of the goods and the other circumstances of the case. If
the seller omit so to do, and the goods are lost or damaged in course of transit, the buyer may decline to treat the
delivery to the carrier as a delivery to himself, or may hold the seller responsible in damages.

Unless otherwise agreed, where goods are sent by the seller to the buyer under circumstances in which the seller
knows or ought to know that it is usual to insure, the seller must give such notice to the buyer as may enable him
to insure them during their transit, and, if the seller fails to do so, the goods shall be deemed to be at his risk during
such transit. (n)

Art. 1524. The vendor shall not be bound to deliver the thing sold, if the vendee has not paid him the price, or if no
period for the payment has been fixed in the contract. (1466)

Art. 1525. The seller of goods is deemed to be an unpaid seller within the meaning of this Title:

(1) When the whole of the price has not been paid or tendered;

(2) When a bill of exchange or other negotiable instrument has been received as conditional payment, and
the condition on which it was received has been broken by reason of the dishonor of the instrument, the
insolvency of the buyer, or otherwise.

In Articles 1525 to 1535 the term "seller" includes an agent of the seller to whom the bill of lading has been
indorsed, or a consignor or agent who has himself paid, or is directly responsible for the price, or any other person
who is in the position of a seller. (n)

Art. 1526. Subject to the provisions of this Title, notwithstanding that the ownership in the goods may have passed
to the buyer, the unpaid seller of goods, as such, has:

(1) A lien on the goods or right to retain them for the price while he is in possession of them;

(2) In case of the insolvency of the buyer, a right of stopping the goods in transitu after he has parted with
the possession of them;

(3) A right of resale as limited by this Title;

(4) A right to rescind the sale as likewise limited by this Title.

Where the ownership in the goods has not passed to the buyer, the unpaid seller has, in addition to his other
remedies a right of withholding delivery similar to and coextensive with his rights of lien and stoppage in transitu
where the ownership has passed to the buyer. (n)

231
Art. 1527. Subject to the provisions of this Title, the unpaid seller of goods who is in possession of them is entitled
to retain possession of them until payment or tender of the price in the following cases, namely:

(1) Where the goods have been sold without any stipulation as to credit;

(2) Where the goods have been sold on credit, but the term of credit has expired;

(3) Where the buyer becomes insolvent.

The seller may exercise his right of lien notwithstanding that he is in possession of the goods as agent or bailee for
the buyer. (n)

Art. 1528. Where an unpaid seller has made part delivery of the goods, he may exercise his right of lien on the
remainder, unless such part delivery has been made under such circumstances as to show an intent to waive the
lien or right of retention. (n)

Art. 1529. The unpaid seller of goods loses his lien thereon:

(1) When he delivers the goods to a carrier or other bailee for the purpose of transmission to the buyer
without reserving the ownership in the goods or the right to the possession thereof;

(2) When the buyer or his agent lawfully obtains possession of the goods;

(3) By waiver thereof.

The unpaid seller of goods, having a lien thereon, does not lose his lien by reason only that he has obtained
judgment or decree for the price of the goods. (n)

Art. 1530. Subject to the provisions of this Title, when the buyer of goods is or becomes insolvent, the unpaid seller
who has parted with the possession of the goods has the right of stopping them in transitu, that is to say, he may
resume possession of the goods at any time while they are in transit, and he will then become entitled to the same
rights in regard to the goods as he would have had if he had never parted with the possession. (n)

Art. 1531. Goods are in transit within the meaning of the preceding article:

(1) From the time when they are delivered to a carrier by land, water, or air, or other bailee for the
purpose of transmission to the buyer, until the buyer, or his agent in that behalf, takes delivery of them
from such carrier or other bailee;

(2) If the goods are rejected by the buyer, and the carrier or other bailee continues in possession of them,
even if the seller has refused to receive them back.

Goods are no longer in transit within the meaning of the preceding article:
(1) If the buyer, or his agent in that behalf, obtains delivery of the goods before their arrival at the
appointed destination;

(2) If, after the arrival of the goods at the appointed destination, the carrier or other bailee acknowledges
to the buyer or his agent that he holds the goods on his behalf and continues in possession of them as
bailee for the buyer or his agent; and it is immaterial that further destination for the goods may have been
indicated by the buyer;

231
 (3) If the carrier or other bailee wrongfully refuses to deliver the goods to the buyer or his agent in that
behalf.

If the goods are delivered to a ship, freight train, truck, or airplane chartered by the buyer, it is a question
depending on the circumstances of the particular case, whether they are in the possession of the carrier as such or
as agent of the buyer.

If part delivery of the goods has been made to the buyer, or his agent in that behalf, the remainder of the goods
may be stopped in transitu, unless such part delivery has been under such circumstances as to show an agreement
with the buyer to give up possession of the whole of the goods. (n)

Art. 1532. The unpaid seller may exercise his right of stoppage in transitu either by obtaining actual possession of
the goods or by giving notice of his claim to the carrier or other bailee in whose possession the goods are. Such
notice may be given either to the person in actual possession of the goods or to his principal. In the latter case the
notice, to be effectual, must be given at such time and under such circumstances that the principal, by the exercise
of reasonable diligence, may prevent a delivery to the buyer.

When notice of stoppage in transitu is given by the seller to the carrier, or other bailee in possession of the goods,
he must redeliver the goods to, or according to the directions of, the seller. The expenses of such delivery must be
borne by the seller. If, however, a negotiable document of title representing the goods has been issued by the
carrier or other bailee, he shall not obliged to deliver or justified in delivering the goods to the seller unless such
document is first surrendered for cancellation. (n)

Art. 1533. Where the goods are of perishable nature, or where the seller expressly reserves the right of resale in
case the buyer should make default, or where the buyer has been in default in the payment of the price for an
unreasonable time, an unpaid seller having a right of lien or having stopped the goods in transitu may resell the
goods. He shall not thereafter be liable to the original buyer upon the contract of sale or for any profit made by
such resale, but may recover from the buyer damages for any loss occasioned by the breach of the contract of sale.

Where a resale is made, as authorized in this article, the buyer acquires a good title as against the original buyer.

It is not essential to the validity of resale that notice of an intention to resell the goods be given by the seller to the
original buyer. But where the right to resell is not based on the perishable nature of the goods or upon an express
provision of the contract of sale, the giving or failure to give such notice shall be relevant in any issue involving the
question whether the buyer had been in default for an unreasonable time before the resale was made.

It is not essential to the validity of a resale that notice of the time and place of such resale should be given by the
seller to the original buyer.

The seller is bound to exercise reasonable care and judgment in making a resale, and subject to this requirement
may make a resale either by public or private sale. He cannot, however, directly or indirectly buy the goods. (n)

Art. 1534. An unpaid seller having the right of lien or having stopped the goods in transitu, may rescind the transfer
of title and resume the ownership in the goods, where he expressly reserved the right to do so in case the buyer
should make default, or where the buyer has been in default in the payment of the price for an unreasonable time.
The seller shall not thereafter be liable to the buyer upon the contract of sale, but may recover from the buyer
damages for any loss occasioned by the breach of the contract.

The transfer of title shall not be held to have been rescinded by an unpaid seller until he has manifested by notice
to the buyer or by some other overt act an intention to rescind. It is not necessary that such overt act should be
communicated to the buyer, but the giving or failure to give notice to the buyer of the intention to rescind shall be

231
relevant in any issue involving the question whether the buyer had been in default for an unreasonable time before
the right of rescission was asserted. (n)

Art. 1535. Subject to the provisions of this Title, the unpaid seller's right of lien or stoppage in transitu is not
affected by any sale, or other disposition of the goods which the buyer may have made, unless the seller has
assented thereto.

If, however, a negotiable document of title has been issued for goods, no seller's lien or right of stoppage in transitu
shall defeat the right of any purchaser for value in good faith to whom such document has been negotiated,
whether such negotiation be prior or subsequent to the notification to the carrier, or other bailee who issued such
document, of the seller's claim to a lien or right of stoppage in transitu. (n)

Art. 1536. The vendor is not bound to deliver the thing sold in case the vendee should lose the right to make use of
the terms as provided in Article 1198. (1467a)

Art. 1537. The vendor is bound to deliver the thing sold and its accessions and accessories in the condition in which
they were upon the perfection of the contract.

All the fruits shall pertain to the vendee from the day on which the contract was perfected. (1468a)

Art. 1538. In case of loss, deterioration or improvement of the thing before its delivery, the rules in Article 1189
shall be observed, the vendor being considered the debtor. (n)

Art. 1539. The obligation to deliver the thing sold includes that of placing in the control of the vendee all that is
mentioned in the contract, in conformity with the following rules:

If the sale of real estate should be made with a statement of its area, at the rate of a certain price for a unit of
measure or number, the vendor shall be obliged to deliver to the vendee, if the latter should demand it, all that
may have been stated in the contract; but, should this be not possible, the vendee may choose between a
proportional reduction of the price and the rescission of the contract, provided that, in the latter case, the lack in
the area be not less than one-tenth of that stated.

The same shall be done, even when the area is the same, if any part of the immovable is not of the quality specified
in the contract.

The rescission, in this case, shall only take place at the will of the vendee, when the inferior value of the thing sold
exceeds one-tenth of the price agreed upon.

Nevertheless, if the vendee would not have bought the immovable had he known of its smaller area of inferior
quality, he may rescind the sale. (1469a)

Art. 1540. If, in the case of the preceding article, there is a greater area or number in the immovable than that
stated in the contract, the vendee may accept the area included in the contract and reject the rest. If he accepts
the whole area, he must pay for the same at the contract rate. (1470a)

Art. 1541. The provisions of the two preceding articles shall apply to judicial sales. (n)

Art. 1542. In the sale of real estate, made for a lump sum and not at the rate of a certain sum for a unit of measure
or number, there shall be no increase or decrease of the price, although there be a greater or less area or number
than that stated in the contract.

231
The same rule shall be applied when two or more immovable as sold for a single price; but if, besides mentioning
the boundaries, which is indispensable in every conveyance of real estate, its area or number should be designated
in the contract, the vendor shall be bound to deliver all that is included within said boundaries, even when it
exceeds the area or number specified in the contract; and, should he not be able to do so, he shall suffer a
reduction in the price, in proportion to what is lacking in the area or number, unless the contract is rescinded
because the vendee does not accede to the failure to deliver what has been stipulated. (1471)

Art. 1543. The actions arising from Articles 1539 and 1542 shall prescribe in six months, counted from the day of
delivery. (1472a)

Art. 1544. If the same thing should have been sold to different vendees, the ownership shall be transferred to the
person who may have first taken possession thereof in good faith, if it should be movable property.

Should it be immovable property, the ownership shall belong to the person acquiring it who in good faith first
recorded it in the Registry of Property.

Should there be no inscription, the ownership shall pertain to the person who in good faith was first in the
possession; and, in the absence thereof, to the person who presents the oldest title, provided there is good faith.
(1473)

SECTION 3. - Conditions and Warranties

Art. 1545. Where the obligation of either party to a contract of sale is subject to any condition which is not
performed, such party may refuse to proceed with the contract or he may waive performance of the condition. If
the other party has promised that the condition should happen or be performed, such first mentioned party may
also treat the nonperformance of the condition as a breach of warranty.

Where the ownership in the thing has not passed, the buyer may treat the fulfillment by the seller of his obligation
to deliver the same as described and as warranted expressly or by implication in the contract of sale as a condition
of the obligation of the buyer to perform his promise to accept and pay for the thing. (n)

Art. 1546. Any affirmation of fact or any promise by the seller relating to the thing is an express warranty if the
natural tendency of such affirmation or promise is to induce the buyer to purchase the same, and if the buyer
purchase the thing relying thereon. No affirmation of the value of the thing, nor any statement purporting to be a
statement of the seller's opinion only, shall be construed as a warranty, unless the seller made such affirmation or
statement as an expert and it was relied upon by the buyer. (n)

Art. 1547. In a contract of sale, unless a contrary intention appears, there is:

(1) An implied warranty on the part of the seller that he has a right to sell the thing at the time when the
ownership is to pass, and that the buyer shall from that time have and enjoy the legal and peaceful
possession of the thing;

(2) An implied warranty that the thing shall be free from any hidden faults or defects, or any charge or
encumbrance not declared or known to the buyer.

This Article shall not, however, be held to render liable a sheriff, auctioneer, mortgagee, pledgee, or other person
professing to sell by virtue of authority in fact or law, for the sale of a thing in which a third person has a legal or
equitable interest. (n)

231
 SUBSECTION 1. - Warranty in Case of Eviction

Art. 1548. Eviction shall take place whenever by a final judgment based on a right prior to the sale or an act
imputable to the vendor, the vendee is deprived of the whole or of a part of the thing purchased.

The vendor shall answer for the eviction even though nothing has been said in the contract on the subject.

The contracting parties, however, may increase, diminish, or suppress this legal obligation of the vendor. (1475a)

Art. 1549. The vendee need not appeal from the decision in order that the vendor may become liable for eviction.
(n)

Art. 1550. When adverse possession had been commenced before the sale but the prescriptive period is completed
after the transfer, the vendor shall not be liable for eviction. (n)

Art. 1551. If the property is sold for nonpayment of taxes due and not made known to the vendee before the sale,
the vendor is liable for eviction. (n)

Art. 1552. The judgment debtor is also responsible for eviction in judicial sales, unless it is otherwise decreed in the
judgment. (n)

Art. 1553. Any stipulation exempting the vendor from the obligation to answer for eviction shall be void, if he acted
in bad faith. (1476)

Art. 1554. If the vendee has renounced the right to warranty in case of eviction, and eviction should take place, the
vendor shall only pay the value which the thing sold had at the time of the eviction. Should the vendee have made
the waiver with knowledge of the risks of eviction and assumed its consequences, the vendor shall not be liable.
(1477)

Art. 1555. When the warranty has been agreed upon or nothing has been stipulated on this point, in case eviction
occurs, the vendee shall have the right to demand of the vendor:

(1) The return of the value which the thing sold had at the time of the eviction, be it greater or less than
the price of the sale;

(2) The income or fruits, if he has been ordered to deliver them to the party who won the suit against him;

(3) The costs of the suit which caused the eviction, and, in a proper case, those of the suit brought against
the vendor for the warranty;

(4) The expenses of the contract, if the vendee has paid them;

(5) The damages and interests, and ornamental expenses, if the sale was made in bad faith. (1478)

Art. 1556. Should the vendee lose, by reason of the eviction, a part of the thing sold of such importance, in relation
to the whole, that he would not have bought it without said part, he may demand the rescission of the contract;
but with the obligation to return the thing without other encumbrances that those which it had when he acquired
it.

231
He may exercise this right of action, instead of enforcing the vendor's liability for eviction.

The same rule shall be observed when two or more things have been jointly sold for a lump sum, or for a separate
price for each of them, if it should clearly appear that the vendee would not have purchased one without the other.
(1479a)

Art. 1557. The warranty cannot be enforced until a final judgment has been rendered, whereby the vendee loses
the thing acquired or a part thereof. (1480)

Art. 1558. The vendor shall not be obliged to make good the proper warranty, unless he is summoned in the suit for
eviction at the instance of the vendee. (1481a)

Art. 1559. The defendant vendee shall ask, within the time fixed in the Rules of Court for answering the complaint,
that the vendor be made a co-defendant. (1482a)

Art. 1560. If the immovable sold should be encumbered with any non-apparent burden or servitude, not
mentioned in the agreement, of such a nature that it must be presumed that the vendee would not have acquired
it had he been aware thereof, he may ask for the rescission of the contract, unless he should prefer the appropriate
indemnity. Neither right can be exercised if the non-apparent burden or servitude is recorded in the Registry of
Property, unless there is an express warranty that the thing is free from all burdens and encumbrances.

Within one year, to be computed from the execution of the deed, the vendee may bring the action for rescission, or
sue for damages.

One year having elapsed, he may only bring an action for damages within an equal period, to be counted from the
date on which he discovered the burden or servitude. (1483a)

SUBSECTION 2. - Warranty Against Hidden Defects

of or Encumbrances Upon the Thing Sold

Art. 1561. The vendor shall be responsible for warranty against the hidden defects which the thing sold may have,
should they render it unfit for the use for which it is intended, or should they diminish its fitness for such use to
such an extent that, had the vendee been aware thereof, he would not have acquired it or would have given a
lower price for it; but said vendor shall not be answerable for patent defects or those which may be visible, or for
those which are not visible if the vendee is an expert who, by reason of his trade or profession, should have known
them. (1484a)

Art. 1562. In a sale of goods, there is an implied warranty or condition as to the quality or fitness of the goods, as
follows:

(1) Where the buyer, expressly or by implication, makes known to the seller the particular purpose for
which the goods are acquired, and it appears that the buyer relies on the seller's skill or judgment
(whether he be the grower or manufacturer or not), there is an implied warranty that the goods shall be
reasonably fit for such purpose;

(2) Where the goods are brought by description from a seller who deals in goods of that description
(whether he be the grower or manufacturer or not), there is an implied warranty that the goods shall be
of merchantable quality. (n)

231
Art. 1563. In the case of contract of sale of a specified article under its patent or other trade name, there is no
warranty as to its fitness for any particular purpose, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary. (n)

Art. 1564. An implied warranty or condition as to the quality or fitness for a particular purpose may be annexed by
the usage of trade. (n)

Art. 1565. In the case of a contract of sale by sample, if the seller is a dealer in goods of that kind, there is an
implied warranty that the goods shall be free from any defect rendering them unmerchantable which would not be
apparent on reasonable examination of the sample. (n)

Art. 1566. The vendor is responsible to the vendee for any hidden faults or defects in the thing sold, even though
he was not aware thereof.

This provision shall not apply if the contrary has been stipulated, and the vendor was not aware of the hidden
faults or defects in the thing sold. (1485)

Art. 1567. In the cases of Articles 1561, 1562, 1564, 1565 and 1566, the vendee may elect between withdrawing
from the contract and demanding a proportionate reduction of the price, with damages in either case. (1486a)

Art. 1568. If the thing sold should be lost in consequence of the hidden faults, and the vendor was aware of them,
he shall bear the loss, and shall be obliged to return the price and refund the expenses of the contract, with
damages. If he was not aware of them, he shall only return the price and interest thereon, and reimburse the
expenses of the contract which the vendee might have paid. (1487a)

Art. 1569. If the thing sold had any hidden fault at the time of the sale, and should thereafter be lost by a fortuitous
event or through the fault of the vendee, the latter may demand of the vendor the price which he paid, less the
value which the thing had when it was lost.

If the vendor acted in bad faith, he shall pay damages to the vendee. (1488a)

Art. 1570. The preceding articles of this Subsection shall be applicable to judicial sales, except that the judgment
debtor shall not be liable for damages. (1489a)

Art. 1571. Actions arising from the provisions of the preceding ten articles shall be barred after six months, from
the delivery of the thing sold. (1490)

Art. 1572. If two or more animals are sold together, whether for a lump sum or for a separate price for each of
them, the redhibitory defect of one shall only give rise to its redhibition, and not that of the others; unless it should
appear that the vendee would not have purchased the sound animal or animals without the defective one.

The latter case shall be presumed when a team, yoke pair, or set is bought, even if a separate price has been fixed
for each one of the animals composing the same. (1491)

Art. 1573. The provisions of the preceding article with respect to the sale of animals shall in like manner be
applicable to the sale of other things. (1492)

Art. 1574. There is no warranty against hidden defects of animals sold at fairs or at public auctions, or of live stock
sold as condemned. (1493a)

Art. 1575. The sale of animals suffering from contagious diseases shall be void.

231
A contract of sale of animals shall also be void if the use or service for which they are acquired has been stated in
the contract, and they are found to be unfit therefor. (1494a)

Art. 1576. If the hidden defect of animals, even in case a professional inspection has been made, should be of such
a nature that expert knowledge is not sufficient to discover it, the defect shall be considered as redhibitory.

But if the veterinarian, through ignorance or bad faith should fail to discover or disclose it, he shall be liable for
damages. (1495)

Art. 1577. The redhibitory action, based on the faults or defects of animals, must be brought within forty days from
the date of their delivery to the vendee.

This action can only be exercised with respect to faults and defects which are determined by law or by local
customs. (1496a)

Art. 1578. If the animal should die within three days after its purchase, the vendor shall be liable if the disease
which cause the death existed at the time of the contract. (1497a)

Art. 1579. If the sale be rescinded, the animal shall be returned in the condition in which it was sold and delivered,
the vendee being answerable for any injury due to his negligence, and not arising from the redhibitory fault or
defect. (1498)

Art. 1580. In the sale of animals with redhibitory defects, the vendee shall also enjoy the right mentioned in article
1567; but he must make use thereof within the same period which has been fixed for the exercise of the
redhibitory action. (1499)

Art. 1581. The form of sale of large cattle shall be governed by special laws. (n)

CHAPTER 5
OBLIGATIONS OF THE VENDEE

Art. 1582. The vendee is bound to accept delivery and to pay the price of the thing sold at the time and place
stipulated in the contract.

If the time and place should not have been stipulated, the payment must be made at the time and place of the
delivery of the thing sold. (1500a)

Art. 1583. Unless otherwise agreed, the buyer of goods is not bound to accept delivery thereof by installments.

Where there is a contract of sale of goods to be delivered by stated installments, which are to be separately paid
for, and the seller makes defective deliveries in respect of one or more instalments, or the buyer neglects or refuses
without just cause to take delivery of or pay for one more instalments, it depends in each case on the terms of the
contract and the circumstances of the case, whether the breach of contract is so material as to justify the injured
party in refusing to proceed further and suing for damages for breach of the entire contract, or whether the breach
is severable, giving rise to a claim for compensation but not to a right to treat the whole contract as broken. (n)

Art. 1584. Where goods are delivered to the buyer, which he has not previously examined, he is not deemed to
have accepted them unless and until he has had a reasonable opportunity of examining them for the purpose of
ascertaining whether they are in conformity with the contract if there is no stipulation to the contrary.

231
Unless otherwise agreed, when the seller tenders delivery of goods to the buyer, he is bound, on request, to afford
the buyer a reasonable opportunity of examining the goods for the purpose of ascertaining whether they are in
conformity with the contract.

Where goods are delivered to a carrier by the seller, in accordance with an order from or agreement with the
buyer, upon the terms that the goods shall not be delivered by the carrier to the buyer until he has paid the price,
whether such terms are indicated by marking the goods with the words "collect on delivery," or otherwise, the
buyer is not entitled to examine the goods before the payment of the price, in the absence of agreement or usage
of trade permitting such examination. (n)

Art. 1585. The buyer is deemed to have accepted the goods when he intimates to the seller that he has accepted
them, or when the goods have been delivered to him, and he does any act in relation to them which is inconsistent
with the ownership of the seller, or when, after the lapse of a reasonable time, he retains the goods without
intimating to the seller that he has rejected them. (n)

Art. 1586. In the absence of express or implied agreement of the parties, acceptance of the goods by the buyer
shall not discharge the seller from liability in damages or other legal remedy for breach of any promise or warranty
in the contract of sale. But, if, after acceptance of the goods, the buyer fails to give notice to the seller of the
breach in any promise of warranty within a reasonable time after the buyer knows, or ought to know of such
breach, the seller shall not be liable therefore. (n)

Art. 1587. Unless otherwise agreed, where goods are delivered to the buyer, and he refuses to accept them, having
the right so to do, he is not bound to return them to the seller, but it is sufficient if he notifies the seller that he
refuses to accept them. If he voluntarily constitutes himself a depositary thereof, he shall be liable as such. (n)

Art. 1588. If there is no stipulation as specified in the first paragraph of article 1523, when the buyer's refusal to
accept the goods is without just cause, the title thereto passes to him from the moment they are placed at his
disposal. (n)

Art. 1589. The vendee shall owe interest for the period between the delivery of the thing and the payment of the
price, in the following three cases:

(1) Should it have been so stipulated;

(2) Should the thing sold and delivered produce fruits or income;

(3) Should he be in default, from the time of judicial or extrajudicial demand for the payment of the price.
(1501a)

Art. 1590. Should the vendee be disturbed in the possession or ownership of the thing acquired, or should he have
reasonable grounds to fear such disturbance, by a vindicatory action or a foreclosure of mortgage, he may suspend
the payment of the price until the vendor has caused the disturbance or danger to cease, unless the latter gives
security for the return of the price in a proper case, or it has been stipulated that, notwithstanding any such
contingency, the vendee shall be bound to make the payment. A mere act of trespass shall not authorize the
suspension of the payment of the price. (1502a)

Art. 1591. Should the vendor have reasonable grounds to fear the loss of immovable property sold and its price, he
may immediately sue for the rescission of the sale.

Should such ground not exist, the provisions of Article 1191 shall be observed. (1503)

231
Art. 1592. In the sale of immovable property, even though it may have been stipulated that upon failure to pay the
price at the time agreed upon the rescission of the contract shall of right take place, the vendee may pay, even after
the expiration of the period, as long as no demand for rescission of the contract has been made upon him either
judicially or by a notarial act. After the demand, the court may not grant him a new term. (1504a)

Art. 1593. With respect to movable property, the rescission of the sale shall of right take place in the interest of the
vendor, if the vendee, upon the expiration of the period fixed for the delivery of the thing, should not have
appeared to receive it, or, having appeared, he should not have tendered the price at the same time, unless a
longer period has been stipulated for its payment. (1505)

CHAPTER 6
ACTIONS FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT OF SALE OF GOODS

Art. 1594. Actions for breach of the contract of sale of goods shall be governed particularly by the provisions of this
Chapter, and as to matters not specifically provided for herein, by other applicable provisions of this Title. (n)

Art. 1595. Where, under a contract of sale, the ownership of the goods has passed to the buyer and he wrongfully
neglects or refuses to pay for the goods according to the terms of the contract of sale, the seller may maintain an
action against him for the price of the goods.

Where, under a contract of sale, the price is payable on a certain day, irrespective of delivery or of transfer of title
and the buyer wrongfully neglects or refuses to pay such price, the seller may maintain an action for the price
although the ownership in the goods has not passed. But it shall be a defense to such an action that the seller at
any time before the judgment in such action has manifested an inability to perform the contract of sale on his part
or an intention not to perform it.

Although the ownership in the goods has not passed, if they cannot readily be resold for a reasonable price, and if
the provisions of article 1596, fourth paragraph, are not applicable, the seller may offer to deliver the goods to the
buyer, and, if the buyer refuses to receive them, may notify the buyer that the goods are thereafter held by the
seller as bailee for the buyer. Thereafter the seller may treat the goods as the buyer's and may maintain an action
for the price. (n)

Art. 1596. Where the buyer wrongfully neglects or refuses to accept and pay for the goods, the seller may maintain
an action against him for damages for nonacceptance.

The measure of damages is the estimated loss directly and naturally resulting in the ordinary course of events from
the buyer's breach of contract.

Where there is an available market for the goods in question, the measure of damages is, in the absence of special
circumstances showing proximate damage of a different amount, the difference between the contract price and the
market or current price at the time or times when the goods ought to have been accepted, or, if no time was fixed
for acceptance, then at the time of the refusal to accept.

If, while labor or expense of material amount is necessary on the part of the seller to enable him to fulfill his
obligations under the contract of sale, the buyer repudiates the contract or notifies the seller to proceed no further
therewith, the buyer shall be liable to the seller for labor performed or expenses made before receiving notice of
the buyer's repudiation or countermand. The profit the seller would have made if the contract or the sale had been
fully performed shall be considered in awarding the damages. (n)

231
Art. 1597. Where the goods have not been delivered to the buyer, and the buyer has repudiated the contract of
sale, or has manifested his inability to perform his obligations thereunder, or has committed a breach thereof, the
seller may totally rescind the contract of sale by giving notice of his election so to do to the buyer. (n)

Art. 1598. Where the seller has broken a contract to deliver specific or ascertained goods, a court may, on the
application of the buyer, direct that the contract shall be performed specifically, without giving the seller the option
of retaining the goods on payment of damages. The judgment or decree may be unconditional, or upon such terms
and conditions as to damages, payment of the price and otherwise, as the court may deem just. (n)

Art. 1599. Where there is a breach of warranty by the seller, the buyer may, at his election:

(1) Accept or keep the goods and set up against the seller, the breach of warranty by way of recoupment in
diminution or extinction of the price;

(2) Accept or keep the goods and maintain an action against the seller for damages for the breach of
warranty;

(3) Refuse to accept the goods, and maintain an action against the seller for damages for the breach of
warranty;

(4) Rescind the contract of sale and refuse to receive the goods or if the goods have already been received,
return them or offer to return them to the seller and recover the price or any part thereof which has been
paid.

When the buyer has claimed and been granted a remedy in anyone of these ways, no other remedy can
thereafter be granted, without prejudice to the provisions of the second paragraph of Article 1191.

Where the goods have been delivered to the buyer, he cannot rescind the sale if he knew of the breach of
warranty when he accepted the goods without protest, or if he fails to notify the seller within a reasonable
time of the election to rescind, or if he fails to return or to offer to return the goods to the seller in
substantially as good condition as they were in at the time the ownership was transferred to the buyer. But
if deterioration or injury of the goods is due to the breach or warranty, such deterioration or injury shall
not prevent the buyer from returning or offering to return the goods to the seller and rescinding the sale.

Where the buyer is entitled to rescind the sale and elects to do so, he shall cease to be liable for the price
upon returning or offering to return the goods. If the price or any part thereof has already been paid, the
seller shall be liable to repay so much thereof as has been paid, concurrently with the return of the goods,
or immediately after an offer to return the goods in exchange for repayment of the price.

Where the buyer is entitled to rescind the sale and elects to do so, if the seller refuses to accept an offer of
the buyer to return the goods, the buyer shall thereafter be deemed to hold the goods as bailee for the
seller, but subject to a lien to secure payment of any portion of the price which has been paid, and with
the remedies for the enforcement of such lien allowed to an unpaid seller by Article 1526.

(5) In the case of breach of warranty of quality, such loss, in the absence of special circumstances showing
proximate damage of a greater amount, is the difference between the value of the goods at the time of
delivery to the buyer and the value they would have had if they had answered to the warranty. (n)

CHAPTER 7

231
 EXTINGUISHMENT OF SALE

Art. 1600. Sales are extinguished by the same causes as all other obligations, by those stated in the preceding
articles of this Title, and by conventional or legal redemption. (1506)

SECTION 1. - Conventional Redemption

Art. 1601. Conventional redemption shall take place when the vendor reserves the right to repurchase the thing
sold, with the obligation to comply with the provisions of Article 1616 and other stipulations which may have been
agreed upon. (1507)

Art. 1602. The contract shall be presumed to be an equitable mortgage, in any of the following cases:

(1) When the price of a sale with right to repurchase is unusually inadequate;

(2) When the vendor remains in possession as lessee or otherwise;

(3) When upon or after the expiration of the right to repurchase another instrument extending the period
of redemption or granting a new period is executed;

(4) When the purchaser retains for himself a part of the purchase price;

(5) When the vendor binds himself to pay the taxes on the thing sold;

(6) In any other case where it may be fairly inferred that the real intention of the parties is that the
transaction shall secure the payment of a debt or the performance of any other obligation.

In any of the foregoing cases, any money, fruits, or other benefit to be received by the vendee as rent or otherwise
shall be considered as interest which shall be subject to the usury laws. (n)

Art. 1603. In case of doubt, a contract purporting to be a sale with right to repurchase shall be construed as an
equitable mortgage. (n)

Art. 1604. The provisions of Article 1602 shall also apply to a contract purporting to be an absolute sale. (n)

Art. 1605. In the cases referred to in Articles 1602 and 1604, the apparent vendor may ask for the reformation of
the instrument. (n)

Art. 1606. The right referred to in Article 1601, in the absence of an express agreement, shall last four years from
the date of the contract.

Should there be an agreement, the period cannot exceed ten years.

However, the vendor may still exercise the right to repurchase within thirty days from the time final judgment was
rendered in a civil action on the basis that the contract was a true sale with right to repurchase. (1508a)

Art. 1607. In case of real property, the consolidation of ownership in the vendee by virtue of the failure of the
vendor to comply with the provisions of article 1616 shall not be recorded in the Registry of Property without a
judicial order, after the vendor has been duly heard. (n)

231
Art. 1608. The vendor may bring his action against every possessor whose right is derived from the vendee, even if
in the second contract no mention should have been made of the right to repurchase, without prejudice to the
provisions of the Mortgage Law and the Land Registration Law with respect to third persons. (1510)

Art. 1609. The vendee is subrogated to the vendor's rights and actions. (1511)

Art. 1610. The creditors of the vendor cannot make use of the right of redemption against the vendee, until after
they have exhausted the property of the vendor. (1512)

Art. 1611. In a sale with a right to repurchase, the vendee of a part of an undivided immovable who acquires the
whole thereof in the case of article 498, may compel the vendor to redeem the whole property, if the latter wishes
to make use of the right of redemption. (1513)

Art. 1612. If several persons, jointly and in the same contract, should sell an undivided immovable with a right of
repurchase, none of them may exercise this right for more than his respective share.

The same rule shall apply if the person who sold an immovable alone has left several heirs, in which case each of
the latter may only redeem the part which he may have acquired. (1514)

Art. 1613. In the case of the preceding article, the vendee may demand of all the vendors or co-heirs that they
come to an agreement upon the purchase of the whole thing sold; and should they fail to do so, the vendee cannot
be compelled to consent to a partial redemption. (1515)

Art. 1614. Each one of the co-owners of an undivided immovable, who may have sold his share separately, may
independently exercise the right of repurchase as regards his own share, and the vendee cannot compel him to
redeem the whole property. (1516)

Art. 1615. If the vendee should leave several heirs, the action for redemption cannot be brought against each of
them except for his own share, whether the thing be undivided, or it has been partitioned among them.

But if the inheritance has been divided, and the thing sold has been awarded to one of the heirs, the action for
redemption may be instituted against him for the whole. (1517)

Art. 1616. The vendor cannot avail himself of the right of repurchase without returning to the vendee the price of
the sale, and in addition:

(1) The expenses of the contract, and any other legitimate payments made by reason of the sale;

(2) The necessary and useful expenses made on the thing sold. (1518)

Art. 1617. If at the time of the execution of the sale there should be on the land, visible or growing fruits, there
shall be no reimbursement for or prorating of those existing at the time of redemption, if no indemnity was paid by
the purchaser when the sale was executed.

Should there have been no fruits at the time of the sale and some exist at the time of redemption, they shall be
prorated between the redemptioner and the vendee, giving the latter the part corresponding to the time he
possessed the land in the last year, counted from the anniversary of the date of the sale. (1519a)

231
Art. 1618. The vendor who recovers the thing sold shall receive it free from all charges or mortgages constituted by
the vendee, but he shall respect the leases which the latter may have executed in good faith, and in accordance
with the custom of the place where the land is situated. (1520)

SECTION 2. - Legal Redemption

Art. 1619. Legal redemption is the right to be subrogated, upon the same terms and conditions stipulated in the
contract, in the place of one who acquires a thing by purchase or dation in payment, or by any other transaction
whereby ownership is transmitted by onerous title. (1521a)

Art. 1620. A co-owner of a thing may exercise the right of redemption in case the shares of all the other co-owners
or of any of them, are sold to a third person. If the price of the alienation is grossly excessive, the redemptioner
shall pay only a reasonable one.

Should two or more co-owners desire to exercise the right of redemption, they may only do so in proportion to the
share they may respectively have in the thing owned in common. (1522a)

Art. 1621. The owners of adjoining lands shall also have the right of redemption when a piece of rural land, the
area of which does not exceed one hectare, is alienated, unless the grantee does not own any rural land.

This right is not applicable to adjacent lands which are separated by brooks, drains, ravines, roads and other
apparent servitudes for the benefit of other estates.

If two or more adjoining owners desire to exercise the right of redemption at the same time, the owner of the
adjoining land of smaller area shall be preferred; and should both lands have the same area, the one who first
requested the redemption. (1523a)

Art. 1622. Whenever a piece of urban land which is so small and so situated that a major portion thereof cannot be
used for any practical purpose within a reasonable time, having been bought merely for speculation, is about to be
re-sold, the owner of any adjoining land has a right of pre-emption at a reasonable price.

If the re-sale has been perfected, the owner of the adjoining land shall have a right of redemption, also at a
reasonable price.

When two or more owners of adjoining lands wish to exercise the right of

pre-emption or redemption, the owner whose intended use of the land in question appears best justified shall be
preferred. (n)

Art. 1623. The right of legal pre-emption or redemption shall not be exercised except within thirty days from the
notice in writing by the prospective vendor, or by the vendor, as the case may be. The deed of sale shall not be
recorded in the Registry of Property, unless accompanied by an affidavit of the vendor that he has given written
notice thereof to all possible redemptioners.

The right of redemption of co-owners excludes that of adjoining owners. (1524a)

CHAPTER 8

231
 ASSIGNMENT OF CREDITS AND OTHER INCORPOREAL RIGHTS

Art. 1624. An assignment of creditors and other incorporeal rights shall be perfected in accordance with the
provisions of Article 1475. (n)

Art. 1625. An assignment of a credit, right or action shall produce no effect as against third person, unless it
appears in a public instrument, or the instrument is recorded in the Registry of Property in case the assignment
involves real property. (1526)

Art. 1626. The debtor who, before having knowledge of the assignment, pays his creditor shall be released from the
obligation. (1527)

Art. 1627. The assignment of a credit includes all the accessory rights, such as a guaranty, mortgage, pledge or
preference. (1528)

Art. 1628. The vendor in good faith shall be responsible for the existence and legality of the credit at the time of
the sale, unless it should have been sold as doubtful; but not for the solvency of the debtor, unless it has been so
expressly stipulated or unless the insolvency was prior to the sale and of common knowledge.

Even in these cases he shall only be liable for the price received and for the expenses specified in No. 1 of Article
1616.

The vendor in bad faith shall always be answerable for the payment of all expenses, and for damages. (1529)

Art. 1629. In case the assignor in good faith should have made himself responsible for the solvency of the debtor,
and the contracting parties should not have agreed upon the duration of the liability, it shall last for one year only,
from the time of the assignment if the period had already expired.

If the credit should be payable within a term or period which has not yet expired, the liability shall cease one year
after the maturity. (1530a)

Art. 1630. One who sells an inheritance without enumerating the things of which it is composed, shall only be
answerable for his character as an heir. (1531)

Art. 1631. One who sells for a lump sum the whole of certain rights, rents, or products, shall comply by answering
for the legitimacy of the whole in general; but he shall not be obliged to warrant each of the various parts of which
it may be composed, except in the case of eviction from the whole or the part of greater value. (1532a)

Art. 1632. Should the vendor have profited by some of the fruits or received anything from the inheritance sold, he
shall pay the vendee thereof, if the contrary has not been stipulated. (1533)

Art. 1633. The vendee shall, on his part, reimburse the vendor for all that the latter may have paid for the debts of
and charges on the estate and satisfy the credits he may have against the same, unless there is an agreement to the
contrary. (1534)

Art. 1634. When a credit or other incorporeal right in litigation is sold, the debtor shall have a right to extinguish it
by reimbursing the assignee for the price the latter paid therefor, the judicial costs incurred by him, and the interest
on the price from the day on which the same was paid.

231
A credit or other incorporeal right shall be considered in litigation from the time the complaint concerning the
same is answered.

The debtor may exercise his right within thirty days from the date the assignee demands payment from him. (1535)

Art. 1635. From the provisions of the preceding article shall be excepted the assignments or sales made:

(1) To a co-heir or co-owner of the right assigned;

(2) To a creditor in payment of his credit;

(3) To the possessor of a tenement or piece of land which is subject to the right in litigation assigned.
(1536)

CHAPTER 9
GENERAL PROVISIONS

Art. 1636. In the preceding articles in this Title governing the sale of goods, unless the context or subject matter
otherwise requires:
(1) "Document of title to goods" includes any bill of lading, dock warrant, "quedan," or warehouse receipt
or order for the delivery of goods, or any other document used in the ordinary course of business in the
sale or transfer of goods, as proof of the possession or control of the goods, or authorizing or purporting
to authorize the possessor of the document to transfer or receive, either by endorsement or by delivery,
goods represented by such document.

"Goods" includes all chattels personal but not things in action or money of legal tender in the Philippines.
The term includes growing fruits or crops.

"Order" relating to documents of title means an order by endorsement on the documents.

"Quality of goods" includes their state or condition.

"Specific goods" means goods identified and agreed upon at the time a contract of sale is made.

An antecedent or pre-existing claim, whether for money or not, constitutes "value" where goods or
documents of title are taken either in satisfaction thereof or as security therefor.

(2) A person is insolvent within the meaning of this Title who either has ceased to pay his debts in the
ordinary course of business or cannot pay his debts as they become due, whether insolvency proceedings
have been commenced or not.

(3) Goods are in a "deliverable state" within the meaning of this Title when they are in such a state that
the buyer would, under the contract, be bound to take delivery of them. (n)

Art. 1637. The provisions of this Title are subject to the rules laid down by the Mortgage Law and the Land
Registration Law with regard to immovable property. (1537a)

Title VII. - BARTER OR EXCHANGE

231
Art. 1638. By the contract of barter or exchange one of the parties binds himself to give one thing in consideration
of the other's promise to give another thing. (1538a)

Art. 1639. If one of the contracting parties, having received the thing promised him in barter, should prove that it
did not belong to the person who gave it, he cannot be compelled to deliver that which he offered in exchange, but
he shall be entitled to damages. (1539a)

Art. 1640. One who loses by eviction the thing received in barter may recover that which he gave in exchange with
a right to damages, or he may only demand an indemnity for damages. However, he can only make use of the right
to recover the thing which he has delivered while the same remains in the possession of the other party, and
without prejudice to the rights acquired in good faith in the meantime by a third person. (1540a)

Art. 1641. As to all matters not specifically provided for in this Title, barter shall be governed by the provisions of
the preceding Title relating to sales. (1541a)

Title VIII. - LEASE

CHAPTER 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS

Art. 1642. The contract of lease may be of things, or of work and service. (1542)

Art. 1643. In the lease of things, one of the parties binds himself to give to another the enjoyment or use of a thing
for a price certain, and for a period which may be definite or indefinite. However, no lease for more than ninety-
nine years shall be valid. (1543a)

Art. 1644. In the lease of work or service, one of the parties binds himself to execute a piece of work or to render
to the other some service for a price certain, but the relation of principal and agent does not exist between them.
(1544a)

Art. 1645. Consumable goods cannot be the subject matter of a contract of lease, except when they are merely to
be exhibited or when they are accessory to an industrial establishment. (1545a)

CHAPTER 2
LEASE OF RURAL AND URBAN LANDS

SECTION 1. - General Provisions

Art. 1646. The persons disqualified to buy referred to in Articles 1490 and 1491, are also disqualified to become
lessees of the things mentioned therein. (n)

Art. 1647. If a lease is to be recorded in the Registry of Property, the following persons cannot constitute the same
without proper authority: the husband with respect to the wife's paraphernal real estate, the father or guardian as
to the property of the minor or ward, and the manager without special power. (1548a)

Art. 1648. Every lease of real estate may be recorded in the Registry of Property. Unless a lease is recorded, it shall
not be binding upon third persons. (1549a)

231
Art. 1649. The lessee cannot assign the lease without the consent of the lessor, unless there is a stipulation to the
contrary. (n)

Art. 1650. When in the contract of lease of things there is no express prohibition, the lessee may sublet the thing
leased, in whole or in part, without prejudice to his responsibility for the performance of the contract toward the
lessor. (1550)

Art. 1651. Without prejudice to his obligation toward the sublessor, the sublessee is bound to the lessor for all acts
which refer to the use and preservation of the thing leased in the manner stipulated between the lessor and the
lessee. (1551)

Art. 1652. The sublessee is subsidiarily liable to the lessor for any rent due from the lessee. However, the sublessee
shall not be responsible beyond the amount of rent due from him, in accordance with the terms of the sublease, at
the time of the extrajudicial demand by the lessor.

Payments of rent in advance by the sublessee shall be deemed not to have been made, so far as the lessor's claim
is concerned, unless said payments were effected in virtue of the custom of the place. (1552a)

Art. 1653. The provisions governing warranty, contained in the Title on Sales, shall be applicable to the contract of
lease.

In the cases where the return of the price is required, reduction shall be made in proportion to the time during
which the lessee enjoyed the thing. (1553)

SECTION 2. - Rights and Obligations of the Lessor and the Lessee

Art. 1654. The lessor is obliged:

(1) To deliver the thing which is the object of the contract in such a condition as to render it fit for the use
intended;

(2) To make on the same during the lease all the necessary repairs in order to keep it suitable for the use
to which it has been devoted, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary;

(3) To maintain the lessee in the peaceful and adequate enjoyment of the lease for the entire duration of
the contract. (1554a)

Art. 1655. If the thing leased is totally destroyed by a fortuitous event, the lease is extinguished. If the destruction
is partial, the lessee may choose between a proportional reduction of the rent and a rescission of the lease. (n)

Art. 1656. The lessor of a business or industrial establishment may continue engaging in the same business or
industry to which the lessee devotes the thing leased, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary. (n)

Art. 1657. The lessee is obliged:

(1) To pay the price of the lease according to the terms stipulated;

(2) To use the thing leased as a diligent father of a family, devoting it to the use stipulated; and in the
absence of stipulation, to that which may be inferred from the nature of the thing leased, according to the
custom of the place;

231
 (3) To pay expenses for the deed of lease. (1555)

Art. 1658. The lessee may suspend the payment of the rent in case the lessor fails to make the necessary repairs or
to maintain the lessee in peaceful and adequate enjoyment of the property leased. (n)

Art. 1659. If the lessor or the lessee should not comply with the obligations set forth in Articles 1654 and 1657, the
aggrieved party may ask for the rescission of the contract and indemnification for damages, or only the latter,
allowing the contract to remain in force. (1556)

Art. 1660. If a dwelling place or any other building intended for human habitation is in such a condition that its use
brings imminent and serious danger to life or health, the lessee may terminate the lease at once by notifying the
lessor, even if at the time the contract was perfected the former knew of the dangerous condition or waived the
right to rescind the lease on account of this condition. (n)

Art. 1661. The lessor cannot alter the form of the thing leased in such a way as to impair the use to which the thing
is devoted under the terms of the lease. (1557a)

Art. 1662. If during the lease it should become necessary to make some urgent repairs upon the thing leased,
which cannot be deferred until the termination of the lease, the lessee is obliged to tolerate the work, although it
may be very annoying to him, and although during the same, he may be deprived of a part of the premises.

If the repairs last more than forty days the rent shall be reduced in proportion to the time - including the first forty
days - and the part of the property of which the lessee has been deprived.

When the work is of such a nature that the portion which the lessee and his family need for their dwelling becomes
uninhabitable, he may rescind the contract if the main purpose of the lease is to provide a dwelling place for the
lessee. (1558a)

Art. 1663. The lessee is obliged to bring to the knowledge of the proprietor, within the shortest possible time, every
usurpation or untoward act which any third person may have committed or may be openly preparing to carry out
upon the thing leased.

He is also obliged to advise the owner, with the same urgency, of the need of all repairs included in No. 2 of Article
1654.

In both cases the lessee shall be liable for the damages which, through his negligence, may be suffered by the
proprietor.

If the lessor fails to make urgent repairs, the lessee, in order to avoid an imminent danger, may order the repairs at
the lessor's cost. (1559a)

Art. 1664. The lessor is not obliged to answer for a mere act of trespass which a third person may cause on the use
of the thing leased; but the lessee shall have a direct action against the intruder.

There is a mere act of trespass when the third person claims no right whatever. (1560a)

Art. 1665. The lessee shall return the thing leased, upon the termination of the lease, as he received it, save what
has been lost or impaired by the lapse of time, or by ordinary wear and tear, or from an inevitable cause. (1561a)

231
Art. 1666. In the absence of a statement concerning the condition of the thing at the time the lease was
constituted, the law presumes that the lessee received it in good condition, unless there is proof to the contrary.
(1562)

Art. 1667. The lessee is responsible for the deterioration or loss of the thing leased, unless he proves that it took
place without his fault. This burden of proof on the lessee does not apply when the destruction is due to
earthquake, flood, storm or other natural calamity. (1563a)

Art. 1668. The lessee is liable for any deterioration caused by members of his household and by guests and visitors.
(1564a)

Art. 1669. If the lease was made for a determinate time, it ceases upon the day fixed, without the need of a
demand. (1565)

Art. 1670. If at the end of the contract the lessee should continue enjoying the thing leased for fifteen days with
the acquiescence of the lessor, and unless a notice to the contrary by either party has previously been given, it is
understood that there is an implied new lease, not for the period of the original contract, but for the time
established in Articles 1682 and 1687. The other terms of the original contract shall be revived. (1566a)

Art. 1671. If the lessee continues enjoying the thing after the expiration of the contract, over the lessor's objection,
the former shall be subject to the responsibilities of a possessor in bad faith. (n)

Art. 1672. In case of an implied new lease, the obligations contracted by a third person for the security of the
principal contract shall cease with respect to the new lease. (1567)

Art. 1673. The lessor may judicially eject the lessee for any of the following causes:

(1) When the period agreed upon, or that which is fixed for the duration of leases under Articles 1682 and
1687, has expired;

(2) Lack of payment of the price stipulated;

(3) Violation of any of the conditions agreed upon in the contract;

(4) When the lessee devotes the thing leased to any use or service not stipulated which causes the
deterioration thereof; or if he does not observe the requirement in No. 2 of Article 1657, as regards the
use thereof.

The ejectment of tenants of agricultural lands is governed by special laws. (1569a)

Art. 1674. In ejectment cases where an appeal is taken the remedy granted in Article 539, second paragraph, shall
also apply, if the higher court is satisfied that the lessee's appeal is frivolous or dilatory, or that the lessor's appeal is
prima facie meritorious. The period of ten days referred to in said article shall be counted from the time the appeal
is perfected. (n)

Art. 1675. Except in cases stated in Article 1673, the lessee shall have a right to make use of the periods established
in Articles 1682 and 1687. (1570)

231
Art. 1676. The purchaser of a piece of land which is under a lease that is not recorded in the Registry of Property
may terminate the lease, save when there is a stipulation to the contrary in the contract of sale, or when the
purchaser knows of the existence of the lease.

If the buyer makes use of this right, the lessee may demand that he be allowed to gather the fruits of the harvest
which corresponds to the current agricultural year and that the vendor indemnify him for damages suffered.

If the sale is fictitious, for the purpose of extinguishing the lease, the supposed vendee cannot make use of the
right granted in the first paragraph of this article. The sale is presumed to be fictitious if at the time the supposed
vendee demands the termination of the lease, the sale is not recorded in the Registry of Property. (1571a)

Art. 1677. The purchaser in a sale with the right of redemption cannot make use of the power to eject the lessee
until the end of the period for the redemption. (1572)

Art. 1678. If the lessee makes, in good faith, useful improvements which are suitable to the use for which the lease
is intended, without altering the form or substance of the property leased, the lessor upon the termination of the
lease shall pay the lessee one-half of the value of the improvements at that time. Should the lessor refuse to
reimburse said amount, the lessee may remove the improvements, even though the principal thing may suffer
damage thereby. He shall not, however, cause any more impairment upon the property leased than is necessary.

With regard to ornamental expenses, the lessee shall not be entitled to any reimbursement, but he may remove
the ornamental objects, provided no damage is caused to the principal thing, and the lessor does not choose to
retain them by paying their value at the time the lease is extinguished. (n)

Art. 1679. If nothing has been stipulated concerning the place and the time for the payment of the lease, the
provisions or Article 1251 shall be observed as regards the place; and with respect to the time, the custom of the
place shall be followed. (1574)

SECTION 3. - Special Provisions for Leases of Rural Lands

Art. 1680. The lessee shall have no right to a reduction of the rent on account of the sterility of the land leased, or
by reason of the loss of fruits due to ordinary fortuitous events; but he shall have such right in case of the loss of
more than one-half of the fruits through extraordinary and unforeseen fortuitous events, save always when there is
a specific stipulation to the contrary.

Extraordinary fortuitous events are understood to be: fire, war, pestilence, unusual flood, locusts, earthquake, or
others which are uncommon, and which the contracting parties could not have reasonably foreseen. (1575)

Art. 1681. Neither does the lessee have any right to a reduction of the rent if the fruits are lost after they have been
separated from their stalk, root or trunk. (1576)

Art. 1682. The lease of a piece of rural land, when its duration has not been fixed, is understood to have been for all
the time necessary for the gathering of the fruits which the whole estate leased may yield in one year, or which it
may yield once, although two or more years have to elapse for the purpose. (1577a)

Art. 1683. The outgoing lessee shall allow the incoming lessee or the lessor the use of the premises and other
means necessary for the preparatory labor for the following year; and, reciprocally, the incoming lessee or the
lessor is under obligation to permit the outgoing lessee to do whatever may be necessary for the gathering or
harvesting and utilization of the fruits, all in accordance with the custom of the place. (1578a)

231
Art. 1684. Land tenancy on shares shall be governed by special laws, the stipulations of the parties, the provisions
on partnership and by the customs of the place. (1579a)

Art. 1685. The tenant on shares cannot be ejected except in cases specified by law. (n)

SECTION 4. - Special Provisions of the Lease of Urban Lands

Art. 1686. In default of a special stipulation, the custom of the place shall be observed with regard to the kind of
repairs on urban property for which the lessor shall be liable. In case of doubt it is understood that the repairs are
chargeable against him. (1580a)

Art. 1687. If the period for the lease has not been fixed, it is understood to be from year to year, if the rent agreed
upon is annual; from month to month, if it is monthly; from week to week, if the rent is weekly; and from day to
day, if the rent is to be paid daily. However, even though a monthly rent is paid, and no period for the lease has
been set, the courts may fix a longer term for the lease after the lessee has occupied the premises for over one
year. If the rent is weekly, the courts may likewise determine a longer period after the lessee has been in
possession for over six months. In case of daily rent, the courts may also fix a longer period after the lessee has
stayed in the place for over one month. (1581a)

Art. 1688. When the lessor of a house, or part thereof, used as a dwelling for a family, or when the lessor of a store,
or industrial establishment, also leases the furniture, the lease of the latter shall be deemed to be for the duration
of the lease of the premises. (1582)

CHAPTER 3
WORK AND LABOR

SECTION 1. - Household Service (n)

Art. 1689. Household service shall always be reasonably compensated. Any stipulation that household service is
without compensation shall be void. Such compensation shall be in addition to the house helper's lodging, food,
and medical attendance.

Art. 1690. The head of the family shall furnish, free of charge, to the house helper, suitable and sanitary quarters as
well as adequate food and medical attendance.

Art. 1691. If the house helper is under the age of eighteen years, the head of the family shall give an opportunity to
the house helper for at least elementary education. The cost of such education shall be a part of the house helper's
compensation, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary.

Art. 1692. No contract for household service shall last for more than two years. However, such contract may be
renewed from year to year.

Art. 1693. The house helper's clothes shall be subject to stipulation. However, any contract for household service
shall be void if thereby the house helper cannot afford to acquire suitable clothing.

Art. 1694. The head of the family shall treat the house helper in a just and humane manner. In no case shall
physical violence be used upon the house helper.

Art. 1695. House helper shall not be required to work more than ten hours a day. Every house helper shall be
allowed four days' vacation each month, with pay.

231
Art. 1696. In case of death of the house helper, the head of the family shall bear the funeral expenses if the house
helper has no relatives in the place where the head of the family lives, with sufficient means therefor.

Art. 1697. If the period for household service is fixed neither the head of the family nor the house helper may
terminate the contract before the expiration of the term, except for a just cause. If the house helper is unjustly
dismissed, he shall be paid the compensation already earned plus that for fifteen days by way of indemnity. If the
house helper leaves without justifiable reason, he shall forfeit any salary due him and unpaid, for not exceeding
fifteen days.

Art. 1698. If the duration of the household service is not determined either by stipulation or by the nature of the
service, the head of the family or the house helper may give notice to put an end to the service relation, according
to the following rules:

(1) If the compensation is paid by the day, notice may be given on any day that the service shall end at the
close of the following day;

(2) If the compensation is paid by the week, notice may be given, at the latest on the first business day of
the week, that the service shall be terminated at the end of the seventh day from the beginning of the
week;

(3) If the compensation is paid by the month, notice may be given, at the latest, on the fifth day of the
month, that the service shall cease at the end of the month.

Art. 1699. Upon the extinguishment of the service relation, the house helper may demand from the head of the
family a written statement on the nature and duration of the service and the efficiency and conduct of the house
helper.

SECTION 2. - Contract of Labor (n)

Art. 1700. The relations between capital and labor are not merely contractual. They are so impressed with public
interest that labor contracts must yield to the common good. Therefore, such contracts are subject to the special
laws on labor unions, collective bargaining, strikes and lockouts, closed shop, wages, working conditions, hours of
labor and similar subjects.

Art. 1701. Neither capital nor labor shall act oppressively against the other, or impair the interest or convenience of
the public.

Art. 1702. In case of doubt, all labor legislation and all labor contracts shall be construed in favor of the safety and
decent living for the laborer.

Art. 1703. No contract which practically amounts to involuntary servitude, under any guise whatsoever, shall be
valid.

Art. 1704. In collective bargaining, the labor union or members of the board or committee signing the contract shall
be liable for non-fulfillment thereof.

Art. 1705. The laborer's wages shall be paid in legal currency.

Art. 1706. Withholding of the wages, except for a debt due, shall not be made by the employer.

231
Art. 1707. The laborer's wages shall be a lien on the goods manufactured or the work done.

Art. 1708. The laborer's wages shall not be subject to execution or attachment, except for debts incurred for food,
shelter, clothing and medical attendance.

Art. 1709. The employer shall neither seize nor retain any tool or other articles belonging to the laborer.

Art. 1710. Dismissal of laborers shall be subject to the supervision of the Government, under special laws.

Art. 1711. Owners of enterprises and other employers are obliged to pay compensation for the death of or injuries
to their laborers, workmen, mechanics or other employees, even though the event may have been purely
accidental or entirely due to a fortuitous cause, if the death or personal injury arose out of and in the course of the
employment. The employer is also liable for compensation if the employee contracts any illness or disease caused
by such employment or as the result of the nature of the employment. If the mishap was due to the employee's
own notorious negligence, or voluntary act, or drunkenness, the employer shall not be liable for compensation.
When the employee's lack of due care contributed to his death or injury, the compensation shall be equitably
reduced.

Art. 1712. If the death or injury is due to the negligence of a fellow worker, the latter and the employer shall be
solidarily liable for compensation. If a fellow worker's intentional malicious act is the only cause of the death or
injury, the employer shall not be answerable, unless it should be shown that the latter did not exercise due
diligence in the selection or supervision of the plaintiff's fellow worker.

SECTION 3. - Contract for a Piece of Work

Art. 1713. By the contract for a piece of work the contractor binds himself to execute a piece of work for the
employer, in consideration of a certain price or compensation. The contractor may either employ only his labor or
skill, or also furnish the material. (1588a)

Art. 1714. If the contractor agrees to produce the work from material furnished by him, he shall deliver the thing
produced to the employer and transfer dominion over the thing. This contract shall be governed by the following
articles as well as by the pertinent provisions on warranty of title and against hidden defects and the payment of
price in a contract of sale. (n)

Art. 1715. The contract shall execute the work in such a manner that it has the qualities agreed upon and has no
defects which destroy or lessen its value or fitness for its ordinary or stipulated use. Should the work be not of such
quality, the employer may require that the contractor remove the defect or execute another work. If the contract
fails or refuses to comply with this obligation, the employer may have the defect removed or another work
executed, at the contractor's cost. (n)

Art. 1716. An agreement waiving or limiting the contractor's liability for any defect in the work is void if the
contractor acted fraudulently. (n)

Art. 1717. If the contractor bound himself to furnish the material, he shall suffer the loss if the work should be
destroyed before its delivery, save when there has been delay in receiving it. (1589)

Art. 1718. The contractor who has undertaken to put only his work or skill, cannot claim any compensation if the
work should be destroyed before its delivery, unless there has been delay in receiving it, or if the destruction was
caused by the poor quality of the material, provided this fact was communicated in due time to the owner. If the
material is lost through a fortuitous event, the contract is extinguished. (1590a)

231
Art. 1719. Acceptance of the work by the employer relieves the contractor of liability for any defect in the work,
unless:

(1) The defect is hidden and the employer is not, by his special knowledge, expected to recognize the
same; or

(2) The employer expressly reserves his rights against the contractor by reason of the defect. (n)

Art. 1720. The price or compensation shall be paid at the time and place of delivery of the work, unless there is a
stipulation to the contrary. If the work is to be delivered partially, the price or compensation for each part having
been fixed, the sum shall be paid at the time and place of delivery, in the absence if stipulation. (n)

Art. 1721. If, in the execution of the work, an act of the employer is required, and he incurs in delay or fails to
perform the act, the contractor is entitled to a reasonable compensation.

The amount of the compensation is computed, on the one hand, by the duration of the delay and the amount of
the compensation stipulated, and on the other hand, by what the contractor has saved in expenses by reason of
the delay or is able to earn by a different employment of his time and industry. (n)

Art. 1722. If the work cannot be completed on account of a defect in the material furnished by the employer, or
because of orders from the employer, without any fault on the part of the contractor, the latter has a right to an
equitable part of the compensation proportionally to the work done, and reimbursement for proper expenses
made. (n)

Art. 1723. The engineer or architect who drew up the plans and specifications for a building is liable for damages if
within fifteen years from the completion of the structure, the same should collapse by reason of a defect in those
plans and specifications, or due to the defects in the ground. The contractor is likewise responsible for the damages
if the edifice falls, within the same period, on account of defects in the construction or the use of materials of
inferior quality furnished by him, or due to any violation of the terms of the contract. If the engineer or architect
supervises the construction, he shall be solidarily liable with the contractor.

Acceptance of the building, after completion, does not imply waiver of any of the cause of action by reason of any
defect mentioned in the preceding paragraph.

The action must be brought within ten years following the collapse of the building. (n)

Art. 1724. The contractor who undertakes to build a structure or any other work for a stipulated price, in
conformity with plans and specifications agreed upon with the land-owner, can neither withdraw from the contract
nor demand an increase in the price on account of the higher cost of labor or materials, save when there has been
a change in the plans and specifications, provided:

(1) Such change has been authorized by the proprietor in writing; and

(2) The additional price to be paid to the contractor has been determined in writing by both parties.
(1593a)

Art. 1725. The owner may withdraw at will from the construction of the work, although it may have been
commenced, indemnifying the contractor for all the latter's expenses, work, and the usefulness which the owner
may obtain therefrom, and damages. (1594a)

231
Art. 1726. When a piece of work has been entrusted to a person by reason of his personal qualifications, the
contract is rescinded upon his death.

In this case the proprietor shall pay the heirs of the contractor in proportion to the price agreed upon, the value of
the part of the work done, and of the materials prepared, provided the latter yield him some benefit.

The same rule shall apply if the contractor cannot finish the work due to circumstances beyond his control. (1595)

Art. 1727. The contractor is responsible for the work done by persons employed by him. (1596)

Art. 1728. The contractor is liable for all the claims of laborers and others employed by him, and of third persons
for death or physical injuries during the construction. (n)

Art. 1729. Those who put their labor upon or furnish materials for a piece of work undertaken by the contractor
have an action against the owner up to the amount owing from the latter to the contractor at the time the claim is
made. However, the following shall not prejudice the laborers, employees and furnishers of materials:

(1) Payments made by the owner to the contractor before they are due;

(2) Renunciation by the contractor of any amount due him from the owner.

This article is subject to the provisions of special laws. (1597a)

Art. 1730. If it is agreed that the work shall be accomplished to the satisfaction of the proprietor, it is understood
that in case of disagreement the question shall be subject to expert judgment.

If the work is subject to the approval of a third person, his decision shall be final, except in case of fraud or manifest
error. (1598a)

Art. 1731. He who has executed work upon a movable has a right to retain it by way of pledge until he is paid.
(1600)

SECTION 4. - Common Carriers (n)

SUBSECTION 1. - General Provisions

Art. 1732. Common carriers are persons, corporations, firms or associations engaged in the business of carrying or
transporting passengers or goods or both, by land, water, or air, for compensation, offering their services to the
public.

Art. 1733. Common carriers, from the nature of their business and for reasons of public policy, are bound to
observe extraordinary diligence in the vigilance over the goods and for the safety of the passengers transported by
them, according to all the circumstances of each case.

Such extraordinary diligence in the vigilance over the goods is further expressed in Articles 1734, 1735, and 1745,
Nos. 5, 6, and 7, while the extraordinary diligence for the safety of the passengers is further set forth in Articles
1755 and 1756.

SUBSECTION 2. - Vigilance Over Goods

231
Art. 1734. Common carriers are responsible for the loss, destruction, or deterioration of the goods, unless the same
is due to any of the following causes only:
(1) Flood, storm, earthquake, lightning, or other natural disaster or calamity;

(2) Act of the public enemy in war, whether international or civil;

(3) Act of omission of the shipper or owner of the goods;

(4) The character of the goods or defects in the packing or in the containers;

(5) Order or act of competent public authority.

Art. 1735. In all cases other than those mentioned in Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 of the preceding article, if the goods are
lost, destroyed or deteriorated, common carriers are presumed to have been at fault or to have acted negligently,
unless they prove that they observed extraordinary diligence as required in Article 1733.

Art. 1736. The extraordinary responsibility of the common carrier lasts from the time the goods are unconditionally
placed in the possession of, and received by the carrier for transportation until the same are delivered, actually or
constructively, by the carrier to the consignee, or to the person who has a right to receive them, without prejudice
to the provisions of Article 1738.

Art. 1737. The common carrier's duty to observe extraordinary diligence over the goods remains in full force and
effect even when they are temporarily unloaded or stored in transit, unless the shipper or owner has made use of
the right of stoppage in transitu.

Art. 1738. The extraordinary liability of the common carrier continues to be operative even during the time the
goods are stored in a warehouse of the carrier at the place of destination, until the consignee has been advised of
the arrival of the goods and has had reasonable opportunity thereafter to remove them or otherwise dispose of
them.

Art. 1739. In order that the common carrier may be exempted from responsibility, the natural disaster must have
been the proximate and only cause of the loss. However, the common carrier must exercise due diligence to
prevent or minimize loss before, during and after the occurrence of flood, storm or other natural disaster in order
that the common carrier may be exempted from liability for the loss, destruction, or deterioration of the goods.
The same duty is incumbent upon the common carrier in case of an act of the public enemy referred to in Article
1734, No. 2.

Art. 1740. If the common carrier negligently incurs in delay in transporting the goods, a natural disaster shall not
free such carrier from responsibility.

Art. 1741. If the shipper or owner merely contributed to the loss, destruction or deterioration of the goods, the
proximate cause thereof being the negligence of the common carrier, the latter shall be liable in damages, which
however, shall be equitably reduced.

Art. 1742. Even if the loss, destruction, or deterioration of the goods should be caused by the character of the
goods, or the faulty nature of the packing or of the containers, the common carrier must exercise due diligence to
forestall or lessen the loss.

Art. 1743. If through the order of public authority the goods are seized or destroyed, the common carrier is not
responsible, provided said public authority had power to issue the order.

231
Art. 1744. A stipulation between the common carrier and the shipper or owner limiting the liability of the former
for the loss, destruction, or deterioration of the goods to a degree less than extraordinary diligence shall be valid,
provided it be:

(1) In writing, signed by the shipper or owner;

(2) Supported by a valuable consideration other than the service rendered by the common carrier; and

(3) Reasonable, just and not contrary to public policy.

Art. 1745. Any of the following or similar stipulations shall be considered unreasonable, unjust and contrary to
public policy:
(1) That the goods are transported at the risk of the owner or shipper;

(2) That the common carrier will not be liable for any loss, destruction, or deterioration of the goods;

(3) That the common carrier need not observe any diligence in the custody of the goods;

(4) That the common carrier shall exercise a degree of diligence less than that of a good father of a family,
or of a man of ordinary prudence in the vigilance over the movables transported;

(5) That the common carrier shall not be responsible for the acts or omission of his or its employees;

(6) That the common carrier's liability for acts committed by thieves, or of robbers who do not act with
grave or irresistible threat, violence or force, is dispensed with or diminished;

(7) That the common carrier is not responsible for the loss, destruction, or deterioration of goods on
account of the defective condition of the car, vehicle, ship, airplane or other equipment used in the
contract of carriage.

Art. 1746. An agreement limiting the common carrier's liability may be annulled by the shipper or owner if the
common carrier refused to carry the goods unless the former agreed to such stipulation.

Art. 1747. If the common carrier, without just cause, delays the transportation of the goods or changes the
stipulated or usual route, the contract limiting the common carrier's liability cannot be availed of in case of the loss,
destruction, or deterioration of the goods.

Art. 1748. An agreement limiting the common carrier's liability for delay on account of strikes or riots is valid.

Art. 1749. A stipulation that the common carrier's liability is limited to the value of the goods appearing in the bill
of lading, unless the shipper or owner declares a greater value, is binding.

Art. 1750. A contract fixing the sum that may be recovered. by the owner or shipper for the loss, destruction, or
deterioration of the goods is valid, if it is reasonable and just under the circumstances, and has been fairly and
freely agreed upon.

Art. 1751. The fact that the common carrier has no competitor along the line or route, or a part thereof, to which
the contract refers shall be taken into consideration on the question of whether or not a stipulation limiting the
common carrier's liability is reasonable, just and in consonance with public policy.

231
Art. 1752. Even when there is an agreement limiting the liability of the common carrier in the vigilance over the
goods, the common carrier is disputably presumed to have been negligent in case of their loss, destruction or
deterioration.

Art. 1753. The law of the country to which the goods are to be transported shall govern the liability of the common
carrier for their loss, destruction or deterioration.

Art. 1754. The provisions of Articles 1733 to 1753 shall apply to the passenger's baggage which is not in his
personal custody or in that of his employee. As to other baggage, the rules in Articles 1998 and 2000 to 2003
concerning the responsibility of hotel-keepers shall be applicable.

SUBSECTION 3. - Safety of Passengers

Art. 1755. A common carrier is bound to carry the passengers safely as far as human care and foresight can provide,
using the utmost diligence of very cautious persons, with a due regard for all the circumstances.

Art. 1756. In case of death of or injuries to passengers, common carriers are presumed to have been at fault or to
have acted negligently, unless they prove that they observed extraordinary diligence as prescribed in Articles 1733
and 1755.

Art. 1757. The responsibility of a common carrier for the safety of passengers as required in Articles 1733 and 1755
cannot be dispensed with or lessened by stipulation, by the posting of notices, by statements on tickets, or
otherwise.

Art. 1758. When a passenger is carried gratuitously, a stipulation limiting the common carrier's liability for
negligence is valid, but not for wilful acts or gross negligence.

The reduction of fare does not justify any limitation of the common carrier's liability.

Art. 1759. Common carriers are liable for the death of or injuries to passengers through the negligence or wilful
acts of the former's employees, although such employees may have acted beyond the scope of their authority or in
violation of the orders of the common carriers.

This liability of the common carriers does not cease upon proof that they exercised all the diligence of a good
father of a family in the selection and supervision of their employees.

Art. 1760. The common carrier's responsibility prescribed in the preceding article cannot be eliminated or limited
by stipulation, by the posting of notices, by statements on the tickets or otherwise.

Art. 1761. The passenger must observe the diligence of a good father of a family to avoid injury to himself.

Art. 1762. The contributory negligence of the passenger does not bar recovery of damages for his death or injuries,
if the proximate cause thereof is the negligence of the common carrier, but the amount of damages shall be
equitably reduced.

Art. 1763. A common carrier is responsible for injuries suffered by a passenger on account of the wilful acts or
negligence of other passengers or of strangers, if the common carrier's employees through the exercise of the
diligence of a good father of a family could have prevented or stopped the act or omission.

231
 SUBSECTION 4. - Common Provisions

Art. 1764. Damages in cases comprised in this Section shall be awarded in accordance with Title XVIII of this Book,
concerning Damages. Article 2206 shall also apply to the death of a passenger caused by the breach of contract by
a common carrier.

Art. 1765. The Public Service Commission may, on its own motion or on petition of any interested party, after due
hearing, cancel the certificate of public convenience granted to any common carrier that repeatedly fails to comply
with his or its duty to observe extraordinary diligence as prescribed in this Section.

Art. 1766. In all matters not regulated by this Code, the rights and obligations of common carriers shall be governed
by the Code of Commerce and by special laws.

Title IX. - PARTNERSHIP

CHAPTER 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS

Art. 1767. By the contract of partnership two or more persons bind themselves to contribute money, property, or
industry to a common fund, with the intention of dividing the profits among themselves.

Two or more persons may also form a partnership for the exercise of a profession. (1665a)

Art. 1768. The partnership has a judicial personality separate and distinct from that of each of the partners, even in
case of failure to comply with the requirements of Article 1772, first paragraph. (n)

Art. 1769. In determining whether a partnership exists, these rules shall apply:

(1) Except as provided by Article 1825, persons who are not partners as to each other are not partners as
to third persons;

(2) Co-ownership or co-possession does not of itself establish a partnership, whether such-co-owners or
co-possessors do or do not share any profits made by the use of the property;

(3) The sharing of gross returns does not of itself establish a partnership, whether or not the persons
sharing them have a joint or common right or interest in any property from which the returns are derived;

(4) The receipt by a person of a share of the profits of a business is prima facie evidence that he is a
partner in the business, but no such inference shall be drawn if such profits were received in payment:

(a) As a debt by installments or otherwise;

(b) As wages of an employee or rent to a landlord;

(c) As an annuity to a widow or representative of a deceased partner;

(d) As interest on a loan, though the amount of payment vary with the profits of the business;

231
 (e) As the consideration for the sale of a goodwill of a business or other property by installments
or otherwise. (n)

Art. 1770. A partnership must have a lawful object or purpose, and must be established for the common benefit or
interest of the partners.

When an unlawful partnership is dissolved by a judicial decree, the profits shall be confiscated in favor of the State,
without prejudice to the provisions of the Penal Code governing the confiscation of the instruments and effects of a
crime. (1666a)

Art. 1771. A partnership may be constituted in any form, except where immovable property or real rights are
contributed thereto, in which case a public instrument shall be necessary. (1667a)

Art. 1772. Every contract of partnership having a capital of three thousand pesos or more, in money or property,
shall appear in a public instrument, which must be recorded in the Office of the Securities and Exchange
Commission.

Failure to comply with the requirements of the preceding paragraph shall not affect the liability of the partnership
and the members thereof to third persons. (n)

Art. 1773. A contract of partnership is void, whenever immovable property is contributed thereto, if an inventory of
said property is not made, signed by the parties, and attached to the public instrument. (1668a)

Art. 1774. Any immovable property or an interest therein may be acquired in the partnership name. Title so
acquired can be conveyed only in the partnership name. (n)

Art. 1775. Associations and societies, whose articles are kept secret among the members, and wherein any one of
the members may contract in his own name with third persons, shall have no juridical personality, and shall be
governed by the provisions relating to co-ownership. (1669)

Art. 1776. As to its object, a partnership is either universal or particular. As regards the liability of the partners, a
partnership may be general or limited. (1671a)

Art. 1777. A universal partnership may refer to all the present property or to all the profits. (1672)

Art. 1778. A partnership of all present property is that in which the partners contribute all the property which
actually belongs to them to a common fund, with the intention of dividing the same among themselves, as well as
all the profits which they may acquire therewith. (1673)

Art. 1779. In a universal partnership of all present property, the property which belongs to each of the partners at
the time of the constitution of the partnership, becomes the common property of all the partners, as well as all the
profits which they may acquire therewith.

A stipulation for the common enjoyment of any other profits may also be made; but the property which the
partners may acquire subsequently by inheritance, legacy, or donation cannot be included in such stipulation,
except the fruits thereof. (1674a)

Art. 1780. A universal partnership of profits comprises all that the partners may acquire by their industry or work
during the existence of the partnership.

231
Movable or immovable property which each of the partners may possess at the time of the celebration of the
contract shall continue to pertain exclusively to each, only the usufruct passing to the partnership. (1675)

Art. 1781. Articles of universal partnership, entered into without specification of its nature, only constitute a
universal partnership of profits. (1676)

Art. 1782. Persons who are prohibited from giving each other any donation or advantage cannot enter into
universal partnership. (1677)

Art. 1783. A particular partnership has for its object determinate things, their use or fruits, or specific undertaking,
or the exercise of a profession or vocation. (1678)

CHAPTER 2
OBLIGATIONS OF THE PARTNERS

SECTION 1. - Obligations of the Partners Among Themselves

Art. 1784. A partnership begins from the moment of the execution of the contract, unless it is otherwise stipulated.
(1679)

Art. 1785. When a partnership for a fixed term or particular undertaking is continued after the termination of such
term or particular undertaking without any express agreement, the rights and duties of the partners remain the
same as they were at such termination, so far as is consistent with a partnership at will.

A continuation of the business by the partners or such of them as habitually acted therein during the term, without
any settlement or liquidation of the partnership affairs, is prima facie evidence of a continuation of the partnership.
(n)

Art. 1786. Every partner is a debtor of the partnership for whatever he may have promised to contribute thereto.

He shall also be bound for warranty in case of eviction with regard to specific and determinate things which he may
have contributed to the partnership, in the same cases and in the same manner as the vendor is bound with
respect to the vendee. He shall also be liable for the fruits thereof from the time they should have been delivered,
without the need of any demand. (1681a)

Art. 1787. When the capital or a part thereof which a partner is bound to contribute consists of goods, their
appraisal must be made in the manner prescribed in the contract of partnership, and in the absence of stipulation,
it shall be made by experts chosen by the partners, and according to current prices, the subsequent changes
thereof being for account of the partnership. (n)

Art. 1788. A partner who has undertaken to contribute a sum of money and fails to do so becomes a debtor for the
interest and damages from the time he should have complied with his obligation.

The same rule applies to any amount he may have taken from the partnership coffers, and his liability shall begin
from the time he converted the amount to his own use. (1682)

Art. 1789. An industrial partner cannot engage in business for himself, unless the partnership expressly permits him
to do so; and if he should do so, the capitalist partners may either exclude him from the firm or avail themselves of
the benefits which he may have obtained in violation of this provision, with a right to damages in either case. (n)

231
Art. 1790. Unless there is a stipulation to the contrary, the partners shall contribute equal shares to the capital of
the partnership. (n)

Art. 1791. If there is no agreement to the contrary, in case of an imminent loss of the business of the partnership,
any partner who refuses to contribute an additional share to the capital, except an industrial partner, to save the
venture, shall he obliged to sell his interest to the other partners. (n)

Art. 1792. If a partner authorized to manage collects a demandable sum which was owed to him in his own name,
from a person who owed the partnership another sum also demandable, the sum thus collected shall be applied to
the two credits in proportion to their amounts, even though he may have given a receipt for his own credit only;
but should he have given it for the account of the partnership credit, the amount shall be fully applied to the latter.

The provisions of this article are understood to be without prejudice to the right granted to the other debtor by
Article 1252, but only if the personal credit of the partner should be more onerous to him. (1684)

Art. 1793. A partner who has received, in whole or in part, his share of a partnership credit, when the other
partners have not collected theirs, shall be obliged, if the debtor should thereafter become insolvent, to bring to
the partnership capital what he received even though he may have given receipt for his share only. (1685a)

Art. 1794. Every partner is responsible to the partnership for damages suffered by it through his fault, and he
cannot compensate them with the profits and benefits which he may have earned for the partnership by his
industry. However, the courts may equitably lessen this responsibility if through the partner's extraordinary efforts
in other activities of the partnership, unusual profits have been realized. (1686a)

Art. 1795. The risk of specific and determinate things, which are not fungible, contributed to the partnership so
that only their use and fruits may be for the common benefit, shall be borne by the partner who owns them.

If the things contribute are fungible, or cannot be kept without deteriorating, or if they were contributed to be
sold, the risk shall be borne by the partnership. In the absence of stipulation, the risk of the things brought and
appraised in the inventory, shall also be borne by the partnership, and in such case the claim shall be limited to the
value at which they were appraised. (1687)

Art. 1796. The partnership shall be responsible to every partner for the amounts he may have disbursed on behalf
of the partnership and for the corresponding interest, from the time the expense are made; it shall also answer to
each partner for the obligations he may have contracted in good faith in the interest of the partnership business,
and for risks in consequence of its management. (1688a)

Art. 1797. The losses and profits shall be distributed in conformity with the agreement. If only the share of each
partner in the profits has been agreed upon, the share of each in the losses shall be in the same proportion.

In the absence of stipulation, the share of each partner in the profits and losses shall be in proportion to what he
may have contributed, but the industrial partner shall not be liable for the losses. As for the profits, the industrial
partner shall receive such share as may be just and equitable under the circumstances. If besides his services he
has contributed capital, he shall also receive a share in the profits in proportion to his capital. (1689a)

Art. 1798. If the partners have agreed to intrust to a third person the designation of the share of each one in the
profits and losses, such designation may be impugned only when it is manifestly inequitable. In no case may a
partner who has begun to execute the decision of the third person, or who has not impugned the same within a
period of three months from the time he had knowledge thereof, complain of such decision.

The designation of losses and profits cannot be intrusted to one of the partners. (1690)

231
Art. 1799. A stipulation which excludes one or more partners from any share in the profits or losses is void. (1691)

Art. 1800. The partner who has been appointed manager in the articles of partnership may execute all acts of
administration despite the opposition of his partners, unless he should act in bad faith; and his power is irrevocable
without just or lawful cause. The vote of the partners representing the controlling interest shall be necessary for
such revocation of power.

A power granted after the partnership has been constituted may be revoked at any time. (1692a)

Art. 1801. If two or more partners have been intrusted with the management of the partnership without
specification of their respective duties, or without a stipulation that one of them shall not act without the consent
of all the others, each one may separately execute all acts of administration, but if any of them should oppose the
acts of the others, the decision of the majority shall prevail. In case of a tie, the matter shall be decided by the
partners owning the controlling interest. (1693a)

Art. 1802. In case it should have been stipulated that none of the managing partners shall act without the consent
of the others, the concurrence of all shall be necessary for the validity of the acts, and the absence or disability of
any one of them cannot be alleged, unless there is imminent danger of grave or irreparable injury to the
partnership. (1694)

Art. 1803. When the manner of management has not been agreed upon, the following rules shall be observed:

(1) All the partners shall be considered agents and whatever any one of them may do alone shall bind the
partnership, without prejudice to the provisions of Article 1801.

(2) None of the partners may, without the consent of the others, make any important alteration in the
immovable property of the partnership, even if it may be useful to the partnership. But if the refusal of
consent by the other partners is manifestly prejudicial to the interest of the partnership, the court's
intervention may be sought. (1695a)

Art. 1804. Every partner may associate another person with him in his share, but the associate shall not be
admitted into the partnership without the consent of all the other partners, even if the partner having an associate
should be a manager. (1696)

Art. 1805. The partnership books shall be kept, subject to any agreement between the partners, at the principal
place of business of the partnership, and every partner shall at any reasonable hour have access to and may inspect
and copy any of them. (n)

Art. 1806. Partners shall render on demand true and full information of all things affecting the partnership to any
partner or the legal representative of any deceased partner or of any partner under legal disability. (n)

Art. 1807. Every partner must account to the partnership for any benefit, and hold as trustee for it any profits
derived by him without the consent of the other partners from any transaction connected with the formation,
conduct, or liquidation of the partnership or from any use by him of its property. (n)

Art. 1808. The capitalist partners cannot engage for their own account in any operation which is of the kind of
business in which the partnership is engaged, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary.

Any capitalist partner violating this prohibition shall bring to the common funds any profits accruing to him from his
transactions, and shall personally bear all the losses. (n)

231
Art. 1809. Any partner shall have the right to a formal account as to partnership affairs:

(1) If he is wrongfully excluded from the partnership business or possession of its property by his co-
partners;

(2) If the right exists under the terms of any agreement;

(3) As provided by article 1807;

(4) Whenever other circumstances render it just and reasonable. (n)

SECTION 2. - Property Rights of a Partner

Art. 1810. The property rights of a partner are:

(1) His rights in specific partnership property;

(2) His interest in the partnership; and

(3) His right to participate in the management. (n)

Art. 1811. A partner is co-owner with his partners of specific partnership property.

The incidents of this co-ownership are such that:

(1) A partner, subject to the provisions of this Title and to any agreement between the partners, has an
equal right with his partners to possess specific partnership property for partnership purposes; but he has
no right to possess such property for any other purpose without the consent of his partners;

(2) A partner's right in specific partnership property is not assignable except in connection with the
assignment of rights of all the partners in the same property;

(3) A partner's right in specific partnership property is not subject to attachment or execution, except on a
claim against the partnership. When partnership property is attached for a partnership debt the partners,
or any of them, or the representatives of a deceased partner, cannot claim any right under the homestead
or exemption laws;

(4) A partner's right in specific partnership property is not subject to legal support under Article 291. (n)

Art. 1812. A partner's interest in the partnership is his share of the profits and surplus. (n)

Art. 1813. A conveyance by a partner of his whole interest in the partnership does not of itself dissolve the
partnership, or, as against the other partners in the absence of agreement, entitle the assignee, during the
continuance of the partnership, to interfere in the management or administration of the partnership business or
affairs, or to require any information or account of partnership transactions, or to inspect the partnership books;
but it merely entitles the assignee to receive in accordance with his contract the profits to which the assigning
partner would otherwise be entitled. However, in case of fraud in the management of the partnership, the assignee
may avail himself of the usual remedies.

In case of a dissolution of the partnership, the assignee is entitled to receive his assignor's interest and may require
an account from the date only of the last account agreed to by all the partners. (n)

231
Art. 1814. Without prejudice to the preferred rights of partnership creditors under Article 1827, on due application
to a competent court by any judgment creditor of a partner, the court which entered the judgment, or any other
court, may charge the interest of the debtor partner with payment of the unsatisfied amount of such judgment
debt with interest thereon; and may then or later appoint a receiver of his share of the profits, and of any other
money due or to fall due to him in respect of the partnership, and make all other orders, directions, accounts and
inquiries which the debtor partner might have made, or which the circumstances of the case may require.

The interest charged may be redeemed at any time before foreclosure, or in case of a sale being directed by the
court, may be purchased without thereby causing a dissolution:

(1) With separate property, by any one or more of the partners; or

(2) With partnership property, by any one or more of the partners with the consent of all the partners
whose interests are not so charged or sold.

Nothing in this Title shall be held to deprive a partner of his right, if any, under the exemption laws, as regards his
interest in the partnership. (n)

SECTION 3. - Obligations of the Partners

With Regard to Third Persons

Art. 1815. Every partnership shall operate under a firm name, which may or may not include the name of one or
more of the partners.

Those who, not being members of the partnership, include their names in the firm name, shall be subject to the
liability of a partner. (n)

Art. 1816. All partners, including industrial ones, shall be liable pro rata with all their property and after all the
partnership assets have been exhausted, for the contracts which may be entered into in the name and for the
account of the partnership, under its signature and by a person authorized to act for the partnership. However, any
partner may enter into a separate obligation to perform a partnership contract. (n)

Art. 1817. Any stipulation against the liability laid down in the preceding article shall be void, except as among the
partners. (n)

Art. 1818. Every partner is an agent of the partnership for the purpose of its business, and the act of every partner,
including the execution in the partnership name of any instrument, for apparently carrying on in the usual way the
business of the partnership of which he is a member binds the partnership, unless the partner so acting has in fact
no authority to act for the partnership in the particular matter, and the person with whom he is dealing has
knowledge of the fact that he has no such authority.

An act of a partner which is not apparently for the carrying on of business of the partnership in the usual way does
not bind the partnership unless authorized by the other partners.

Except when authorized by the other partners or unless they have abandoned the business, one or more but less
than all the partners have no authority to:

(1) Assign the partnership property in trust for creditors or on the assignee's promise to pay the debts of
the partnership;

231
 (2) Dispose of the good-will of the business;

(3) Do any other act which would make it impossible to carry on the ordinary business of a partnership;

(4) Confess a judgment;

(5) Enter into a compromise concerning a partnership claim or liability;

(6) Submit a partnership claim or liability to arbitration;

(7) Renounce a claim of the partnership.

No act of a partner in contravention of a restriction on authority shall bind the partnership to persons having
knowledge of the restriction. (n)

Art. 1819. Where title to real property is in the partnership name, any partner may convey title to such property by
a conveyance executed in the partnership name; but the partnership may recover such property unless the
partner's act binds the partnership under the provisions of the first paragraph of article 1818, or unless such
property has been conveyed by the grantee or a person claiming through such grantee to a holder for value
without knowledge that the partner, in making the conveyance, has exceeded his authority.

Where title to real property is in the name of the partnership, a conveyance executed by a partner, in his own
name, passes the equitable interest of the partnership, provided the act is one within the authority of the partner
under the provisions of the first paragraph of Article 1818.

Where title to real property is in the name of one or more but not all the partners, and the record does not disclose
the right of the partnership, the partners in whose name the title stands may convey title to such property, but the
partnership may recover such property if the partners' act does not bind the partnership under the provisions of
the first paragraph of Article 1818, unless the purchaser or his assignee, is a holder for value, without knowledge.

Where the title to real property is in the name of one or more or all the partners, or in a third person in trust for
the partnership, a conveyance executed by a partner in the partnership name, or in his own name, passes the
equitable interest of the partnership, provided the act is one within the authority of the partner under the
provisions of the first paragraph of Article 1818.

Where the title to real property is in the name of all the partners a conveyance executed by all the partners passes
all their rights in such property. (n)

Art. 1820. An admission or representation made by any partner concerning partnership affairs within the scope of
his authority in accordance with this Title is evidence against the partnership. (n)

Art. 1821. Notice to any partner of any matter relating to partnership affairs, and the knowledge of the partner
acting in the particular matter, acquired while a partner or then present to his mind, and the knowledge of any
other partner who reasonably could and should have communicated it to the acting partner, operate as notice to or
knowledge of the partnership, except in the case of fraud on the partnership, committed by or with the consent of
that partner. (n)

Art. 1822. Where, by any wrongful act or omission of any partner acting in the ordinary course of the business of
the partnership or with the authority of co-partners, loss or injury is caused to any person, not being a partner in
the partnership, or any penalty is incurred, the partnership is liable therefor to the same extent as the partner so
acting or omitting to act. (n)

231
Art. 1823. The partnership is bound to make good the loss:

(1) Where one partner acting within the scope of his apparent authority receives money or property of a
third person and misapplies it; and

(2) Where the partnership in the course of its business receives money or property of a third person and
the money or property so received is misapplied by any partner while it is in the custody of the
partnership. (n)

Art. 1824. All partners are liable solitarily with the partnership for everything chargeable to the partnership under
Articles 1822 and 1823. (n)

Art. 1825. When a person, by words spoken or written or by conduct, represents himself, or consents to another
representing him to anyone, as a partner in an existing partnership or with one or more persons not actual
partners, he is liable to any such persons to whom such representation has been made, who has, on the faith of
such representation, given credit to the actual or apparent partnership, and if he has made such representation or
consented to its being made in a public manner he is liable to such person, whether the representation has or has
not been made or communicated to such person so giving credit by or with the knowledge of the apparent partner
making the representation or consenting to its being made:

(1) When a partnership liability results, he is liable as though he were an actual member of the
partnership;

(2) When no partnership liability results, he is liable pro rata with the other persons, if any, so consenting
to the contract or representation as to incur liability, otherwise separately.

When a person has been thus represented to be a partner in an existing partnership, or with one or more persons
not actual partners, he is an agent of the persons consenting to such representation to bind them to the same
extent and in the same manner as though he were a partner in fact, with respect to persons who rely upon the
representation. When all the members of the existing partnership consent to the representation, a partnership act
or obligation results; but in all other cases it is the joint act or obligation of the person acting and the persons
consenting to the representation. (n)

Art. 1826. A person admitted as a partner into an existing partnership is liable for all the obligations of the
partnership arising before his admission as though he had been a partner when such obligations were incurred,
except that this liability shall be satisfied only out of partnership property, unless there is a stipulation to the
contrary. (n)

Art. 1827. The creditors of the partnership shall be preferred to those of each partner as regards the partnership
property. Without prejudice to this right, the private creditors of each partner may ask the attachment and public
sale of the share of the latter in the partnership assets. (n)

CHAPTER 3
DISSOLUTION AND WINDING UP

Art. 1828. The dissolution of a partnership is the change in the relation of the partners caused by any partner
ceasing to be associated in the carrying on as distinguished from the winding up of the business. (n)

231
Art. 1829. On dissolution the partnership is not terminated, but continues until the winding up of partnership
affairs is completed. (n)

Art. 1830. Dissolution is caused:

(1) Without violation of the agreement between the partners:

(a) By the termination of the definite term or particular undertaking specified in the agreement;

(b) By the express will of any partner, who must act in good faith, when no definite term or
particular is specified;

(c) By the express will of all the partners who have not assigned their interests or suffered them
to be charged for their separate debts, either before or after the termination of any specified
term or particular undertaking;

(d) By the expulsion of any partner from the business bona fide in accordance with such a power
conferred by the agreement between the partners;

(2) In contravention of the agreement between the partners, where the circumstances do not permit a
dissolution under any other provision of this article, by the express will of any partner at any time;

(3) By any event which makes it unlawful for the business of the partnership to be carried on or for the
members to carry it on in partnership;

(4) When a specific thing which a partner had promised to contribute to the partnership, perishes before
the delivery; in any case by the loss of the thing, when the partner who contributed it having reserved the
ownership thereof, has only transferred to the partnership the use or enjoyment of the same; but the
partnership shall not be dissolved by the loss of the thing when it occurs after the partnership has
acquired the ownership thereof;

(5) By the death of any partner;

(6) By the insolvency of any partner or of the partnership;

(7) By the civil interdiction of any partner;

(8) By decree of court under the following article. (1700a and 1701a)

Art. 1831. On application by or for a partner the court shall decree a dissolution whenever:
(1) A partner has been declared insane in any judicial proceeding or is shown to be of unsound mind;

(2) A partner becomes in any other way incapable of performing his part of the partnership contract;

(3) A partner has been guilty of such conduct as tends to affect prejudicially the carrying on of the
business;

(4) A partner wilfully or persistently commits a breach of the partnership agreement, or otherwise so
conducts himself in matters relating to the partnership business that it is not reasonably practicable to
carry on the business in partnership with him;

231
 (5) The business of the partnership can only be carried on at a loss;

(6) Other circumstances render a dissolution equitable.

On the application of the purchaser of a partner's interest under Article 1813 or 1814:
(1) After the termination of the specified term or particular undertaking;

(2) At any time if the partnership was a partnership at will when the interest was assigned or when the
charging order was issued. (n)

Art. 1832. Except so far as may be necessary to wind up partnership affairs or to complete transactions begun but
not then finished, dissolution terminates all authority of any partner to act for the partnership:
(1) With respect to the partners:
(a) When the dissolution is not by the act, insolvency or death of a partner; or

(b) When the dissolution is by such act, insolvency or death of a partner, in cases where article
1833 so requires;

(2) With respect to persons not partners, as declared in article 1834. (n)
Art. 1833. Where the dissolution is caused by the act, death or insolvency of a partner, each partner is liable to his
co-partners for his share of any liability created by any partner acting for the partnership as if the partnership had
not been dissolved unless:
(1) The dissolution being by act of any partner, the partner acting for the partnership had knowledge of
the dissolution; or

(2) The dissolution being by the death or insolvency of a partner, the partner acting for the partnership
had knowledge or notice of the death or insolvency.

Art. 1834. After dissolution, a partner can bind the partnership, except as provided in the third paragraph of this
article:
(1) By any act appropriate for winding up partnership affairs or completing transactions unfinished at
dissolution;

(2) By any transaction which would bind the partnership if dissolution had not taken place, provided the
other party to the transaction:

(a) Had extended credit to the partnership prior to dissolution and had no knowledge or notice of
the dissolution; or

(b) Though he had not so extended credit, had nevertheless known of the partnership prior to
dissolution, and, having no knowledge or notice of dissolution, the fact of dissolution had not
been advertised in a newspaper of general circulation in the place (or in each place if more than
one) at which the partnership business was regularly carried on.

The liability of a partner under the first paragraph, No. 2, shall be satisfied out of partnership assets alone when
such partner had been prior to dissolution:
(1) Unknown as a partner to the person with whom the contract is made; and

(2) So far unknown and inactive in partnership affairs that the business reputation of the partnership could
not be said to have been in any degree due to his connection with it.

231
The partnership is in no case bound by any act of a partner after dissolution:
(1) Where the partnership is dissolved because it is unlawful to carry on the business, unless the act is
appropriate for winding up partnership affairs; or

(2) Where the partner has become insolvent; or

(3) Where the partner has no authority to wind up partnership affairs; except by a transaction with one
who:

(a) Had extended credit to the partnership prior to dissolution and had no knowledge or notice of
his want of authority; or

(b) Had not extended credit to the partnership prior to dissolution, and, having no knowledge or
notice of his want of authority, the fact of his want of authority has not been advertised in the
manner provided for advertising the fact of dissolution in the first paragraph, No. 2 (b).

Nothing in this article shall affect the liability under Article 1825 of any person who, after dissolution, represents
himself or consents to another representing him as a partner in a partnership engaged in carrying business. (n)

Art. 1835. The dissolution of the partnership does not of itself discharge the existing liability of any partner.

A partner is discharged from any existing liability upon dissolution of the partnership by an agreement to that effect
between himself, the partnership creditor and the person or partnership continuing the business; and such
agreement may be inferred from the course of dealing between the creditor having knowledge of the dissolution
and the person or partnership continuing the business.

The individual property of a deceased partner shall be liable for all obligations of the partnership incurred while he
was a partner, but subject to the prior payment of his separate debts. (n)

Art. 1836. Unless otherwise agreed, the partners who have not wrongfully dissolved the partnership or the legal
representative of the last surviving partner, not insolvent, has the right to wind up the partnership affairs, provided,
however, that any partner, his legal representative or his assignee, upon cause shown, may obtain winding up by
the court. (n)

Art. 1837. When dissolution is caused in any way, except in contravention of the partnership agreement, each
partner, as against his co-partners and all persons claiming through them in respect of their interests in the
partnership, unless otherwise agreed, may have the partnership property applied to discharge its liabilities, and the
surplus applied to pay in cash the net amount owing to the respective partners. But if dissolution is caused by
expulsion of a partner, bona fide under the partnership agreement and if the expelled partner is discharged from all
partnership liabilities, either by payment or agreement under the second paragraph of Article 1835, he shall receive
in cash only the net amount due him from the partnership.

When dissolution is caused in contravention of the partnership agreement the rights of the partners shall be as
follows:

(1) Each partner who has not caused dissolution wrongfully shall have:

(a) All the rights specified in the first paragraph of this article, and

(b) The right, as against each partner who has caused the dissolution wrongfully, to damages
breach of the agreement.

231
 (2) The partners who have not caused the dissolution wrongfully, if they all desire to continue the business
in the same name either by themselves or jointly with others, may do so, during the agreed term for the
partnership and for that purpose may possess the partnership property, provided they secure the payment
by bond approved by the court, or pay any partner who has caused the dissolution wrongfully, the value of
his interest in the partnership at the dissolution, less any damages recoverable under the second
paragraph, No. 1 (b) of this article, and in like manner indemnify him against all present or future
partnership liabilities.

(3) A partner who has caused the dissolution wrongfully shall have:

(a) If the business is not continued under the provisions of the second paragraph, No. 2, all the
rights of a partner under the first paragraph, subject to liability for damages in the second
paragraph, No. 1 (b), of this article.

(b) If the business is continued under the second paragraph, No. 2, of this article, the right as
against his co-partners and all claiming through them in respect of their interests in the
partnership, to have the value of his interest in the partnership, less any damage caused to his co-
partners by the dissolution, ascertained and paid to him in cash, or the payment secured by a
bond approved by the court, and to be released from all existing liabilities of the partnership; but
in ascertaining the value of the partner's interest the value of the good-will of the business shall
not be considered. (n)

Art. 1838. Where a partnership contract is rescinded on the ground of the fraud or misrepresentation of one of the
parties thereto, the party entitled to rescind is, without prejudice to any other right, entitled:
(1) To a lien on, or right of retention of, the surplus of the partnership property after satisfying the
partnership liabilities to third persons for any sum of money paid by him for the purchase of an interest in
the partnership and for any capital or advances contributed by him;

(2) To stand, after all liabilities to third persons have been satisfied, in the place of the creditors of the
partnership for any payments made by him in respect of the partnership liabilities; and

(3) To be indemnified by the person guilty of the fraud or making the representation against all debts and
liabilities of the partnership. (n)

Art. 1839. In settling accounts between the partners after dissolution, the following rules shall be observed, subject
to any agreement to the contrary:
(1) The assets of the partnership are:
(a) The partnership property,

(b) The contributions of the partners necessary for the payment of all the liabilities specified in
No. 2.

(2) The liabilities of the partnership shall rank in order of payment, as follows:

(a) Those owing to creditors other than partners,

(b) Those owing to partners other than for capital and profits,

(c) Those owing to partners in respect of capital,

(d) Those owing to partners in respect of profits.

231
 (3) The assets shall be applied in the order of their declaration in No. 1 of this article to the satisfaction of
the liabilities.

(4) The partners shall contribute, as provided by article 1797, the amount necessary to satisfy the
liabilities.

(5) An assignee for the benefit of creditors or any person appointed by the court shall have the right to
enforce the contributions specified in the preceding number.

(6) Any partner or his legal representative shall have the right to enforce the contributions specified in No.
4, to the extent of the amount which he has paid in excess of his share of the liability.

(7) The individual property of a deceased partner shall be liable for the contributions specified in No. 4.

(8) When partnership property and the individual properties of the partners are in possession of a court
for distribution, partnership creditors shall have priority on partnership property and separate creditors on
individual property, saving the rights of lien or secured creditors.

(9) Where a partner has become insolvent or his estate is insolvent, the claims against his separate
property shall rank in the following order:

(a) Those owing to separate creditors;

(b) Those owing to partnership creditors;

(c) Those owing to partners by way of contribution. (n)

Art. 1840. In the following cases creditors of the dissolved partnership are also creditors of the person or
partnership continuing the business:
(1) When any new partner is admitted into an existing partnership, or when any partner retires and
assigns (or the representative of the deceased partner assigns) his rights in partnership property to two or
more of the partners, or to one or more of the partners and one or more third persons, if the business is
continued without liquidation of the partnership affairs;

(2) When all but one partner retire and assign (or the representative of a deceased partner assigns) their
rights in partnership property to the remaining partner, who continues the business without liquidation of
partnership affairs, either alone or with others;

(3) When any partner retires or dies and the business of the dissolved partnership is continued as set forth
in Nos. 1 and 2 of this article, with the consent of the retired partners or the representative of the
deceased partner, but without any assignment of his right in partnership property;

(4) When all the partners or their representatives assign their rights in partnership property to one or
more third persons who promise to pay the debts and who continue the business of the dissolved
partnership;

(5) When any partner wrongfully causes a dissolution and the remaining partners continue the business
under the provisions of article 1837, second paragraph, No. 2, either alone or with others, and without
liquidation of the partnership affairs;

231
 (6) When a partner is expelled and the remaining partners continue the business either alone or with
others without liquidation of the partnership affairs.

The liability of a third person becoming a partner in the partnership continuing the business, under this article, to
the creditors of the dissolved partnership shall be satisfied out of the partnership property only, unless there is a
stipulation to the contrary.

When the business of a partnership after dissolution is continued under any conditions set forth in this article the
creditors of the dissolved partnership, as against the separate creditors of the retiring or deceased partner or the
representative of the deceased partner, have a prior right to any claim of the retired partner or the representative
of the deceased partner against the person or partnership continuing the business, on account of the retired or
deceased partner's interest in the dissolved partnership or on account of any consideration promised for such
interest or for his right in partnership property.

Nothing in this article shall be held to modify any right of creditors to set aside any assignment on the ground of
fraud.

The use by the person or partnership continuing the business of the partnership name, or the name of a deceased
partner as part thereof, shall not of itself make the individual property of the deceased partner liable for any debts
contracted by such person or partnership. (n)

Art. 1841. When any partner retires or dies, and the business is continued under any of the conditions set forth in
the preceding article, or in Article 1837, second paragraph, No. 2, without any settlement of accounts as between
him or his estate and the person or partnership continuing the business, unless otherwise agreed, he or his legal
representative as against such person or partnership may have the value of his interest at the date of dissolution
ascertained, and shall receive as an ordinary creditor an amount equal to the value of his interest in the dissolved
partnership with interest, or, at his option or at the option of his legal representative, in lieu of interest, the profits
attributable to the use of his right in the property of the dissolved partnership; provided that the creditors of the
dissolved partnership as against the separate creditors, or the representative of the retired or deceased partner,
shall have priority on any claim arising under this article, as provided Article 1840, third paragraph. (n)

Art. 1842. The right to an account of his interest shall accrue to any partner, or his legal representative as against
the winding up partners or the surviving partners or the person or partnership continuing the business, at the date
of dissolution, in the absence of any agreement to the contrary. (n)

CHAPTER 4
LIMITED PARTNERSHIP (n)

Art. 1843. A limited partnership is one formed by two or more persons under the provisions of the following article,
having as members one or more general partners and one or more limited partners. The limited partners as such
shall not be bound by the obligations of the partnership.

Art. 1844. Two or more persons desiring to form a limited partnership shall:

(1) Sign and swear to a certificate, which shall state -

(a) The name of the partnership, adding thereto the word "Limited";

231
 (b) The character of the business;

(c) The location of the principal place of business;

(d) The name and place of residence of each member, general and limited partners being
respectively designated;

(e) The term for which the partnership is to exist;

(f) The amount of cash and a description of and the agreed value of the other property
contributed by each limited partner;

(g) The additional contributions, if any, to be made by each limited partner and the times at
which or events on the happening of which they shall be made;

(h) The time, if agreed upon, when the contribution of each limited partner is to be returned;

(i) The share of the profits or the other compensation by way of income which each limited
partner shall receive by reason of his contribution;

(j) The right, if given, of a limited partner to substitute an assignee as contributor in his place, and
the terms and conditions of the substitution;

(k) The right, if given, of the partners to admit additional limited partners;

(l) The right, if given, of one or more of the limited partners to priority over other limited
partners, as to contributions or as to compensation by way of income, and the nature of such
priority;

(m) The right, if given, of the remaining general partner or partners to continue the business on
the death, retirement, civil interdiction, insanity or insolvency of a general partner; and

(n) The right, if given, of a limited partner to demand and receive property other than cash in
return for his contribution.

(2) File for record the certificate in the Office of the Securities and Exchange Commission.
A limited partnership is formed if there has been substantial compliance in good faith with the foregoing
requirements.

Art. 1845. The contributions of a limited partner may be cash or property, but not services.

Art. 1846. The surname of a limited partner shall not appear in the partnership name unless:

(1) It is also the surname of a general partner, or

(2) Prior to the time when the limited partner became such, the business has been carried on under a
name in which his surname appeared.

231
A limited partner whose surname appears in a partnership name contrary to the provisions of the first paragraph is
liable as a general partner to partnership creditors who extend credit to the partnership without actual knowledge
that he is not a general partner.

Art. 1847. If the certificate contains a false statement, one who suffers loss by reliance on such statement may hold
liable any party to the certificate who knew the statement to be false:

(1) At the time he signed the certificate, or

(2) Subsequently, but within a sufficient time before the statement was relied upon to enable him to
cancel or amend the certificate, or to file a petition for its cancellation or amendment as provided in
Article 1865.

Art. 1848. A limited partner shall not become liable as a general partner unless, in addition to the exercise of his
rights and powers as a limited partner, he takes part in the control of the business.

Art. 1849. After the formation of a lifted partnership, additional limited partners may be admitted upon filing an
amendment to the original certificate in accordance with the requirements of Article 1865.

Art. 1850. A general partner shall have all the rights and powers and be subject to all the restrictions and liabilities
of a partner in a partnership without limited partners. However, without the written consent or ratification of the
specific act by all the limited partners, a general partner or all of the general partners have no authority to:

(1) Do any act in contravention of the certificate;

(2) Do any act which would make it impossible to carry on the ordinary business of the partnership;

(3) Confess a judgment against the partnership;

(4) Possess partnership property, or assign their rights in specific partnership property, for other than a
partnership purpose;

(5) Admit a person as a general partner;

(6) Admit a person as a limited partner, unless the right so to do is given in the certificate;

(7) Continue the business with partnership property on the death, retirement, insanity, civil interdiction or
insolvency of a general partner, unless the right so to do is given in the certificate.

Art. 1851. A limited partner shall have the same rights as a general partner to:
(1) Have the partnership books kept at the principal place of business of the partnership, and at a
reasonable hour to inspect and copy any of them;

(2) Have on demand true and full information of all things affecting the partnership, and a formal account
of partnership affairs whenever circumstances render it just and reasonable; and

(3) Have dissolution and winding up by decree of court.

A limited partner shall have the right to receive a share of the profits or other compensation by way of income, and
to the return of his contribution as provided in Articles 1856 and 1857.

231
Art. 1852. Without prejudice to the provisions of Article 1848, a person who has contributed to the capital of a
business conducted by a person or partnership erroneously believing that he has become a limited partner in a
limited partnership, is not, by reason of his exercise of the rights of a limited partner, a general partner with the
person or in the partnership carrying on the business, or bound by the obligations of such person or partnership,
provided that on ascertaining the mistake he promptly renounces his interest in the profits of the business, or
other compensation by way of income.

Art. 1853. A person may be a general partner and a limited partner in the same partnership at the same time,
provided that this fact shall be stated in the certificate provided for in Article 1844.

A person who is a general, and also at the same time a limited partner, shall have all the rights and powers and be
subject to all the restrictions of a general partner; except that, in respect to his contribution, he shall have the
rights against the other members which he would have had if he were not also a general partner.

Art. 1854. A limited partner also may loan money to and transact other business with the partnership, and, unless
he is also a general partner, receive on account of resulting claims against the partnership, with general creditors, a
pro rata share of the assets. No limited partner shall in respect to any such claim:

(1) Receive or hold as collateral security and partnership property, or

(2) Receive from a general partner or the partnership any payment, conveyance, or release from liability if
at the time the assets of the partnership are not sufficient to discharge partnership liabilities to persons
not claiming as general or limited partners.

The receiving of collateral security, or payment, conveyance, or release in violation of the foregoing provisions is a
fraud on the creditors of the partnership.

Art. 1855. Where there are several limited partners the members may agree that one or more of the limited
partners shall have a priority over other limited partners as to the return of their contributions, as to their
compensation by way of income, or as to any other matter. If such an agreement is made it shall be stated in the
certificate, and in the absence of such a statement all the limited partners shall stand upon equal footing.

Art. 1856. A limited partner may receive from the partnership the share of the profits or the compensation by way
of income stipulated for in the certificate; provided that after such payment is made, whether from property of the
partnership or that of a general partner, the partnership assets are in excess of all liabilities of the partnership
except liabilities to limited partners on account of their contributions and to general partners.

Art. 1857. A limited partner shall not receive from a general partner or out of partnership property any part of his
contributions until:

(1) All liabilities of the partnership, except liabilities to general partners and to limited partners on account
of their contributions, have been paid or there remains property of the partnership sufficient to pay them;

(2) The consent of all members is had, unless the return of the contribution may be rightfully demanded
under the provisions of the second paragraph; and

(3) The certificate is cancelled or so amended as to set forth the withdrawal or reduction.

Subject to the provisions of the first paragraph, a limited partner may rightfully demand the return of his
contribution:
(1) On the dissolution of a partnership; or

231
 (2) When the date specified in the certificate for its return has arrived, or

(3) After he has six months' notice in writing to all other members, if no time is specified in the certificate,
either for the return of the contribution or for the dissolution of the partnership.

In the absence of any statement in the certificate to the contrary or the consent of all members, a limited partner,
irrespective of the nature of his contribution, has only the right to demand and receive cash in return for his
contribution.

A limited partner may have the partnership dissolved and its affairs wound up when:

(1) He rightfully but unsuccessfully demands the return of his contribution, or

(2) The other liabilities of the partnership have not been paid, or the partnership property is insufficient
for their payment as required by the first paragraph, No. 1, and the limited partner would otherwise be
entitled to the return of his contribution.

Art. 1858. A limited partner is liable to the partnership:

(1) For the difference between his contribution as actually made and that stated in the certificate as
having been made; and

(2) For any unpaid contribution which he agreed in the certificate to make in the future at the time and on
the conditions stated in the certificate.

A limited partner holds as trustee for the partnership:

(1) Specific property stated in the certificate as contributed by him, but which was not contributed or
which has been wrongfully returned, and

(2) Money or other property wrongfully paid or conveyed to him on account of his contribution.

The liabilities of a limited partner as set forth in this article can be waived or compromised only by the consent of
all members; but a waiver or compromise shall not affect the right of a creditor of a partnership who extended
credit or whose claim arose after the filing and before a cancellation or amendment of the certificate, to enforce
such liabilities.

When a contributor has rightfully received the return in whole or in part of the capital of his contribution, he is
nevertheless liable to the partnership for any sum, not in excess of such return with interest, necessary to discharge
its liabilities to all creditors who extended credit or whose claims arose before such return.

Art. 1859. A limited partner's interest is assignable.

A substituted limited partner is a person admitted to all the rights of a limited partner who has died or has assigned
his interest in a partnership.

An assignee, who does not become a substituted limited partner, has no right to require any information or
account of the partnership transactions or to inspect the partnership books; he is only entitled to receive the share
of the profits or other compensation by way of income, or the return of his contribution, to which his assignor
would otherwise be entitled.

231
An assignee shall have the right to become a substituted limited partner if all the members consent thereto or if
the assignor, being thereunto empowered by the certificate, gives the assignee that right.

An assignee becomes a substituted limited partner when the certificate is appropriately amended in accordance
with Article 1865.

The substituted limited partner has all the rights and powers, and is subject to all the restrictions and liabilities of
his assignor, except those liabilities of which he was ignorant at the time he became a limited partner and which
could not be ascertained from the certificate.

The substitution of the assignee as a limited partner does not release the assignor from liability to the partnership
under Articles 1847 and 1848.

Art. 1860. The retirement, death, insolvency, insanity or civil interdiction of a general partner dissolves the
partnership, unless the business is continued by the remaining general partners:

(1) Under a right so to do stated in the certificate, or

(2) With the consent of all members.

Art. 1861. On the death of a limited partner his executor or administrator shall have all the rights of a limited
partner for the purpose of setting his estate, and such power as the deceased had to constitute his assignee a
substituted limited partner.

The estate of a deceased limited partner shall be liable for all his liabilities as a limited partner.

Art. 1862. On due application to a court of competent jurisdiction by any creditor of a limited partner, the court
may charge the interest of the indebted limited partner with payment of the unsatisfied amount of such claim, and
may appoint a receiver, and make all other orders, directions and inquiries which the circumstances of the case
may require.

The interest may be redeemed with the separate property of any general partner, but may not be redeemed with
partnership property.

The remedies conferred by the first paragraph shall not be deemed exclusive of others which may exist.

Nothing in this Chapter shall be held to deprive a limited partner of his statutory exemption.

Art. 1863. In setting accounts after dissolution the liabilities of the partnership shall be entitled to payment in the
following order:

(1) Those to creditors, in the order of priority as provided by law, except those to limited partners on
account of their contributions, and to general partners;

(2) Those to limited partners in respect to their share of the profits and other compensation by way of
income on their contributions;

(3) Those to limited partners in respect to the capital of their contributions;

(4) Those to general partners other than for capital and profits;

231
 (5) Those to general partners in respect to profits;

(6) Those to general partners in respect to capital.

Subject to any statement in the certificate or to subsequent agreement, limited partners share in the partnership
assets in respect to their claims for capital, and in respect to their claims for profits or for compensation by way of
income on their contribution respectively, in proportion to the respective amounts of such claims.

Art. 1864. The certificate shall be cancelled when the partnership is dissolved or all limited partners cease to be
such.

A certificate shall be amended when:

(1) There is a change in the name of the partnership or in the amount or character of the contribution of
any limited partner;

(2) A person is substituted as a limited partner;

(3) An additional limited partner is admitted;

(4) A person is admitted as a general partner;

(5) A general partner retires, dies, becomes insolvent or insane, or is sentenced to civil interdiction and the
business is continued under Article 1860;

(6) There is a change in the character of the business of the partnership;

(7) There is a false or erroneous statement in the certificate;

(8) There is a change in the time as stated in the certificate for the dissolution of the partnership or for the
return of a contribution;

(9) A time is fixed for the dissolution of the partnership, or the return of a contribution, no time having
been specified in the certificate, or

(10) The members desire to make a change in any other statement in the certificate in order that it shall
accurately represent the agreement among them.

Art. 1865. The writing to amend a certificate shall:

(1) Conform to the requirements of Article 1844 as far as necessary to set forth clearly the change in the
certificate which it is desired to make; and

(2) Be signed and sworn to by all members, and an amendment substituting a limited partner or adding a
limited or general partner shall be signed also by the member to be substituted or added, and when a
limited partner is to be substituted, the amendment shall also be signed by the assigning limited partner.

The writing to cancel a certificate shall be signed by all members.

231
A person desiring the cancellation or amendment of a certificate, if any person designated in the first and second
paragraphs as a person who must execute the writing refuses to do so, may petition the court to order a
cancellation or amendment thereof.

If the court finds that the petitioner has a right to have the writing executed by a person who refuses to do so, it
shall order the Office of the Securities and Exchange Commission where the certificate is recorded, to record the
cancellation or amendment of the certificate; and when the certificate is to be amended, the court shall also cause
to be filed for record in said office a certified copy of its decree setting forth the amendment.

A certificate is amended or cancelled when there is filed for record in the Office of the Securities and Exchange
Commission, where the certificate is recorded:

(1) A writing in accordance with the provisions of the first or second paragraph, or

(2) A certified copy of the order of the court in accordance with the provisions of the fourth paragraph;

(3) After the certificate is duly amended in accordance with this article, the amended certified shall
thereafter be for all purposes the certificate provided for in this Chapter.

Art. 1866. A contributor, unless he is a general partner, is not a proper party to proceedings by or against a
partnership, except where the object is to enforce a limited partner's right against or liability to the partnership.

Art. 1867. A limited partnership formed under the law prior to the effectivity of this Code, may become a limited
partnership under this Chapter by complying with the provisions of Article 1844, provided the certificate sets forth:

(1) The amount of the original contribution of each limited partner, and the time when the contribution
was made; and

(2) That the property of the partnership exceeds the amount sufficient to discharge its liabilities to persons
not claiming as general or limited partners by an amount greater than the sum of the contributions of its
limited partners.

A limited partnership formed under the law prior to the effectivity of this Code, until or unless it becomes a limited
partnership under this Chapter, shall continue to be governed by the provisions of the old law.

Title X. - AGENCY

CHAPTER 1
NATURE, FORM AND KINDS OF AGENCY

Art. 1868. By the contract of agency a person binds himself to render some service or to do something in
representation or on behalf of another, with the consent or authority of the latter. (1709a)

Art. 1869. Agency may be express, or implied from the acts of the principal, from his silence or lack of action, or his
failure to repudiate the agency, knowing that another person is acting on his behalf without authority.

Agency may be oral, unless the law requires a specific form. (1710a)

231
Art. 1870. Acceptance by the agent may also be express, or implied from his acts which carry out the agency, or
from his silence or inaction according to the circumstances. (n)

Art. 1871. Between persons who are present, the acceptance of the agency may also be implied if the principal
delivers his power of attorney to the agent and the latter receives it without any objection. (n)

Art. 1872. Between persons who are absent, the acceptance of the agency cannot be implied from the silence of
the agent, except:

(1) When the principal transmits his power of attorney to the agent, who receives it without any objection;

(2) When the principal entrusts to him by letter or telegram a power of attorney with respect to the
business in which he is habitually engaged as an agent, and he did not reply to the letter or telegram. (n)

Art. 1873. If a person specially informs another or states by public advertisement that he has given a power of
attorney to a third person, the latter thereby becomes a duly authorized agent, in the former case with respect to
the person who received the special information, and in the latter case with regard to any person.

The power shall continue to be in full force until the notice is rescinded in the same manner in which it was given.
(n)

Art. 1874. When a sale of a piece of land or any interest therein is through an agent, the authority of the latter shall
be in writing; otherwise, the sale shall be void. (n)

Art. 1875. Agency is presumed to be for a compensation, unless there is proof to the contrary. (n)

Art. 1876. An agency is either general or special.

The former comprises all the business of the principal. The latter, one or more specific transactions. (1712)

Art. 1877. An agency couched in general terms comprises only acts of administration, even if the principal should
state that he withholds no power or that the agent may execute such acts as he may consider appropriate, or even
though the agency should authorize a general and unlimited management. (n)

Art. 1878. Special powers of attorney are necessary in the following cases:

(1) To make such payments as are not usually considered as acts of administration;

(2) To effect novations which put an end to obligations already in existence at the time the agency was
constituted;

(3) To compromise, to submit questions to arbitration, to renounce the right to appeal from a judgment, to
waive objections to the venue of an action or to abandon a prescription already acquired;

(4) To waive any obligation gratuitously;

(5) To enter into any contract by which the ownership of an immovable is transmitted or acquired either
gratuitously or for a valuable consideration;

231
 (6) To make gifts, except customary ones for charity or those made to employees in the business managed
by the agent;

(7) To loan or borrow money, unless the latter act be urgent and indispensable for the preservation of the
things which are under administration;

(8) To lease any real property to another person for more than one year;

(9) To bind the principal to render some service without compensation;

(10) To bind the principal in a contract of partnership;

(11) To obligate the principal as a guarantor or surety;

(12) To create or convey real rights over immovable property;

(13) To accept or repudiate an inheritance;

(14) To ratify or recognize obligations contracted before the agency;

(15) Any other act of strict dominion. (n)

Art. 1879. A special power to sell excludes the power to mortgage; and a special power to mortgage does not
include the power to sell. (n)

Art. 1880. A special power to compromise does not authorize submission to arbitration. (1713a)

Art. 1881. The agent must act within the scope of his authority. He may do such acts as may be conducive to the
accomplishment of the purpose of the agency. (1714a)

Art. 1882. The limits of the agent's authority shall not be considered exceeded should it have been performed in a
manner more advantageous to the principal than that specified by him. (1715)

Art. 1883. If an agent acts in his own name, the principal has no right of action against the persons with whom the
agent has contracted; neither have such persons against the principal.

In such case the agent is the one directly bound in favor of the person with whom he has contracted, as if the
transaction were his own, except when the contract involves things belonging to the principal.

The provisions of this article shall be understood to be without prejudice to the actions between the principal and
agent. (1717)

CHAPTER 2
OBLIGATIONS OF THE AGENT

Art. 1884. The agent is bound by his acceptance to carry out the agency, and is liable for the damages which,
through his non-performance, the principal may suffer.

He must also finish the business already begun on the death of the principal, should delay entail any danger. (1718)

231
Art. 1885. In case a person declines an agency, he is bound to observe the diligence of a good father of a family in
the custody and preservation of the goods forwarded to him by the owner until the latter should appoint an agent
or take charge of the goods. (n)

Art. 1886. Should there be a stipulation that the agent shall advance the necessary funds, he shall be bound to do
so except when the principal is insolvent. (n)

Art. 1887. In the execution of the agency, the agent shall act in accordance with the instructions of the principal.

In default thereof, he shall do all that a good father of a family would do, as required by the nature of the business.
(1719)

Art. 1888. An agent shall not carry out an agency if its execution would manifestly result in loss or damage to the
principal. (n)

Art. 1889. The agent shall be liable for damages if, there being a conflict between his interests and those of the
principal, he should prefer his own. (n)

Art. 1890. If the agent has been empowered to borrow money, he may himself be the lender at the current rate of
interest. If he has been authorized to lend money at interest, he cannot borrow it without the consent of the
principal. (n)

Art. 1891. Every agent is bound to render an account of his transactions and to deliver to the principal whatever he
may have received by virtue of the agency, even though it may not be owing to the principal.

Every stipulation exempting the agent from the obligation to render an account shall be void. (1720a)

Art. 1892. The agent may appoint a substitute if the principal has not prohibited him from doing so; but he shall be
responsible for the acts of the substitute:

(1) When he was not given the power to appoint one;

(2) When he was given such power, but without designating the person, and the person appointed was
notoriously incompetent or insolvent.

All acts of the substitute appointed against the prohibition of the principal shall be void. (1721)

Art. 1893. In the cases mentioned in Nos. 1 and 2 of the preceding article, the principal may furthermore bring an
action against the substitute with respect to the obligations which the latter has contracted under the substitution.
(1722a)

Art. 1894. The responsibility of two or more agents, even though they have been appointed simultaneously, is not
solidary, if solidarity has not been expressly stipulated. (1723)

Art. 1895. If solidarity has been agreed upon, each of the agents is responsible for the non-fulfillment of agency,
and for the fault or negligence of his fellows agents, except in the latter case when the fellow agents acted beyond
the scope of their authority. (n)

Art. 1896. The agent owes interest on the sums he has applied to his own use from the day on which he did so, and
on those which he still owes after the extinguishment of the agency. (1724a)

231
Art. 1897. The agent who acts as such is not personally liable to the party with whom he contracts, unless he
expressly binds himself or exceeds the limits of his authority without giving such party sufficient notice of his
powers. (1725)

Art. 1898. If the agent contracts in the name of the principal, exceeding the scope of his authority, and the principal
does not ratify the contract, it shall be void if the party with whom the agent contracted is aware of the limits of
the powers granted by the principal. In this case, however, the agent is liable if he undertook to secure the
principal's ratification. (n)

Art. 1899. If a duly authorized agent acts in accordance with the orders of the principal, the latter cannot set up the
ignorance of the agent as to circumstances whereof he himself was, or ought to have been, aware. (n)

Art. 1900. So far as third persons are concerned, an act is deemed to have been performed within the scope of the
agent's authority, if such act is within the terms of the power of attorney, as written, even if the agent has in fact
exceeded the limits of his authority according to an understanding between the principal and the agent. (n)

Art. 1901. A third person cannot set up the fact that the agent has exceeded his powers, if the principal has ratified,
or has signified his willingness to ratify the agent's acts. (n)

Art. 1902. A third person with whom the agent wishes to contract on behalf of the principal may require the
presentation of the power of attorney, or the instructions as regards the agency. Private or secret orders and
instructions of the principal do not prejudice third persons who have relied upon the power of attorney or
instructions shown them. (n)

Art. 1903. The commission agent shall be responsible for the goods received by him in the terms and conditions
and as described in the consignment, unless upon receiving them he should make a written statement of the
damage and deterioration suffered by the same. (n)

Art. 1904. The commission agent who handles goods of the same kind and mark, which belong to different owners,
shall distinguish them by countermarks, and designate the merchandise respectively belonging to each principal.
(n)

Art. 1905. The commission agent cannot, without the express or implied consent of the principal, sell on credit.
Should he do so, the principal may demand from him payment in cash, but the commission agent shall be entitled
to any interest or benefit, which may result from such sale. (n)

Art. 1906. Should the commission agent, with authority of the principal, sell on credit, he shall so inform the
principal, with a statement of the names of the buyers. Should he fail to do so, the sale shall be deemed to have
been made for cash insofar as the principal is concerned. (n)

Art. 1907. Should the commission agent receive on a sale, in addition to the ordinary commission, another called a
guarantee commission, he shall bear the risk of collection and shall pay the principal the proceeds of the sale on
the same terms agreed upon with the purchaser. (n)

Art. 1908. The commission agent who does not collect the credits of his principal at the time when they become
due and demandable shall be liable for damages, unless he proves that he exercised due diligence for that purpose.
(n)

Art. 1909. The agent is responsible not only for fraud, but also for negligence, which shall be judged with more or
less rigor by the courts, according to whether the agency was or was not for a compensation. (1726)

231
 CHAPTER 3
OBLIGATIONS OF THE PRINCIPAL

Art. 1910. The principal must comply with all the obligations which the agent may have contracted within the scope
of his authority.

As for any obligation wherein the agent has exceeded his power, the principal is not bound except when he ratifies
it expressly or tacitly. (1727)

Art. 1911. Even when the agent has exceeded his authority, the principal is solidarily liable with the agent if the
former allowed the latter to act as though he had full powers. (n)

Art. 1912. The principal must advance to the agent, should the latter so request, the sums necessary for the
execution of the agency.

Should the agent have advanced them, the principal must reimburse him therefor, even if the business or
undertaking was not successful, provided the agent is free from all fault.

The reimbursement shall include interest on the sums advanced, from the day on which the advance was made.
(1728)

Art. 1913. The principal must also indemnify the agent for all the damages which the execution of the agency may
have caused the latter, without fault or negligence on his part. (1729)

Art. 1914. The agent may retain in pledge the things which are the object of the agency until the principal effects
the reimbursement and pays the indemnity set forth in the two preceding articles. (1730)

Art. 1915. If two or more persons have appointed an agent for a common transaction or undertaking, they shall be
solidarily liable to the agent for all the consequences of the agency. (1731)

Art. 1916. When two persons contract with regard to the same thing, one of them with the agent and the other
with the principal, and the two contracts are incompatible with each other, that of prior date shall be preferred,
without prejudice to the provisions of Article 1544. (n)

Art. 1917. In the case referred to in the preceding article, if the agent has acted in good faith, the principal shall be
liable in damages to the third person whose contract must be rejected. If the agent acted in bad faith, he alone
shall be responsible. (n)

Art. 1918. The principal is not liable for the expenses incurred by the agent in the following cases:

(1) If the agent acted in contravention of the principal's instructions, unless the latter should wish to avail
himself of the benefits derived from the contract;

(2) When the expenses were due to the fault of the agent;

(3) When the agent incurred them with knowledge that an unfavorable result would ensue, if the principal
was not aware thereof;

(4) When it was stipulated that the expenses would be borne by the agent, or that the latter would be
allowed only a certain sum. (n)

231
 CHAPTER 4
MODES OF EXTINGUISHMENT OF AGENCY

Art. 1919. Agency is extinguished:

(1) By its revocation;

(2) By the withdrawal of the agent;

(3) By the death, civil interdiction, insanity or insolvency of the principal or of the agent;

(4) By the dissolution of the firm or corporation which entrusted or accepted the agency;

(5) By the accomplishment of the object or purpose of the agency;

(6) By the expiration of the period for which the agency was constituted. (1732a)

Art. 1920. The principal may revoke the agency at will, and compel the agent to return the document evidencing
the agency. Such revocation may be express or implied. (1733a)

Art. 1921. If the agency has been entrusted for the purpose of contracting with specified persons, its revocation
shall not prejudice the latter if they were not given notice thereof. (1734)

Art. 1922. If the agent had general powers, revocation of the agency does not prejudice third persons who acted in
good faith and without knowledge of the revocation. Notice of the revocation in a newspaper of general circulation
is a sufficient warning to third persons. (n)

Art. 1923. The appointment of a new agent for the same business or transaction revokes the previous agency from
the day on which notice thereof was given to the former agent, without prejudice to the provisions of the two
preceding articles. (1735a)

Art. 1924. The agency is revoked if the principal directly manages the business entrusted to the agent, dealing
directly with third persons. (n)

Art. 1925. When two or more principals have granted a power of attorney for a common transaction, any one of
them may revoke the same without the consent of the others. (n)

Art. 1926. A general power of attorney is revoked by a special one granted to another agent, as regards the special
matter involved in the latter. (n)

Art. 1927. An agency cannot be revoked if a bilateral contract depends upon it, or if it is the means of fulfilling an
obligation already contracted, or if a partner is appointed manager of a partnership in the contract of partnership
and his removal from the management is unjustifiable. (n)

Art. 1928. The agent may withdraw from the agency by giving due notice to the principal. If the latter should suffer
any damage by reason of the withdrawal, the agent must indemnify him therefor, unless the agent should base his
withdrawal upon the impossibility of continuing the performance of the agency without grave detriment to himself.
(1736a)

231
Art. 1929. The agent, even if he should withdraw from the agency for a valid reason, must continue to act until the
principal has had reasonable opportunity to take the necessary steps to meet the situation. (1737a)

Art. 1930. The agency shall remain in full force and effect even after the death of the principal, if it has been
constituted in the common interest of the latter and of the agent, or in the interest of a third person who has
accepted the stipulation in his favor. (n)

Art. 1931. Anything done by the agent, without knowledge of the death of the principal or of any other cause
which extinguishes the agency, is valid and shall be fully effective with respect to third persons who may have
contracted with him in good faith. (1738)

Art. 1932. If the agent dies, his heirs must notify the principal thereof, and in the meantime adopt such measures
as the circumstances may demand in the interest of the latter. (1739)

Title XI. - LOAN

GENERAL PROVISIONS

Art. 1933. By the contract of loan, one of the parties delivers to another, either something not consumable so that
the latter may use the same for a certain time and return it, in which case the contract is called a commodatum; or
money or other consumable thing, upon the condition that the same amount of the same kind and quality shall be
paid, in which case the contract is simply called a loan or mutuum.

Commodatum is essentially gratuitous.

Simple loan may be gratuitous or with a stipulation to pay interest.

In commodatum the bailor retains the ownership of the thing loaned, while in simple loan, ownership passes to the
borrower. (1740a)

Art. 1934. An accepted promise to deliver something by way of commodatum or simple loan is binding upon
parties, but the commodatum or simple loan itself shall not be perfected until the delivery of the object of the
contract. (n)

CHAPTER 1
COMMODATUM

SECTION 1 - Nature of Commodatum

Art. 1935. The bailee in commodatum acquires the used of the thing loaned but not its fruits; if any compensation
is to be paid by him who acquires the use, the contract ceases to be a commodatum. (1941a)

Art. 1936. Consumable goods may be the subject of commodatum if the purpose of the contract is not the
consumption of the object, as when it is merely for exhibition. (n)

Art. 1937. Movable or immovable property may be the object of commodatum. (n)

231
Art. 1938. The bailor in commodatum need not be the owner of the thing loaned. (n)

Art. 1939. Commodatum is purely personal in character. Consequently:

(1) The death of either the bailor or the bailee extinguishes the contract;

(2) The bailee can neither lend nor lease the object of the contract to a third person. However, the
members of the bailee's household may make use of the thing loaned, unless there is a stipulation to the
contrary, or unless the nature of the thing forbids such use. (n)

Art. 1940. A stipulation that the bailee may make use of the fruits of the thing loaned is valid. (n)

SECTION 2. - Obligations of the Bailee

Art. 1941. The bailee is obliged to pay for the ordinary expenses for the use and preservation of the thing loaned.
(1743a)

Art. 1942. The bailee is liable for the loss of the thing, even if it should be through a fortuitous event:

(1) If he devotes the thing to any purpose different from that for which it has been loaned;

(2) If he keeps it longer than the period stipulated, or after the accomplishment of the use for which the
commodatum has been constituted;

(3) If the thing loaned has been delivered with appraisal of its value, unless there is a stipulation
exemption the bailee from responsibility in case of a fortuitous event;

(4) If he lends or leases the thing to a third person, who is not a member of his household;

(5) If, being able to save either the thing borrowed or his own thing, he chose to save the latter. (1744a
and 1745)

Art. 1943. The bailee does not answer for the deterioration of the thing loaned due only to the use thereof and
without his fault. (1746)

Art. 1944. The bailee cannot retain the thing loaned on the ground that the bailor owes him something, even
though it may be by reason of expenses. However, the bailee has a right of retention for damages mentioned in
Article 1951. (1747a)

Art. 1945. When there are two or more bailees to whom a thing is loaned in the same contract, they are liable
solidarily. (1748a)

SECTION 3. - Obligations of the Bailor

Art. 1946. The bailor cannot demand the return of the thing loaned till after the expiration of the period stipulated,
or after the accomplishment of the use for which the commodatum has been constituted. However, if in the
meantime, he should have urgent need of the thing, he may demand its return or temporary use.

In case of temporary use by the bailor, the contract of commodatum is suspended while the thing is in the
possession of the bailor. (1749a)

231
Art. 1947. The bailor may demand the thing at will, and the contractual relation is called a precarium, in the
following cases:

(1) If neither the duration of the contract nor the use to which the thing loaned should be devoted, has
been stipulated; or

(2) If the use of the thing is merely tolerated by the owner. (1750a)

Art. 1948. The bailor may demand the immediate return of the thing if the bailee commits any act of ingratitude
specified in Article 765. (n)

Art. 1949. The bailor shall refund the extraordinary expenses during the contract for the preservation of the thing
loaned, provided the bailee brings the same to the knowledge of the bailor before incurring them, except when
they are so urgent that the reply to the notification cannot be awaited without danger.

If the extraordinary expenses arise on the occasion of the actual use of the thing by the bailee, even though he
acted without fault, they shall be borne equally by both the bailor and the bailee, unless there is a stipulation to
the contrary. (1751a)

Art. 1950. If, for the purpose of making use of the thing, the bailee incurs expenses other than those referred to in
Articles 1941 and 1949, he is not entitled to reimbursement. (n)

Art. 1951. The bailor who, knowing the flaws of the thing loaned, does not advise the bailee of the same, shall be
liable to the latter for the damages which he may suffer by reason thereof. (1752)

Art. 1952. The bailor cannot exempt himself from the payment of expenses or damages by abandoning the thing to
the bailee. (n)

CHAPTER 2
SIMPLE LOAN OR MUTUUM

Art. 1953. A person who receives a loan of money or any other fungible thing acquires the ownership thereof, and
is bound to pay to the creditor an equal amount of the same kind and quality. (1753a)

Art. 1954. A contract whereby one person transfers the ownership of non-fungible things to another with the
obligation on the part of the latter to give things of the same kind, quantity, and quality shall be considered a
barter. (n)

Art. 1955. The obligation of a person who borrows money shall be governed by the provisions of Articles 1249 and
1250 of this Code.

If what was loaned is a fungible thing other than money, the debtor owes another thing of the same kind, quantity
and quality, even if it should change in value. In case it is impossible to deliver the same kind, its value at the time
of the perfection of the loan shall be paid. (1754a)

231
Art. 1956. No interest shall be due unless it has been expressly stipulated in writing. (1755a)

Art. 1957. Contracts and stipulations, under any cloak or device whatever, intended to circumvent the laws against
usury shall be void. The borrower may recover in accordance with the laws on usury. (n)

Art. 1958. In the determination of the interest, if it is payable in kind, its value shall be appraised at the current
price of the products or goods at the time and place of payment. (n)

Art. 1959. Without prejudice to the provisions of Article 2212, interest due and unpaid shall not earn interest.
However, the contracting parties may by stipulation capitalize the interest due and unpaid, which as added
principal, shall earn new interest. (n)

Art. 1960. If the borrower pays interest when there has been no stipulation therefor, the provisions of this Code
concerning solutio indebiti, or natural obligations, shall be applied, as the case may be. (n)

Art. 1961. Usurious contracts shall be governed by the Usury Law and other special laws, so far as they are not
inconsistent with this Code. (n)

Title XII. - DEPOSIT

CHAPTER 1
DEPOSIT IN GENERAL AND ITS DIFFERENT KINDS

Art. 1962. A deposit is constituted from the moment a person receives a thing belonging to another, with the
obligation of safely keeping it and of returning the same. If the safekeeping of the thing delivered is not the
principal purpose of the contract, there is no deposit but some other contract. (1758a)

Art. 1963. An agreement to constitute a deposit is binding, but the deposit itself is not perfected until the delivery
of the thing. (n)

Art. 1964. A deposit may be constituted judicially or extrajudicially. (1759)

Art. 1965. A deposit is a gratuitous contract, except when there is an agreement to the contrary, or unless the
depositary is engaged in the business of storing goods. (1760a)

Art. 1966. Only movable things may be the object of a deposit. (1761)

Art. 1967. An extrajudicial deposit is either voluntary or necessary. (1762)

CHAPTER 2
VOLUNTARY DEPOSIT

SECTION 1. - General Provisions

Art. 1968. A voluntary deposit is that wherein the delivery is made by the will of the depositor. A deposit may also
be made by two or more persons each of whom believes himself entitled to the thing deposited with a third
person, who shall deliver it in a proper case to the one to whom it belongs. (1763)

Art. 1969. A contract of deposit may be entered into orally or in writing. (n)

231
Art. 1970. If a person having capacity to contract accepts a deposit made by one who is incapacitated, the former
shall be subject to all the obligations of a depositary, and may be compelled to return the thing by the guardian, or
administrator, of the person who made the deposit, or by the latter himself if he should acquire capacity. (1764)

Art. 1971. If the deposit has been made by a capacitated person with another who is not, the depositor shall only
have an action to recover the thing deposited while it is still in the possession of the depositary, or to compel the
latter to pay him the amount by which he may have enriched or benefited himself with the thing or its price.
However, if a third person who acquired the thing acted in bad faith, the depositor may bring an action against him
for its recovery. (1765a)

SECTION 2. - Obligations of the Depositary

Art. 1972. The depositary is obliged to keep the thing safely and to return it, when required, to the depositor, or to
his heirs and successors, or to the person who may have been designated in the contract. His responsibility, with
regard to the safekeeping and the loss of the thing, shall be governed by the provisions of Title I of this Book.

If the deposit is gratuitous, this fact shall be taken into account in determining the degree of care that the
depositary must observe. (1766a)

Art. 1973. Unless there is a stipulation to the contrary, the depositary cannot deposit the thing with a third person.
If deposit with a third person is allowed, the depositary is liable for the loss if he deposited the thing with a person
who is manifestly careless or unfit. The depositary is responsible for the negligence of his employees. (n)

Art. 1974. The depositary may change the way of the deposit if under the circumstances he may reasonably
presume that the depositor would consent to the change if he knew of the facts of the situation. However, before
the depositary may make such change, he shall notify the depositor thereof and wait for his decision, unless delay
would cause danger. (n)

Art. 1975. The depositary holding certificates, bonds, securities or instruments which earn interest shall be bound
to collect the latter when it becomes due, and to take such steps as may be necessary in order that the securities
may preserve their value and the rights corresponding to them according to law.

The above provision shall not apply to contracts for the rent of safety deposit boxes. (n)

Art. 1976. Unless there is a stipulation to the contrary, the depositary may commingle grain or other articles of the
same kind and quality, in which case the various depositors shall own or have a proportionate interest in the mass.
(n)

Art. 1977. The depositary cannot make use of the thing deposited without the express permission of the depositor.

Otherwise, he shall be liable for damages.

However, when the preservation of the thing deposited requires its use, it must be used but only for that purpose.
(1767a)

Art. 1978. When the depositary has permission to use the thing deposited, the contract loses the concept of a
deposit and becomes a loan or commodatum, except where safekeeping is still the principal purpose of the
contract.

The permission shall not be presumed, and its existence must be proved. (1768a)

231
Art. 1979. The depositary is liable for the loss of the thing through a fortuitous event:

(1) If it is so stipulated;

(2) If he uses the thing without the depositor's permission;

(3) If he delays its return;

(4) If he allows others to use it, even though he himself may have been authorized to use the same. (n)

Art. 1980. Fixed, savings, and current deposits of money in banks and similar institutions shall be governed by the
provisions concerning simple loan. (n)

Art. 1981. When the thing deposited is delivered closed and sealed, the depositary must return it in the same
condition, and he shall be liable for damages should the seal or lock be broken through his fault.

Fault on the part of the depositary is presumed, unless there is proof to the contrary.

As regards the value of the thing deposited, the statement of the depositor shall be accepted, when the forcible
opening is imputable to the depositary, should there be no proof to the contrary. However, the courts may pass
upon the credibility of the depositor with respect to the value claimed by him.

When the seal or lock is broken, with or without the depositary's fault, he shall keep the secret of the deposit.
(1769a)

Art. 1982. When it becomes necessary to open a locked box or receptacle, the depositary is presumed authorized
to do so, if the key has been delivered to him; or when the instructions of the depositor as regards the deposit
cannot be executed without opening the box or receptacle. (n)

Art. 1983. The thing deposited shall be returned with all its products, accessories and accessions.

Should the deposit consist of money, the provisions relative to agents in article 1896 shall be applied to the
depositary. (1770)

Art. 1984. The depositary cannot demand that the depositor prove his ownership of the thing deposited.

Nevertheless, should he discover that the thing has been stolen and who its true owner is, he must advise the latter
of the deposit.

If the owner, in spite of such information, does not claim it within the period of one month, the depositary shall be
relieved of all responsibility by returning the thing deposited to the depositor.

If the depositary has reasonable grounds to believe that the thing has not been lawfully acquired by the depositor,
the former may return the same. (1771a)

Art. 1985. When there are two or more depositors, if they are not solidary, and the thing admits of division, each
one cannot demand more than his share.

231
When there is solidarity or the thing does not admit of division, the provisions of Articles 1212 and 1214 shall
govern. However, if there is a stipulation that the thing should be returned to one of the depositors, the depositary
shall return it only to the person designated. (1772a)

Art. 1986. If the depositor should lose his capacity to contract after having made the deposit, the thing cannot be
returned except to the persons who may have the administration of his property and rights. (1773)

Art. 1987. If at the time the deposit was made a place was designated for the return of the thing, the depositary
must take the thing deposited to such place; but the expenses for transportation shall be borne by the depositor.

If no place has been designated for the return, it shall be made where the thing deposited may be, even if it should
not be the same place where the deposit was made, provided that there was no malice on the part of the
depositary. (1774)

Art. 1988. The thing deposited must be returned to the depositor upon demand, even though a specified period or
time for such return may have been fixed.

This provision shall not apply when the thing is judicially attached while in the depositary's possession, or should he
have been notified of the opposition of a third person to the return or the removal of the thing deposited. In these
cases, the depositary must immediately inform the depositor of the attachment or opposition. (1775)

Art. 1989. Unless the deposit is for a valuable consideration, the depositary who may have justifiable reasons for
not keeping the thing deposited may, even before the time designated, return it to the depositor; and if the latter
should refuse to receive it, the depositary may secure its consignation from the court. (1776a)

Art. 1990. If the depositary by force majeure or government order loses the thing and receives money or another
thing in its place, he shall deliver the sum or other thing to the depositor. (1777a)

Art. 1991. The depositor's heir who in good faith may have sold the thing which he did not know was deposited,
shall only be bound to return the price he may have received or to assign his right of action against the buyer in
case the price has not been paid him. (1778)

SECTION 3. - Obligations of the Depositor

Art. 1992. If the deposit is gratuitous, the depositor is obliged to reimburse the depositary for the expenses he may
have incurred for the preservation of the thing deposited. (1779a)

Art. 1993. The depositor shall reimburse the depositary for any loss arising from the character of the thing
deposited, unless at the time of the constitution of the deposit the former was not aware of, or was not expected
to know the dangerous character of the thing, or unless he notified the depositary of the same, or the latter was
aware of it without advice from the depositor. (n)

Art. 1994. The depositary may retain the thing in pledge until the full payment of what may be due him by reason
of the deposit. (1780)

Art. 1995. A deposit its extinguished:

(1) Upon the loss or destruction of the thing deposited;

231
 (2) In case of a gratuitous deposit, upon the death of either the depositor or the depositary. (n)

CHAPTER 3
NECESSARY DEPOSIT

Art. 1996. A deposit is necessary:

(1) When it is made in compliance with a legal obligation;

(2) When it takes place on the occasion of any calamity, such as fire, storm, flood, pillage, shipwreck, or
other similar events. (1781a)

Art. 1997. The deposit referred to in No. 1 of the preceding article shall be governed by the provisions of the law
establishing it, and in case of its deficiency, by the rules on voluntary deposit.

The deposit mentioned in No. 2 of the preceding article shall be regulated by the provisions concerning voluntary
deposit and by Article 2168. (1782)

Art. 1998. The deposit of effects made by the travellers in hotels or inns shall also be regarded as necessary. The
keepers of hotels or inns shall be responsible for them as depositaries, provided that notice was given to them, or
to their employees, of the effects brought by the guests and that, on the part of the latter, they take the
precautions which said hotel-keepers or their substitutes advised relative to the care and vigilance of their effects.
(1783)

Art. 1999. The hotel-keeper is liable for the vehicles, animals and articles which have been introduced or placed in
the annexes of the hotel. (n)

Art. 2000. The responsibility referred to in the two preceding articles shall include the loss of, or injury to the
personal property of the guests caused by the servants or employees of the keepers of hotels or inns as well as
strangers; but not that which may proceed from any force majeure. The fact that travellers are constrained to rely
on the vigilance of the keeper of the hotels or inns shall be considered in determining the degree of care required
of him. (1784a)

Art. 2001. The act of a thief or robber, who has entered the hotel is not deemed force majeure, unless it is done
with the use of arms or through an irresistible force. (n)

Art. 2002. The hotel-keeper is not liable for compensation if the loss is due to the acts of the guest, his family,
servants or visitors, or if the loss arises from the character of the things brought into the hotel. (n)

Art. 2003. The hotel-keeper cannot free himself from responsibility by posting notices to the effect that he is not
liable for the articles brought by the guest. Any stipulation between the hotel-keeper and the guest whereby the
responsibility of the former as set forth in articles 1998 to 2001 is suppressed or diminished shall be void. (n)

Art. 2004. The hotel-keeper has a right to retain the things brought into the hotel by the guest, as a security for
credits on account of lodging, and supplies usually furnished to hotel guests. (n)

CHAPTER 4
SEQUESTRATION OR JUDICIAL DEPOSIT

231
Art. 2005. A judicial deposit or sequestration takes place when an attachment or seizure of property in litigation is
ordered. (1785)

Art. 2006. Movable as well as immovable property may be the object of sequestration. (1786)

Art. 2007. The depositary of property or objects sequestrated cannot be relieved of his responsibility until the
controversy which gave rise thereto has come to an end, unless the court so orders. (1787a)

Art. 2008. The depositary of property sequestrated is bound to comply, with respect to the same, with all the
obligations of a good father of a family. (1788)

Art. 2009. As to matters not provided for in this Code, judicial sequestration shall be governed by the Rules of
Court. (1789)

Title XIII. - ALEATORY CONTRACTS

GENERAL PROVISIONS

Art. 2010. By an aleatory contract, one of the parties or both reciprocally bind themselves to give or to do
something in consideration of what the other shall give or do upon the happening of an event which is uncertain,
or which is to occur at an indeterminate time. (1790)

CHAPTER 1
INSURANCE

Art. 2011. The contract of insurance is governed by special laws. Matters not expressly provided for in such special
laws shall be regulated by this Code. (n)

Art. 2012. Any person who is forbidden from receiving any donation under Article 739 cannot be named beneficiary
of a life insurance policy by the person who cannot make any donation to him, according to said article. (n)

CHAPTER 2
GAMBLING

Art. 2013. A game of chance is that which depends more on chance or hazard than or skill or ability. For the
purposes of the following articles, in case of doubt a game is deemed to be one of chance. (n)

Art. 2014. No action can be maintained by the winner for the collection of what he has won in a game of chance.
But any loser in a game of chance may recover his loss from the winner, with legal interest from the time he paid
the amount lost, and subsidiarily from the operator or manager of the gambling house. (1799a)

Art. 2015. If cheating or deceit is committed by the winner, he, and subsidiarily the operator or manager of the
gambling house, shall pay by way of exemplary damages, not less than the equivalent of the sum lost, in addition to
the latter amount. If both the winner and the loser have perpetrated fraud, no action for recovery can be brought
by either. (n)

Art. 2016. If the loser refuses or neglects to bring an action to recover what has been lost, his or her creditors,
spouse, descendants or other persons entitled to be supported by the loser may institute the action. The sum

231
thereby obtained shall be applied to the creditors' claims, or to the support of the spouse or relatives, as the case
may be. (n)

Art. 2017. The provisions of Article 2014 and 2016 apply when two or more persons bet in a game of chance,
although they take no active part in the game itself. (1799a)

Art. 2018. If a contract which purports to be for the delivery of goods, securities or shares of stock is entered into
with the intention that the difference between the price stipulated and the exchange or market price at the time of
the pretended delivery shall be paid by the loser to the winner, the transaction is null and void. The loser may
recover what he has paid. (n)

Art. 2019. Betting on the result of sports, athletic competitions, or games of skill may be prohibited by local
ordinances. (n)

Art. 2020. The loser in any game which is not one of chance, when there is no local ordinance which prohibits
betting therein, is under obligation to pay his loss, unless the amount thereof is excessive under the circumstances.
In the latter case, the court shall reduce the loss to the proper sum. (1801a)

CHAPTER 3
LIFE ANNUITY

Art. 2021. The aleatory contract of life annuity binds the debtor to pay an annual pension or income during the life
of one or more determinate persons in consideration of a capital consisting of money or other property, whose
ownership is transferred to him at once with the burden of the income. (1802a)

Art. 2022. The annuity may be constituted upon the life of the person who gives the capital, upon that of a third
person, or upon the lives of various persons, all of whom must be living at the time the annuity is established.

It may also be constituted in favor of the person or persons upon whose life or lives the contract is entered into, or
in favor of another or other persons. (1803)

Art. 2023. Life annuity shall be void if constituted upon the life of a person who was already dead at the time the
contract was entered into, or who was at that time suffering from an illness which caused his death within twenty
days following said date. (1804)

Art. 2024. The lack of payment of the income due does not authorize the recipient of the life annuity to demand
the reimbursement of the capital or to retake possession of the property alienated, unless there is a stipulation to
the contrary; he shall have only a right judicially to claim the payment of the income in arrears and to require a
security for the future income, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary. (1805a)

Art. 2025. The income corresponding to the year in which the person enjoying it dies shall be paid in proportion to
the days during which he lived; if the income should be paid by installments in advance, the whole amount of the
installment which began to run during his life shall be paid. (1806)

Art. 2026. He who constitutes an annuity by gratuitous title upon his property, may provide at the time the annuity
is established that the same shall not be subject to execution or attachment on account of the obligations of the
recipient of the annuity. If the annuity was constituted in fraud of creditors, the latter may ask for the execution or
attachment of the property. (1807a)

231
Art. 2027. No annuity shall be claimed without first proving the existence of the person upon whose life the annuity
is constituted. (1808)

Title XIV. - COMPROMISES AND ARBITRATIONS

CHAPTER 1
COMPROMISES

Art. 2028. A compromise is a contract whereby the parties, by making reciprocal concessions, avoid a litigation or
put an end to one already commenced. (1809a)

Art. 2029. The court shall endeavor to persuade the litigants in a civil case to agree upon some fair compromise. (n)

Art. 2030. Every civil action or proceeding shall be suspended:

(1) If willingness to discuss a possible compromise is expressed by one or both parties; or

(2) If it appears that one of the parties, before the commencement of the action or proceeding, offered to
discuss a possible compromise but the other party refused the offer.

The duration and terms of the suspension of the civil action or proceeding and similar matters shall be governed by
such provisions of the rules of court as the Supreme Court shall promulgate. Said rules of court shall likewise
provide for the appointment and duties of amicable compounders. (n)

Art. 2031. The courts may mitigate the damages to be paid by the losing party who has shown a sincere desire for a
compromise. (n)

Art. 2032. The court's approval is necessary in compromises entered into by guardians, parents, absentee's
representatives, and administrators or executors of decedent's estates. (1810a)

Art. 2033. Juridical persons may compromise only in the form and with the requisites which may be necessary to
alienate their property. (1812a)

Art. 2034. There may be a compromise upon the civil liability arising from an offense; but such compromise shall
not extinguish the public action for the imposition of the legal penalty. (1813)

Art. 2035. No compromise upon the following questions shall be valid:

(1) The civil status of persons;

(2) The validity of a marriage or a legal separation;

(3) Any ground for legal separation;

(4) Future support;

(5) The jurisdiction of courts;

(6) Future legitime. (1814a)

231
Art. 2036. A compromise comprises only those objects which are definitely stated therein, or which by necessary
implication from its terms should be deemed to have been included in the same.

A general renunciation of rights is understood to refer only to those that are connected with the dispute which was
the subject of the compromise. (1815)

Art. 2037. A compromise has upon the parties the effect and authority of res judicata; but there shall be no
execution except in compliance with a judicial compromise. (1816)

Art. 2038. A compromise in which there is mistake, fraud, violence, intimidation, undue influence, or falsity of
documents, is subject to the provisions of Article 1330 of this Code.

However, one of parties cannot set up a mistake of fact as against the other if the latter, by virtue of the
compromise, has withdrawn from a litigation already commenced. (1817a)

Art. 2039. When the parties compromise generally on all differences which they might have with each other, the
discovery of documents referring to one or more but not to all of the questions settled shall not itself be a cause for
annulment or rescission of the compromise, unless said documents have been concealed by one of the parties.

But the compromise may be annulled or rescinded if it refers only to one thing to which one of the parties has no
right, as shown by the newly-discovered documents. (n)

Art. 2040. If after a litigation has been decided by a final judgment, a compromise should be agreed upon, either or
both parties being unaware of the existence of the final judgment, the compromise may be rescinded.

Ignorance of a judgment which may be revoked or set aside is not a valid ground for attacking a compromise.
(1819a)

Art. 2041. If one of the parties fails or refuses to abide by the compromise, the other party may either enforce the
compromise or regard it as rescinded and insist upon his original demand. (n)

CHAPTER 2
ARBITRATIONS

Art. 2042. The same persons who may enter into a compromise may submit their controversies to one or more
arbitrators for decision. (1820a)

Art. 2043. The provisions of the preceding Chapter upon compromises shall also be applicable to arbitrations.
(1821a)

Art. 2044. Any stipulation that the arbitrators' award or decision shall be final, is valid, without prejudice to Articles
2038, 2039, and 2040. (n)

Art. 2045. Any clause giving one of the parties power to choose more arbitrators than the other is void and of no
effect. (n)

Art. 2046. The appointment of arbitrators and the procedure for arbitration shall be governed by the provisions of
such rules of court as the Supreme Court shall promulgate. (n)

Title XV. - GUARANTY

231
 CHAPTER 1
NATURE AND EXTENT OF GUARANTY

Art. 2047. By guaranty a person, called the guarantor, binds himself to the creditor to fulfill the obligation of the
principal debtor in case the latter should fail to do so.

If a person binds himself solidarily with the principal debtor, the provisions of Section 4, Chapter 3, Title I of this
Book shall be observed. In such case the contract is called a suretyship. (1822a)

Art. 2048. A guaranty is gratuitous, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary. (n)

Art. 2049. A married woman may guarantee an obligation without the husband's consent, but shall not thereby
bind the conjugal partnership, except in cases provided by law. (n)

Art. 2050. If a guaranty is entered into without the knowledge or consent, or against the will of the principal debtor,
the provisions of Articles 1236 and 1237 shall apply. (n)

Art. 2051. A guaranty may be conventional, legal or judicial, gratuitous, or by onerous title.

It may also be constituted, not only in favor of the principal debtor, but also in favor of the other guarantor, with
the latter's consent, or without his knowledge, or even over his objection. (1823)

Art. 2052. A guaranty cannot exist without a valid obligation.

Nevertheless, a guaranty may be constituted to guarantee the performance of a voidable or an unenforceable

contract. It may also guarantee a natural obligation. (1824a)

Art. 2053. A guaranty may also be given as security for future debts, the amount of which is not yet known; there
can be no claim against the guarantor until the debt is liquidated. A conditional obligation may also be secured.
(1825a)

Art. 2054. A guarantor may bind himself for less, but not for more than the principal debtor, both as regards the
amount and the onerous nature of the conditions.

Should he have bound himself for more, his obligations shall be reduced to the limits of that of the debtor. (1826)

Art. 2055. A guaranty is not presumed; it must be express and cannot extend to more than what is stipulated
therein.

If it be simple or indefinite, it shall compromise not only the principal obligation, but also all its accessories,
including the judicial costs, provided with respect to the latter, that the guarantor shall only be liable for those costs
incurred after he has been judicially required to pay. (1827a)

Art. 2056. One who is obliged to furnish a guarantor shall present a person who possesses integrity, capacity to
bind himself, and sufficient property to answer for the obligation which he guarantees. The guarantor shall be
subject to the jurisdiction of the court of the place where this obligation is to be complied with. (1828a)

Art. 2057. If the guarantor should be convicted in first instance of a crime involving dishonesty or should become
insolvent, the creditor may demand another who has all the qualifications required in the preceding article. The

231
case is excepted where the creditor has required and stipulated that a specified person should be the guarantor.
(1829a)

CHAPTER 2
EFFECTS OF GUARANTY

SECTION 1. - Effects of Guaranty

Between the Guarantor and the Creditor

Art. 2058. The guarantor cannot be compelled to pay the creditor unless the latter has exhausted all the property
of the debtor, and has resorted to all the legal remedies against the debtor. (1830a)

Art. 2059. The excussion shall not take place:

(1) If the guarantor has expressly renounced it;

(2) If he has bound himself solidarily with the debtor;

(3) In case of insolvency of the debtor;

(4) When he has absconded, or cannot be sued within the Philippines unless he has left a manager or
representative;

(5) If it may be presumed that an execution on the property of the principal debtor would not result in the
satisfaction of the obligation. (1831a)

Art. 2060. In order that the guarantor may make use of the benefit of exclusion, he must set it up against the
creditor upon the latter's demand for payment from him, and point out to the creditor available property of the
debtor within Philippine territory, sufficient to cover the amount of the debt. (1832)

Art. 2061. The guarantor having fulfilled all the conditions required in the preceding article, the creditor who is
negligent in exhausting the property pointed out shall suffer the loss, to the extent of said property, for the
insolvency of the debtor resulting from such negligence. (1833a)

Art. 2062. In every action by the creditor, which must be against the principal debtor alone, except in the cases
mentioned in Article 2059, the former shall ask the court to notify the guarantor of the action. The guarantor may
appear so that he may, if he so desire, set up such defenses as are granted him by law. The benefit of excussion
mentioned in Article 2058 shall always be unimpaired, even if judgment should be rendered against the principal
debtor and the guarantor in case of appearance by the latter. (1834a)

Art. 2063. A compromise between the creditor and the principal debtor benefits the guarantor but does not
prejudice him. That which is entered into between the guarantor and the creditor benefits but does not prejudice
the principal debtor. (1835a)

Art. 2064. The guarantor of a guarantor shall enjoy the benefit of excussion, both with respect to the guarantor and
to the principal debtor. (1836)

231
Art. 2065. Should there be several guarantors of only one debtor and for the same debt, the obligation to answer
for the same is divided among all. The creditor cannot claim from the guarantors except the shares which they are
respectively bound to pay, unless solidarity has been expressly stipulated.

The benefit of division against the co-guarantors ceases in the same cases and for the same reasons as the benefit
of excussion against the principal debtor. (1837)

SECTION 2. - Effects of Guaranty

Between the Debtor and the Guarantor

Art. 2066. The guarantor who pays for a debtor must be indemnified by the latter.

The indemnity comprises:

(1) The total amount of the debt;

(2) The legal interests thereon from the time the payment was made known to the debtor, even though it
did not earn interest for the creditor;

(3) The expenses incurred by the guarantor after having notified the debtor that payment had been
demanded of him;

(4) Damages, if they are due. (1838a)

Art. 2067. The guarantor who pays is subrogated by virtue thereof to all the rights which the creditor had against
the debtor.

If the guarantor has compromised with the creditor, he cannot demand of the debtor more than what he has really
paid. (1839)

Art. 2068. If the guarantor should pay without notifying the debtor, the latter may enforce against him all the
defenses which he could have set up against the creditor at the time the payment was made. (1840)

Art. 2069. If the debt was for a period and the guarantor paid it before it became due, he cannot demand
reimbursement of the debtor until the expiration of the period unless the payment has been ratified by the debtor.
(1841a)

Art. 2070. If the guarantor has paid without notifying the debtor, and the latter not being aware of the payment,
repeats the payment, the former has no remedy whatever against the debtor, but only against the creditor.
Nevertheless, in case of a gratuitous guaranty, if the guarantor was prevented by a fortuitous event from advising
the debtor of the payment, and the creditor becomes insolvent, the debtor shall reimburse the guarantor for the
amount paid. (1842a)

Art. 2071. The guarantor, even before having paid, may proceed against the principal debtor:

(1) When he is sued for the payment;

(2) In case of insolvency of the principal debtor;

231
 (3) When the debtor has bound himself to relieve him from the guaranty within a specified period, and
this period has expired;

(4) When the debt has become demandable, by reason of the expiration of the period for payment;

(5) After the lapse of ten years, when the principal obligation has no fixed period for its maturity, unless it
be of such nature that it cannot be extinguished except within a period longer than ten years;

(6) If there are reasonable grounds to fear that the principal debtor intends to abscond;

(7) If the principal debtor is in imminent danger of becoming insolvent.

In all these cases, the action of the guarantor is to obtain release from the guaranty, or to demand a security that
shall protect him from any proceedings by the creditor and from the danger of insolvency of the debtor. (1834a)

Art. 2072. If one, at the request of another, becomes a guarantor for the debt of a third person who is not present,
the guarantor who satisfies the debt may sue either the person so requesting or the debtor for reimbursement. (n)

SECTION 3. - Effects of Guaranty as Between Co-Guarantors

Art. 2073. When there are two or more guarantors of the same debtor and for the same debt, the one among them
who has paid may demand of each of the others the share which is proportionally owing from him.

If any of the guarantors should be insolvent, his share shall be borne by the others, including the payer, in the same
proportion.

The provisions of this article shall not be applicable, unless the payment has been made by virtue of a judicial
demand or unless the principal debtor is insolvent. (1844a)

Art. 2074. In the case of the preceding article, the co-guarantors may set up against the one who paid, the same
defenses which would have pertained to the principal debtor against the creditor, and which are not purely
personal to the debtor. (1845)

Art. 2075. A sub-guarantor, in case of the insolvency of the guarantor for whom he bound himself, is responsible to
the co-guarantors in the same terms as the guarantor. (1846)

CHAPTER 3
EXTINGUISHMENT OF GUARANTY

Art. 2076. The obligation of the guarantor is extinguished at the same time as that of the debtor, and for the same
causes as all other obligations. (1847)

Art. 2077. If the creditor voluntarily accepts immovable or other property in payment of the debt, even if he should
afterwards lose the same through eviction, the guarantor is released. (1849)

Art. 2078. A release made by the creditor in favor of one of the guarantors, without the consent of the others,
benefits all to the extent of the share of the guarantor to whom it has been granted. (1850)

231
Art. 2079. An extension granted to the debtor by the creditor without the consent of the guarantor extinguishes
the guaranty. The mere failure on the part of the creditor to demand payment after the debt has become due does
not of itself constitute any extention of time referred to herein. (1851a)

Art. 2080. The guarantors, even though they be solidary, are released from their obligation whenever by some act
of the creditor they cannot be subrogated to the rights, mortgages, and preference of the latter. (1852)

Art. 2081. The guarantor may set up against the creditor all the defenses which pertain to the principal debtor and
are inherent in the debt; but not those that are personal to the debtor. (1853)

CHAPTER 4
LEGAL AND JUDICIAL BONDS

Art. 2082. The bondsman who is to be offered in virtue of a provision of law or of a judicial order shall have the
qualifications prescribed in Article 2056 and in special laws. (1854a)

Art. 2083. If the person bound to give a bond in the cases of the preceding article, should not be able to do so, a
pledge or mortgage considered sufficient to cover his obligation shall be admitted in lieu thereof. (1855)

Art. 2084. A judicial bondsman cannot demand the exhaustion of the property of the principal debtor.

A sub-surety in the same case, cannot demand the exhaustion of the property of the debtor of the surety.

Title XVI. - PLEDGE, MORTGAGE AND ANTICHRESIS

CHAPTER 1
PROVISIONS COMMON TO PLEDGE AND MORTGAGE

Art. 2085. The following requisites are essential to the contracts of pledge and mortgage:
(1) That they be constituted to secure the fulfillment of a principal obligation;

(2) That the pledgor or mortgagor be the absolute owner of the thing pledged or mortgaged;

(3) That the persons constituting the pledge or mortgage have the free disposal of their property, and in
the absence thereof, that they be legally authorized for the purpose.

Third persons who are not parties to the principal obligation may secure the latter by pledging or mortgaging their
own property. (1857)

Art. 2086. The provisions of Article 2052 are applicable to a pledge or mortgage. (n)

231
Art. 2087. It is also of the essence of these contracts that when the principal obligation becomes due, the things in
which the pledge or mortgage consists may be alienated for the payment to the creditor. (1858)

Art. 2088. The creditor cannot appropriate the things given by way of pledge or mortgage, or dispose of them. Any
stipulation to the contrary is null and void. (1859a)

Art. 2089. A pledge or mortgage is indivisible, even though the debt may be divided among the successors in
interest of the debtor or of the creditor.

Therefore, the debtor's heir who has paid a part of the debt cannot ask for the proportionate extinguishment of the
pledge or mortgage as long as the debt is not completely satisfied.

Neither can the creditor's heir who received his share of the debt return the pledge or cancel the mortgage, to the
prejudice of the other heirs who have not been paid.

From these provisions is expected the case in which, there being several things given in mortgage or pledge, each
one of them guarantees only a determinate portion of the credit.

The debtor, in this case, shall have a right to the extinguishment of the pledge or mortgage as the portion of the
debt for which each thing is specially answerable is satisfied. (1860)

Art. 2090. The indivisibility of a pledge or mortgage is not affected by the fact that the debtors are not solidarily
liable. (n)

Art. 2091. The contract of pledge or mortgage may secure all kinds of obligations, be they pure or subject to a
suspensive or resolutory condition. (1861)

Art. 2092. A promise to constitute a pledge or mortgage gives rise only to a personal action between the
contracting parties, without prejudice to the criminal responsibility incurred by him who defrauds another, by
offering in pledge or mortgage as unencumbered, things which he knew were subject to some burden, or by
misrepresenting himself to be the owner of the same. (1862)

CHAPTER 2
PLEDGE

Art. 2093. In addition to the requisites prescribed in Article 2085, it is necessary, in order to constitute the contract
of pledge, that the thing pledged be placed in the possession of the creditor, or of a third person by common
agreement. (1863)

Art. 2094. All movables which are within commerce may be pledged, provided they are susceptible of possession.
(1864)

Art. 2095. Incorporeal rights, evidenced by negotiable instruments, bills of lading, shares of stock, bonds,
warehouse receipts and similar documents may also be pledged. The instrument proving the right pledged shall be
delivered to the creditor, and if negotiable, must be indorsed. (n)

Art. 2096. A pledge shall not take effect against third persons if a description of the thing pledged and the date of
the pledge do not appear in a public instrument. (1865a)

231
Art. 2097. With the consent of the pledgee, the thing pledged may be alienated by the pledgor or owner, subject to
the pledge. The ownership of the thing pledged is transmitted to the vendee or transferee as soon as the pledgee
consents to the alienation, but the latter shall continue in possession. (n)

Art. 2098. The contract of pledge gives a right to the creditor to retain the thing in his possession or in that of a
third person to whom it has been delivered, until the debt is paid. (1866a)

Art. 2099. The creditor shall take care of the thing pledged with the diligence of a good father of a family; he has a
right to the reimbursement of the expenses made for its preservation, and is liable for its loss or deterioration, in
conformity with the provisions of this Code. (1867)

Art. 2100. The pledgee cannot deposit the thing pledged with a third person, unless there is a stipulation
authorizing him to do so.

The pledgee is responsible for the acts of his agents or employees with respect to the thing pledged. (n)

Art. 2101. The pledgor has the same responsibility as a bailor in commodatum in the case under Article 1951. (n)

Art. 2102. If the pledge earns or produces fruits, income, dividends, or interests, the creditor shall compensate
what he receives with those which are owing him; but if none are owing him, or insofar as the amount may exceed
that which is due, he shall apply it to the principal. Unless there is a stipulation to the contrary, the pledge shall
extend to the interest and earnings of the right pledged.

In case of a pledge of animals, their offspring shall pertain to the pledgor or owner of animals pledged, but shall be
subject to the pledge, if there is no stipulation to the contrary. (1868a)

Art. 2103. Unless the thing pledged is expropriated, the debtor continues to be the owner thereof.

Nevertheless, the creditor may bring the actions which pertain to the owner of the thing pledged in order to
recover it from, or defend it against a third person. (1869)

Art. 2104. The creditor cannot use the thing pledged, without the authority of the owner, and if he should do so, or
should misuse the thing in any other way, the owner may ask that it be judicially or extrajudicially deposited. When
the preservation of the thing pledged requires its use, it must be used by the creditor but only for that purpose.
(1870a)

Art. 2105. The debtor cannot ask for the return of the thing pledged against the will of the creditor, unless and until
he has paid the debt and its interest, with expenses in a proper case. (1871)

Art. 2106. If through the negligence or wilful act of the pledgee, the thing pledged is in danger of being lost or
impaired, the pledgor may require that it be deposited with a third person. (n)

Art. 2107. If there are reasonable grounds to fear the destruction or impairment of the thing pledged, without the
fault of the pledgee, the pledgor may demand the return of the thing, upon offering another thing in pledge,
provided the latter is of the same kind as the former and not of inferior quality, and without prejudice to the right
of the pledgee under the provisions of the following article.

The pledgee is bound to advise the pledgor, without delay, of any danger to the thing pledged. (n)

231
Art. 2108. If, without the fault of the pledgee, there is danger of destruction, impairment, or diminution in value of
the thing pledged, he may cause the same to be sold at a public sale. The proceeds of the auction shall be a
security for the principal obligation in the same manner as the thing originally pledged. (n)

Art. 2109. If the creditor is deceived on the substance or quality of the thing pledged, he may either claim another
thing in its stead, or demand immediate payment of the principal obligation. (n)

Art. 2110. If the thing pledged is returned by the pledgee to the pledgor or owner, the pledge is extinguished. Any
stipulation to the contrary shall be void.

If subsequent to the perfection of the pledge, the thing is in the possession of the pledgor or owner, there is a
prima facie presumption that the same has been returned by the pledgee. This same presumption exists if the
thing pledged is in the possession of a third person who has received it from the pledgor or owner after the
constitution of the pledge. (n)

Art. 2111. A statement in writing by the pledgee that he renounces or abandons the pledge is sufficient to
extinguish the pledge. For this purpose, neither the acceptance by the pledgor or owner, nor the return of the thing
pledged is necessary, the pledgee becoming a depositary. (n)

Art. 2112. The creditor to whom the credit has not been satisfied in due time, may proceed before a Notary Public
to the sale of the thing pledged. This sale shall be made at a public auction, and with notification to the debtor and
the owner of the thing pledged in a proper case, stating the amount for which the public sale is to be held. If at the
first auction the thing is not sold, a second one with the same formalities shall be held; and if at the second auction
there is no sale either, the creditor may appropriate the thing pledged. In this case he shall be obliged to give an
acquittance for his entire claim. (1872a)

Art. 2113. At the public auction, the pledgor or owner may bid. He shall, moreover, have a better right if he should
offer the same terms as the highest bidder.

The pledgee may also bid, but his offer shall not be valid if he is the only bidder. (n)

Art. 2114. All bids at the public auction shall offer to pay the purchase price at once. If any other bid is accepted,
the pledgee is deemed to have been received the purchase price, as far as the pledgor or owner is concerned. (n)

Art. 2115. The sale of the thing pledged shall extinguish the principal obligation, whether or not the proceeds of
the sale are equal to the amount of the principal obligation, interest and expenses in a proper case. If the price of
the sale is more than said amount, the debtor shall not be entitled to the excess, unless it is otherwise agreed. If
the price of the sale is less, neither shall the creditor be entitled to recover the deficiency, notwithstanding any
stipulation to the contrary. (n)

Art. 2116. After the public auction, the pledgee shall promptly advise the pledgor or owner of the result thereof. (n)

Art. 2117. Any third person who has any right in or to the thing pledged may satisfy the principal obligation as soon
as the latter becomes due and demandable.(n)

Art. 2118. If a credit which has been pledged becomes due before it is redeemed, the pledgee may collect and
receive the amount due. He shall apply the same to the payment of his claim, and deliver the surplus, should there
be any, to the pledgor. (n)

231
Art. 2119. If two or more things are pledged, the pledgee may choose which he will cause to be sold, unless there is
a stipulation to the contrary. He may demand the sale of only as many of the things as are necessary for the
payment of the debt. (n)

Art. 2120. If a third party secures an obligation by pledging his own movable property under the provisions of
Article 2085 he shall have the same rights as a guarantor under Articles 2066 to 2070, and Articles 2077 to 2081. He
is not prejudiced by any waiver of defense by the principal obligor. (n)

Art. 2121. Pledges created by operation of law, such as those referred to in Articles 546, 1731, and 1994, are
governed by the foregoing articles on the possession, care and sale of the thing as well as on the termination of the
pledge. However, after payment of the debt and expenses, the remainder of the price of the sale shall be delivered
to the obligor. (n)

Art. 2122. A thing under a pledge by operation of law may be sold only after demand of the amount for which the
thing is retained. The public auction shall take place within one month after such demand. If, without just grounds,
the creditor does not cause the public sale to be held within such period, the debtor may require the return of the
thing. (n)

Art. 2123. With regard to pawnshops and other establishments, which are engaged in making loans secured by
pledges, the special laws and regulations concerning them shall be observed, and subsidiarily, the provisions of this
Title. (1873a)

CHAPTER 3
MORTGAGE

Art. 2124. Only the following property may be the object of a contract of mortgage:
(1) Immovables;

(2) Alienable real rights in accordance with the laws, imposed upon immovables.

Nevertheless, movables may be the object of a chattel mortgage. (1874a)

Art. 2125. In addition to the requisites stated in Article 2085, it is indispensable, in order that a mortgage may be
validly constituted, that the document in which it appears be recorded in the Registry of Property. If the instrument
is not recorded, the mortgage is nevertheless binding between the parties.

The persons in whose favor the law establishes a mortgage have no other right than to demand the execution and
the recording of the document in which the mortgage is formalized. (1875a)

Art. 2126. The mortgage directly and immediately subjects the property upon which it is imposed, whoever the
possessor may be, to the fulfillment of the obligation for whose security it was constituted. (1876)

Art. 2127. The mortgage extends to the natural accessions, to the improvements, growing fruits, and the rents or
income not yet received when the obligation becomes due, and to the amount of the indemnity granted or owing
to the proprietor from the insurers of the property mortgaged, or in virtue of expropriation for public use, with the
declarations, amplifications and limitations established by law, whether the estate remains in the possession of the
mortgagor, or it passes into the hands of a third person. (1877)

Art. 2128. The mortgage credit may be alienated or assigned to a third person, in whole or in part, with the
formalities required by law. (1878)

231
Art. 2129. The creditor may claim from a third person in possession of the mortgaged property, the payment of the
part of the credit secured by the property which said third person possesses, in the terms and with the formalities
which the law establishes. (1879)

Art. 2130. A stipulation forbidding the owner from alienating the immovable mortgaged shall be void. (n)

Art. 2131. The form, extent and consequences of a mortgage, both as to its constitution, modification and
extinguishment, and as to other matters not included in this Chapter, shall be governed by the provisions of the
Mortgage Law and of the Land Registration Law. (1880a)

CHAPTER 4
ANTICHRESIS

Art. 2132. By the contract of antichresis the creditor acquires the right to receive the fruits of an immovable of his
debtor, with the obligation to apply them to the payment of the interest, if owing, and thereafter to the principal of
his credit. (1881)

Art. 2133. The actual market value of the fruits at the time of the application thereof to the interest and principal
shall be the measure of such application. (n)

Art. 2134. The amount of the principal and of the interest shall be specified in writing; otherwise, the contract of
antichresis shall be void. (n)

Art. 2135. The creditor, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary, is obliged to pay the taxes and charges upon
the estate.

He is also bound to bear the expenses necessary for its preservation and repair.

The sums spent for the purposes stated in this article shall be deducted from the fruits. (1882)

Art. 2136. The debtor cannot reacquire the enjoyment of the immovable without first having totally paid what he
owes the creditor.

But the latter, in order to exempt himself from the obligations imposed upon him by the preceding article, may
always compel the debtor to enter again upon the enjoyment of the property, except when there is a stipulation to
the contrary. (1883)

Art. 2137. The creditor does not acquire the ownership of the real estate for non-payment of the debt within the
period agreed upon.

Every stipulation to the contrary shall be void. But the creditor may petition the court for the payment of the debt
or the sale of the real property. In this case, the Rules of Court on the foreclosure of mortgages shall apply. (1884a)

Art. 2138. The contracting parties may stipulate that the interest upon the debt be compensated with the fruits of
the property which is the object of the antichresis, provided that if the value of the fruits should exceed the
amount of interest allowed by the laws against usury, the excess shall be applied to the principal. (1885a)

Art. 2139. The last paragraph of Article 2085, and Articles 2089 to 2091 are applicable to this contract. (1886a)

231
 CHAPTER 5
CHATTEL MORTGAGE

Art. 2140. By a chattel mortgage, personal property is recorded in the Chattel Mortgage Register as a security for
the performance of an obligation. If the movable, instead of being recorded, is delivered to the creditor or a third
person, the contract is a pledge and not a chattel mortgage. (n)

Art. 2141. The provisions of this Code on pledge, insofar as they are not in conflict with the Chattel Mortgage Law
shall be applicable to chattel mortgages. (n)

Title XVII. - EXTRA-CONTRACTUAL OBLIGATIONS

CHAPTER 1
QUASI-CONTRACTS

Art. 2142. Certain lawful, voluntary and unilateral acts give rise to the juridical relation of quasi-contract to the end
that no one shall be unjustly enriched or benefited at the expense of another. (n)

Art. 2143. The provisions for quasi-contracts in this Chapter do not exclude other quasi-contracts which may come
within the purview of the preceding article. (n)

SECTION 1. - Negotiorum Gestio

Art. 2144. Whoever voluntarily takes charge of the agency or management of the business or property of another,
without any power from the latter, is obliged to continue the same until the termination of the affair and its
incidents, or to require the person concerned to substitute him, if the owner is in a position to do so. This juridical
relation does not arise in either of these instances:
(1) When the property or business is not neglected or abandoned;

(2) If in fact the manager has been tacitly authorized by the owner.

In the first case, the provisions of Articles 1317, 1403, No. 1, and 1404 regarding unauthorized contracts shall
govern.

In the second case, the rules on agency in Title X of this Book shall be applicable. (1888a)

Art. 2145. The officious manager shall perform his duties with all the diligence of a good father of a family, and pay
the damages which through his fault or negligence may be suffered by the owner of the property or business under
management.

The courts may, however, increase or moderate the indemnity according to the circumstances of each case. (1889a)

Art. 2146. If the officious manager delegates to another person all or some of his duties, he shall be liable for the
acts of the delegate, without prejudice to the direct obligation of the latter toward the owner of the business.

The responsibility of two or more officious managers shall be solidary, unless the management was assumed to
save the thing or business from imminent danger. (1890a)

Art. 2147. The officious manager shall be liable for any fortuitous event:

231
 (1) If he undertakes risky operations which the owner was not accustomed to embark upon;

(2) If he has preferred his own interest to that of the owner;

(3) If he fails to return the property or business after demand by the owner;

(4) If he assumed the management in bad faith. (1891a)

Art. 2148. Except when the management was assumed to save property or business from imminent danger, the
officious manager shall be liable for fortuitous events:
(1) If he is manifestly unfit to carry on the management;

(2) If by his intervention he prevented a more competent person from taking up the management. (n)

Art. 2149. The ratification of the management by the owner of the business produces the effects of an express
agency, even if the business may not have been successful. (1892a)

Art. 2150. Although the officious management may not have been expressly ratified, the owner of the property or
business who enjoys the advantages of the same shall be liable for obligations incurred in his interest, and shall
reimburse the officious manager for the necessary and useful expenses and for the damages which the latter may
have suffered in the performance of his duties.

The same obligation shall be incumbent upon him when the management had for its purpose the prevention of an
imminent and manifest loss, although no benefit may have been derived. (1893)

Art. 2151. Even though the owner did not derive any benefit and there has been no imminent and manifest danger
to the property or business, the owner is liable as under the first paragraph of the preceding article, provided:

(1) The officious manager has acted in good faith, and

(2) The property or business is intact, ready to be returned to the owner. (n)

Art. 2152. The officious manager is personally liable for contracts which he has entered into with third persons,
even though he acted in the name of the owner, and there shall be no right of action between the owner and third
persons. These provisions shall not apply:
(1) If the owner has expressly or tacitly ratified the management, or

(2) When the contract refers to things pertaining to the owner of the business. (n)

Art. 2153. The management is extinguished:

(1) When the owner repudiates it or puts an end thereto;

(2) When the officious manager withdraws from the management, subject to the provisions of Article
2144;

(3) By the death, civil interdiction, insanity or insolvency of the owner or the officious manager. (n)

SECTION 2. - Solutio Indebiti

231
Art. 2154. If something is received when there is no right to demand it, and it was unduly delivered through
mistake, the obligation to return it arises. (1895)

Art. 2155. Payment by reason of a mistake in the construction or application of a doubtful or difficult question of
law may come within the scope of the preceding article. (n)

Art. 2156. If the payer was in doubt whether the debt was due, he may recover if he proves that it was not due. (n)

Art. 2157. The responsibility of two or more payees, when there has been payment of what is not due, is solidary.
(n)

Art. 2158. When the property delivered or money paid belongs to a third person, the payee shall comply with the
provisions of article 1984. (n)

Art. 2159. Whoever in bad faith accepts an undue payment, shall pay legal interest if a sum of money is involved, or
shall be liable for fruits received or which should have been received if the thing produces fruits.

He shall furthermore be answerable for any loss or impairment of the thing from any cause, and for damages to the
person who delivered the thing, until it is recovered. (1896a)

Art. 2160. He who in good faith accepts an undue payment of a thing certain and determinate shall only be
responsible for the impairment or loss of the same or its accessories and accessions insofar as he has thereby been
benefited. If he has alienated it, he shall return the price or assign the action to collect the sum. (1897)

Art. 2161. As regards the reimbursement for improvements and expenses incurred by him who unduly received the
thing, the provisions of Title V of Book II shall govern. (1898)

Art. 2162. He shall be exempt from the obligation to restore who, believing in good faith that the payment was
being made of a legitimate and subsisting claim, destroyed the document, or allowed the action to prescribe, or
gave up the pledges, or cancelled the guaranties for his right. He who paid unduly may proceed only against the
true debtor or the guarantors with regard to whom the action is still effective. (1899)

Art. 2163. It is presumed that there was a mistake in the payment if something which had never been due or had
already been paid was delivered; but he from whom the return is claimed may prove that the delivery was made
out of liberality or for any other just cause. (1901)

SECTION 3. - Other Quasi-Contracts

Art. 2164. When, without the knowledge of the person obliged to give support, it is given by a stranger, the latter
shall have a right to claim the same from the former, unless it appears that he gave it out of piety and without
intention of being repaid. (1894a)

Art. 2165. When funeral expenses are borne by a third person, without the knowledge of those relatives who were
obliged to give support to the deceased, said relatives shall reimburse the third person, should the latter claim
reimbursement. (1894a)

Art. 2166. When the person obliged to support an orphan, or an insane or other indigent person unjustly refuses to
give support to the latter, any third person may furnish support to the needy individual, with right of

231
reimbursement from the person obliged to give support. The provisions of this article apply when the father or
mother of a child under eighteen years of age unjustly refuses to support him.

Art. 2167. When through an accident or other cause a person is injured or becomes seriously ill, and he is treated
or helped while he is not in a condition to give consent to a contract, he shall be liable to pay for the services of the
physician or other person aiding him, unless the service has been rendered out of pure generosity.

Art. 2168. When during a fire, flood, storm, or other calamity, property is saved from destruction by another person
without the knowledge of the owner, the latter is bound to pay the former just compensation.

Art. 2169. When the government, upon the failure of any person to comply with health or safety regulations
concerning property, undertakes to do the necessary work, even over his objection, he shall be liable to pay the
expenses.

Art. 2170. When by accident or other fortuitous event, movables separately pertaining to two or more persons are
commingled or confused, the rules on co-ownership shall be applicable.

Art. 2171. The rights and obligations of the finder of lost personal property shall be governed by Articles 719 and
720.

Art. 2172. The right of every possessor in good faith to reimbursement for necessary and useful expenses is
governed by Article 546.

Art. 2173. When a third person, without the knowledge of the debtor, pays the debt, the rights of the former are
governed by Articles 1236 and 1237.

Art. 2174. When in a small community a nationality of the inhabitants of age decide upon a measure for protection
against lawlessness, fire, flood, storm or other calamity, any one who objects to the plan and refuses to contribute
to the expenses but is benefited by the project as executed shall be liable to pay his share of said expenses.

Art. 2175. Any person who is constrained to pay the taxes of another shall be entitled to reimbursement from the
latter.

CHAPTER 2
QUASI-DELICTS

Art. 2176. Whoever by act or omission causes damage to another, there being fault or negligence, is obliged to pay
for the damage done. Such fault or negligence, if there is no pre-existing contractual relation between the parties,
is called a quasi-delict and is governed by the provisions of this Chapter. (1902a)

Art. 2177. Responsibility for fault or negligence under the preceding article is entirely separate and distinct from
the civil liability arising from negligence under the Penal Code. But the plaintiff cannot recover damages twice for
the same act or omission of the defendant. (n)

Art. 2178. The provisions of Articles 1172 to 1174 are also applicable to a quasi-delict. (n)

Art. 2179. When the plaintiff's own negligence was the immediate and proximate cause of his injury, he cannot
recover damages. But if his negligence was only contributory, the immediate and proximate cause of the injury

231
being the defendant's lack of due care, the plaintiff may recover damages, but the courts shall mitigate the
damages to be awarded. (n)

Art. 2180. The obligation imposed by Article 2176 is demandable not only for one's own acts or omissions, but also
for those of persons for whom one is responsible.

The father and, in case of his death or incapacity, the mother, are responsible for the damages caused by the minor
children who live in their company.

Guardians are liable for damages caused by the minors or incapacitated persons who are under their authority and
live in their company.

The owners and managers of an establishment or enterprise are likewise responsible for damages caused by their
employees in the service of the branches in which the latter are employed or on the occasion of their functions.

Employers shall be liable for the damages caused by their employees and household helpers acting within the
scope of their assigned tasks, even though the former are not engaged in any business or industry.

The State is responsible in like manner when it acts through a special agent; but not when the damage has been
caused by the official to whom the task done properly pertains, in which case what is provided in Article 2176 shall
be applicable.

Lastly, teachers or heads of establishments of arts and trades shall be liable for damages caused by their pupils and
students or apprentices, so long as they remain in their custody.

The responsibility treated of in this article shall cease when the persons herein mentioned prove that they
observed all the diligence of a good father of a family to prevent damage. (1903a)

Art. 2181. Whoever pays for the damage caused by his dependents or employees may recover from the latter what
he has paid or delivered in satisfaction of the claim. (1904)

Art. 2182. If the minor or insane person causing damage has no parents or guardian, the minor or insane person
shall be answerable with his own property in an action against him where a guardian ad litem shall be appointed.
(n)

Art. 2183. The possessor of an animal or whoever may make use of the same is responsible for the damage which it
may cause, although it may escape or be lost. This responsibility shall cease only in case the damage should come
from force majeure or from the fault of the person who has suffered damage. (1905)

Art. 2184. In motor vehicle mishaps, the owner is solidarily liable with his driver, if the former, who was in the
vehicle, could have, by the use of the due diligence, prevented the misfortune. It is disputably presumed that a
driver was negligent, if he had been found guilty or reckless driving or violating traffic regulations at least twice
within the next preceding two months.

If the owner was not in the motor vehicle, the provisions of Article 2180 are applicable. (n)

Art. 2185. Unless there is proof to the contrary, it is presumed that a person driving a motor vehicle has been
negligent if at the time of the mishap, he was violating any traffic regulation. (n)

231
Art. 2186. Every owner of a motor vehicle shall file with the proper government office a bond executed by a
government-controlled corporation or office, to answer for damages to third persons. The amount of the bond and
other terms shall be fixed by the competent public official. (n)

Art. 2187. Manufacturers and processors of foodstuffs, drinks, toilet articles and similar goods shall be liable for
death or injuries caused by any noxious or harmful substances used, although no contractual relation exists
between them and the consumers. (n)

Art. 2188. There is prima facie presumption of negligence on the part of the defendant if the death or injury results
from his possession of dangerous weapons or substances, such as firearms and poison, except when the possession
or use thereof is indispensable in his occupation or business. (n)

Art. 2189. Provinces, cities and municipalities shall be liable for damages for the death of, or injuries suffered by,
any person by reason of the defective condition of roads, streets, bridges, public buildings, and other public works
under their control or supervision. (n)

Art. 2190. The proprietor of a building or structure is responsible for the damages resulting from its total or partial
collapse, if it should be due to the lack of necessary repairs. (1907)

Art. 2191. Proprietors shall also be responsible for damages caused:

(1) By the explosion of machinery which has not been taken care of with due diligence, and the
inflammation of explosive substances which have not been kept in a safe and adequate place;

(2) By excessive smoke, which may be harmful to persons or property;

(3) By the falling of trees situated at or near highways or lanes, if not caused by force majeure;

(4) By emanations from tubes, canals, sewers or deposits of infectious matter, constructed without
precautions suitable to the place. (1908)

Art. 2192. If damage referred to in the two preceding articles should be the result of any defect in the construction
mentioned in Article 1723, the third person suffering damages may proceed only against the engineer or architect
or contractor in accordance with said article, within the period therein fixed. (1909)

Art. 2193. The head of a family that lives in a building or a part thereof, is responsible for damages caused by things
thrown or falling from the same. (1910)

Art. 2194. The responsibility of two or more persons who are liable for quasi-delict is solidary. (n)

Title XVIII. - DAMAGES

CHAPTER 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS

Art. 2195. The provisions of this Title shall be respectively applicable to all obligations mentioned in Article 1157.

Art. 2196. The rules under this Title are without prejudice to special provisions on damages formulated elsewhere
in this Code. Compensation for workmen and other employees in case of death, injury or illness is regulated by

231
special laws. Rules governing damages laid down in other laws shall be observed insofar as they are not in conflict
with this Code.

Art. 2197. Damages may be:

(1) Actual or compensatory;

(2) Moral;

(3) Nominal;

(4) Temperate or moderate;

(5) Liquidated; or

(6) Exemplary or corrective.

Art. 2198. The principles of the general law on damages are hereby adopted insofar as they are not inconsistent
with this Code.
CHAPTER 2
ACTUAL OR COMPENSATORY DAMAGES

Art. 2199. Except as provided by law or by stipulation, one is entitled to an adequate compensation only for such
pecuniary loss suffered by him as he has duly proved. Such compensation is referred to as actual or compensatory
damages.

Art. 2200. Indemnification for damages shall comprehend not only the value of the loss suffered, but also that of
the profits which the obligee failed to obtain. (1106)

Art. 2201. In contracts and quasi-contracts, the damages for which the obligor who acted in good faith is liable shall
be those that are the natural and probable consequences of the breach of the obligation, and which the parties
have foreseen or could have reasonably foreseen at the time the obligation was constituted.

In case of fraud, bad faith, malice or wanton attitude, the obligor shall be responsible for all damages which may be
reasonably attributed to the non-performance of the obligation. (1107a)

Art. 2202. In crimes and quasi-delicts, the defendant shall be liable for all damages which are the natural and
probable consequences of the act or omission complained of. It is not necessary that such damages have been
foreseen or could have reasonably been foreseen by the defendant.

Art. 2203. The party suffering loss or injury must exercise the diligence of a good father of a family to minimize the
damages resulting from the act or omission in question.

Art. 2204. In crimes, the damages to be adjudicated may be respectively increased or lessened according to the
aggravating or mitigating circumstances.

Art. 2205. Damages may be recovered:

(1) For loss or impairment of earning capacity in cases of temporary or permanent personal injury;

231
 (2) For injury to the plaintiff's business standing or commercial credit.

Art. 2206. The amount of damages for death caused by a crime or quasi-delict shall be at least three thousand
pesos, even though there may have been mitigating circumstances. In addition:
(1) The defendant shall be liable for the loss of the earning capacity of the deceased, and the indemnity
shall be paid to the heirs of the latter; such indemnity shall in every case be assessed and awarded by the
court, unless the deceased on account of permanent physical disability not caused by the defendant, had
no earning capacity at the time of his death;

(2) If the deceased was obliged to give support according to the provisions of Article 291, the recipient
who is not an heir called to the decedent's inheritance by the law of testate or intestate succession, may
demand support from the person causing the death, for a period not exceeding five years, the exact
duration to be fixed by the court;

(3) The spouse, legitimate and illegitimate descendants and ascendants of the deceased may demand
moral damages for mental anguish by reason of the death of the deceased.

Art. 2207. If the plaintiff's property has been insured, and he has received indemnity from the insurance company
for the injury or loss arising out of the wrong or breach of contract complained of, the insurance company shall be
subrogated to the rights of the insured against the wrongdoer or the person who has violated the contract. If the
amount paid by the insurance company does not fully cover the injury or loss, the aggrieved party shall be entitled
to recover the deficiency from the person causing the loss or injury.

Art. 2208. In the absence of stipulation, attorney's fees and expenses of litigation, other than judicial costs, cannot
be recovered, except:

(1) When exemplary damages are awarded;

(2) When the defendant's act or omission has compelled the plaintiff to litigate with third persons or to
incur expenses to protect his interest;

(3) In criminal cases of malicious prosecution against the plaintiff;

(4) In case of a clearly unfounded civil action or proceeding against the plaintiff;

(5) Where the defendant acted in gross and evident bad faith in refusing to satisfy the plaintiff's plainly
valid, just and demandable claim;

(6) In actions for legal support;

(7) In actions for the recovery of wages of household helpers, laborers and skilled workers;

(8) In actions for indemnity under workmen's compensation and employer's liability laws;

(9) In a separate civil action to recover civil liability arising from a crime;

(10) When at least double judicial costs are awarded;

(11) In any other case where the court deems it just and equitable that attorney's fees and expenses of
litigation should be recovered.

231
In all cases, the attorney's fees and expenses of litigation must be reasonable.

Art. 2209. If the obligation consists in the payment of a sum of money, and the debtor incurs in delay, the
indemnity for damages, there being no stipulation to the contrary, shall be the payment of the interest agreed
upon, and in the absence of stipulation, the legal interest, which is six per cent per annum. (1108)

Art. 2210. Interest may, in the discretion of the court, be allowed upon damages awarded for breach of contract.

Art. 2211. In crimes and quasi-delicts, interest as a part of the damages may, in a proper case, be adjudicated in the
discretion of the court.

Art. 2212. Interest due shall earn legal interest from the time it is judicially demanded, although the obligation may
be silent upon this point. (1109a)

Art. 2213. Interest cannot be recovered upon unliquidated claims or damages, except when the demand can be
established with reasonably certainty.

Art. 2214. In quasi-delicts, the contributory negligence of the plaintiff shall reduce the damages that he may
recover.

Art. 2215. In contracts, quasi-contracts, and quasi-delicts, the court may equitably mitigate the damages under
circumstances other than the case referred to in the preceding article, as in the following instances:

(1) That the plaintiff himself has contravened the terms of the contract;

(2) That the plaintiff has derived some benefit as a result of the contract;

(3) In cases where exemplary damages are to be awarded, that the defendant acted upon the advice of
counsel;

(4) That the loss would have resulted in any event;

(5) That since the filing of the action, the defendant has done his best to lessen the plaintiff's loss or injury.

CHAPTER 3
OTHER KINDS OF DAMAGES

Art. 2216. No proof of pecuniary loss is necessary in order that moral, nominal, temperate, liquidated or exemplary
damages, may be adjudicated. The assessment of such damages, except liquidated ones, is left to the discretion of
the court, according to the circumstances of each case.

SECTION 1. - Moral Damages

Art. 2217. Moral damages include physical suffering, mental anguish, fright, serious anxiety, besmirched reputation,
wounded feelings, moral shock, social humiliation, and similar injury. Though incapable of pecuniary computation,
moral damages may be recovered if they are the proximate result of the defendant's wrongful act for omission.

Art. 2218. In the adjudication of moral damages, the sentimental value of property, real or personal, may be
considered.

231
Art. 2219. Moral damages may be recovered in the following and analogous cases:

(1) A criminal offense resulting in physical injuries;

(2) Quasi-delicts causing physical injuries;

(3) Seduction, abduction, rape, or other lascivious acts;

(4) Adultery or concubinage;

(5) Illegal or arbitrary detention or arrest;

(6) Illegal search;

(7) Libel, slander or any other form of defamation;

(8) Malicious prosecution;

(9) Acts mentioned in Article 309;

(10) Acts and actions referred to in Articles 21, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 32, 34, and 35.

The parents of the female seduced, abducted, raped, or abused, referred to in No. 3 of this article, may also recover
moral damages.

The spouse, descendants, ascendants, and brothers and sisters may bring the action mentioned in No. 9 of this
article, in the order named.

Art. 2220. Willful injury to property may be a legal ground for awarding moral damages if the court should find
that, under the circumstances, such damages are justly due. The same rule applies to breaches of contract where
the defendant acted fraudulently or in bad faith.

SECTION 2. - Nominal Damages

Art. 2221. Nominal damages are adjudicated in order that a right of the plaintiff, which has been violated or
invaded by the defendant, may be vindicated or recognized, and not for the purpose of indemnifying the plaintiff
for any loss suffered by him.

Art. 2222. The court may award nominal damages in every obligation arising from any source enumerated in Article
1157, or in every case where any property right has been invaded.

Art. 2223. The adjudication of nominal damages shall preclude further contest upon the right involved and all
accessory questions, as between the parties to the suit, or their respective heirs and assigns.

SECTION 3. - Temperate or Moderate Damages

Art. 2224. Temperate or moderate damages, which are more than nominal but less than compensatory damages,
may be recovered when the court finds that some pecuniary loss has been suffered but its amount can not, from
the nature of the case, be provided with certainty.

231
Art. 2225. Temperate damages must be reasonable under the circumstances.

SECTION 4. - Liquidated Damages

Art. 2226. Liquidated damages are those agreed upon by the parties to a contract, to be paid in case of breach
thereof.

Art. 2227. Liquidated damages, whether intended as an indemnity or a penalty, shall be equitably reduced if they
are iniquitous or unconscionable.

Art. 2228. When the breach of the contract committed by the defendant is not the one contemplated by the
parties in agreeing upon the liquidated damages, the law shall determine the measure of damages, and not the
stipulation.

SECTION 5. - Exemplary or Corrective Damages

Art. 2229. Exemplary or corrective damages are imposed, by way of example or correction for the public good, in
addition to the moral, temperate, liquidated or compensatory damages.

Art. 2230. In criminal offenses, exemplary damages as a part of the civil liability may be imposed when the crime
was committed with one or more aggravating circumstances. Such damages are separate and distinct from fines
and shall be paid to the offended party.

Art. 2231. In quasi-delicts, exemplary damages may be granted if the defendant acted with gross negligence.

Art. 2232. In contracts and quasi-contracts, the court may award exemplary damages if the defendant acted in a
wanton, fraudulent, reckless, oppressive, or malevolent manner.

Art. 2233. Exemplary damages cannot be recovered as a matter of right; the court will decide whether or not they
should be adjudicated.

Art. 2234. While the amount of the exemplary damages need not be proved, the plaintiff must show that he is
entitled to moral, temperate or compensatory damages before the court may consider the question of whether or
not exemplary damages should be awarded. In case liquidated damages have been agreed upon, although no proof
of loss is necessary in order that such liquidated damages may be recovered, nevertheless, before the court may
consider the question of granting exemplary in addition to the liquidated damages, the plaintiff must show that he
would be entitled to moral, temperate or compensatory damages were it not for the stipulation for liquidated
damages.

Art. 2235. A stipulation whereby exemplary damages are renounced in advance shall be null and void.

Title XIX. - CONCURRENCE AND PREFERENCE

OF CREDITS

CHAPTER 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS

231
Art. 2236. The debtor is liable with all his property, present and future, for the fulfillment of his obligations, subject
to the exemptions provided by law. (1911a)

Art. 2237. Insolvency shall be governed by special laws insofar as they are not inconsistent with this Code. (n)

Art. 2238. So long as the conjugal partnership or absolute community subsists, its property shall not be among the
assets to be taken possession of by the assignee for the payment of the insolvent debtor's obligations, except
insofar as the latter have redounded to the benefit of the family. If it is the husband who is insolvent, the
administration of the conjugal partnership of absolute community may, by order of the court, be transferred to the
wife or to a third person other than the assignee. (n)

Art. 2239. If there is property, other than that mentioned in the preceding article, owned by two or more persons,
one of whom is the insolvent debtor, his undivided share or interest therein shall be among the assets to be taken
possession of by the assignee for the payment of the insolvent debtor's obligations. (n)

Art. 2240. Property held by the insolvent debtor as a trustee of an express or implied trust, shall be excluded from
the insolvency proceedings. (n)

CHAPTER 2
CLASSIFICATION OF CREDITS

Art. 2241. With reference to specific movable property of the debtor, the following claims or liens shall be
preferred:
(1) Duties, taxes and fees due thereon to the State or any subdivision thereof;

(2) Claims arising from misappropriation, breach of trust, or malfeasance by public officials committed in
the performance of their duties, on the movables, money or securities obtained by them;

(3) Claims for the unpaid price of movables sold, on said movables, so long as they are in the possession of
the debtor, up to the value of the same; and if the movable has been resold by the debtor and the price is
still unpaid, the lien may be enforced on the price; this right is not lost by the immobilization of the thing
by destination, provided it has not lost its form, substance and identity; neither is the right lost by the sale
of the thing together with other property for a lump sum, when the price thereof can be determined
proportionally;

(4) Credits guaranteed with a pledge so long as the things pledged are in the hands of the creditor, or
those guaranteed by a chattel mortgage, upon the things pledged or mortgaged, up to the value thereof;

(5) Credits for the making, repair, safekeeping or preservation of personal property, on the movable thus
made, repaired, kept or possessed;

(6) Claims for laborers' wages, on the goods manufactured or the work done;

(7) For expenses of salvage, upon the goods salvaged;

(8) Credits between the landlord and the tenant, arising from the contract of tenancy on shares, on the
share of each in the fruits or harvest;

231
 (9) Credits for transportation, upon the goods carried, for the price of the contract and incidental
expenses, until their delivery and for thirty days thereafter;

(10) Credits for lodging and supplies usually furnished to travellers by hotel keepers, on the movables
belonging to the guest as long as such movables are in the hotel, but not for money loaned to the guests;

(11) Credits for seeds and expenses for cultivation and harvest advanced to the debtor, upon the fruits
harvested;

(12) Credits for rent for one year, upon the personal property of the lessee existing on the immovable
leased and on the fruits of the same, but not on money or instruments of credit;

(13) Claims in favor of the depositor if the depositary has wrongfully sold the thing deposited, upon the
price of the sale.

In the foregoing cases, if the movables to which the lien or preference attaches have been wrongfully
taken, the creditor may demand them from any possessor, within thirty days from the unlawful seizure.
(1922a)

Art. 2242. With reference to specific immovable property and real rights of the debtor, the following claims,
mortgages and liens shall be preferred, and shall constitute an encumbrance on the immovable or real right:
(1) Taxes due upon the land or building;

(2) For the unpaid price of real property sold, upon the immovable sold;

(3) Claims of laborers, masons, mechanics and other workmen, as well as of architects, engineers and
contractors, engaged in the construction, reconstruction or repair of buildings, canals or other works,
upon said buildings, canals or other works;

(4) Claims of furnishers of materials used in the construction, reconstruction, or repair of buildings, canals
or other works, upon said buildings, canals or other works;

(5) Mortgage credits recorded in the Registry of Property, upon the real estate mortgaged;

(6) Expenses for the preservation or improvement of real property when the law authorizes
reimbursement, upon the immovable preserved or improved;

(7) Credits annotated in the Registry of Property, in virtue of a judicial order, by attachments or executions,
upon the property affected, and only as to later credits;

(8) Claims of co-heirs for warranty in the partition of an immovable among them, upon the real property
thus divided;

(9) Claims of donors or real property for pecuniary charges or other conditions imposed upon the donee,
upon the immovable donated;

(10) Credits of insurers, upon the property insured, for the insurance premium for two years. (1923a)

231
Art. 2243. The claims or credits enumerated in the two preceding articles shall be considered as mortgages or
pledges of real or personal property, or liens within the purview of legal provisions governing insolvency. Taxes
mentioned in No. 1, Article 2241, and No. 1, Article 2242, shall first be satisfied. (n)

Art. 2244. With reference to other property, real and personal, of the debtor, the following claims or credits shall be
preferred in the order named:

(1) Proper funeral expenses for the debtor, or children under his or her parental authority who have no
property of their own, when approved by the court;

(2) Credits for services rendered the insolvent by employees, laborers, or household helpers for one year
preceding the commencement of the proceedings in insolvency;

(3) Expenses during the last illness of the debtor or of his or her spouse and children under his or her
parental authority, if they have no property of their own;

(4) Compensation due the laborers or their dependents under laws providing for indemnity for damages in
cases of labor accident, or illness resulting from the nature of the employment;

(5) Credits and advancements made to the debtor for support of himself or herself, and family, during the
last year preceding the insolvency;

(6) Support during the insolvency proceedings, and for three months thereafter;

(7) Fines and civil indemnification arising from a criminal offense;

(8) Legal expenses, and expenses incurred in the administration of the insolvent's estate for the common
interest of the creditors, when properly authorized and approved by the court;

(9) Taxes and assessments due the national government, other than those mentioned in Articles 2241, No.
1, and 2242, No. 1;

(10) Taxes and assessments due any province, other than those referred to in Articles 2241, No. 1, and
2242, No. 1;

(11) Taxes and assessments due any city or municipality, other than those indicated in Articles 2241, No. 1,
and 2242, No. 1;

(12) Damages for death or personal injuries caused by a quasi-delict;

(13) Gifts due to public and private institutions of charity or beneficence;

(14) Credits which, without special privilege, appear in (a) a public instrument; or (b) in a final judgment, if
they have been the subject of litigation. These credits shall have preference among themselves in the
order of priority of the dates of the instruments and of the judgments, respectively. (1924a)

Art. 2245. Credits of any other kind or class, or by any other right or title not comprised in the four preceding
articles, shall enjoy no preference. (1925)

CHAPTER 3

231
 ORDER OF PREFERENCE OF CREDITS

Art. 2246. Those credits which enjoy preference with respect to specific movables, exclude all others to the extent
of the value of the personal property to which the preference refers.

Art. 2247. If there are two or more credits with respect to the same specific movable property, they shall be
satisfied pro rata, after the payment of duties, taxes and fees due the State or any subdivision thereof. (1926a)

Art. 2248. Those credits which enjoy preference in relation to specific real property or real rights, exclude all others
to the extent of the value of the immovable or real right to which the preference refers.

Art. 2249. If there are two or more credits with respect to the same specific real property or real rights, they shall
be satisfied pro rata, after the payment of the taxes and assessments upon the immovable property or real right.
(1927a)

Art. 2250. The excess, if any, after the payment of the credits which enjoy preference with respect to specific
property, real or personal, shall be added to the free property which the debtor may have, for the payment of the
other credits. (1928a)

Art. 2251. Those credits which do not enjoy any preference with respect to specific property, and those which
enjoy preference, as to the amount not paid, shall be satisfied according to the following rules:

(1) In the order established in Article 2244;

(2) Common credits referred to in Article 2245 shall be paid pro rata regardless of dates. (1929a)

TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS

Art. 2252. Changes made and new provisions and rules laid down by this Code which may prejudice or impair
vested or acquired rights in accordance with the old legislation shall have no retroactive effect.

For the determination of the applicable law in cases which are not specified elsewhere in this Code, the following
articles shall be observed: (Pars. 1 and 2, Transitional Provisions).

Art. 2253. The Civil Code of 1889 and other previous laws shall govern rights originating, under said laws, from acts
done or events which took place under their regime, even though this Code may regulate them in a different
manner, or may not recognize them. But if a right should be declared for the first time in this Code, it shall be
effective at once, even though the act or event which gives rise thereto may have been done or may have occurred
under prior legislation, provided said new right does not prejudice or impair any vested or acquired right, of the
same origin. (Rule 1)

Art. 2254. No vested or acquired right can arise from acts or omissions which are against the law or which infringe
upon the rights of others. (n)

Art. 2255. The former laws shall regulate acts and contracts with a condition or period, which were executed or
entered into before the effectivity of this Code, even though the condition or period may still be pending at the
time this body of laws goes into effect. (n)

231
Art. 2256. Acts and contracts under the regime of the old laws, if they are valid in accordance therewith, shall
continue to be fully operative as provided in the same, with the limitations established in these rules. But the
revocation or modification of these acts and contracts after the beginning of the effectivity of this Code, shall be
subject to the provisions of this new body of laws. (Rule 2a)

Art. 2257. Provisions of this Code which attach a civil sanction or penalty or a deprivation of rights to acts or
omissions which were not penalized by the former laws, are not applicable to those who, when said laws were in
force, may have executed the act or incurred in the omission forbidden or condemned by this Code.

If the fault is also punished by the previous legislation, the less severe sanction shall be applied.

If a continuous or repeated act or omission was commenced before the beginning of the effectivity of this Code,
and the same subsists or is maintained or repeated after this body of laws has become operative, the sanction or
penalty prescribed in this Code shall be applied, even though the previous laws may not have provided any
sanction or penalty therefor. (Rule 3a)

Art. 2258. Actions and rights which came into being but were not exercised before the effectivity of this Code, shall
remain in full force in conformity with the old legislation; but their exercise, duration and the procedure to enforce
them shall be regulated by this Code and by the Rules of Court. If the exercise of the right or of the action was
commenced under the old laws, but is pending on the date this Code takes effect, and the procedure was different
from that established in this new body of laws, the parties concerned may choose which method or course to
pursue. (Rule 4)

Art. 2259. The capacity of a married woman to execute acts and contracts is governed by this Code, even if her
marriage was celebrated under the former laws. (n)

Art. 2260. The voluntary recognition of a natural child shall take place according to this Code, even if the child was
born before the effectivity of this body of laws. (n)

Art. 2261. The exemption prescribed in Article 302 shall also be applicable to any support, pension or gratuity
already existing or granted before this Code becomes effective. (n)

Art. 2262. Guardians of the property of minors, appointed by the courts before this Code goes into effect, shall
continue to act as such, notwithstanding the provisions of Article 320. (n)

Art. 2263. Rights to the inheritance of a person who died, with or without a will, before the effectivity of this Code,
shall be governed by the Civil Code of 1889, by other previous laws, and by the Rules of Court. The inheritance of
those who, with or without a will, die after the beginning of the effectivity of this Code, shall be adjudicated and
distributed in accordance with this new body of laws and by the Rules of Court; but the testamentary provisions
shall be carried out insofar as they may be permitted by this Code. Therefore, legitimes, betterments, legacies and
bequests shall be respected; however, their amount shall be reduced if in no other manner can every compulsory
heir be given his full share according to this Code. (Rule 12a)

Art. 2264. The status and rights of natural children by legal fiction referred to in article 89 and illegitimate children
mentioned in Article 287, shall also be acquired by children born before the effectivity of this Code. (n)

Art. 2265. The right of retention of real or personal property arising after this Code becomes effective, includes
those things which came into the creditor's possession before said date. (n)

Art. 2266. The following shall have not only prospective but also retroactive effect:

231
 (1) Article 315, whereby a descendant cannot be compelled, in a criminal case, to testify against his
parents and ascendants;

(2) Articles 101 and 88, providing against collusion in cases of legal separation and annulment of marriage;

(3) Articles 283, 284, and 289, concerning the proof of illegitimate filiation;

(4) Article 838, authorizing the probate of a will on petition of the testator himself;

(5) Articles 1359 to 1369, relative to the reformation of instruments;

(6) Articles 476 to 481, regulating actions to quiet title;

(7) Articles 2029 to 2031, which are designed to promote compromise. (n)

Art. 2267. The following provisions shall apply not only to future cases but also to those pending on the date this
Code becomes effective:
(1) Article 29, Relative to criminal prosecutions wherein the accused is acquitted on the ground that his
guilt has not been proved beyond reasonable doubt;

(2) Article 33, concerning cases of defamation, fraud, and physical injuries. (n)

Art. 2268. Suits between members of the same family which are pending at the time this Code goes into effect shall
be suspended, under such terms as the court may determine, in order that compromise may be earnestly sought,
or, in case of legal separation proceedings, for the purpose of effecting, if possible, a reconciliation. (n)

Art. 2269. The principles upon which the preceding transitional provisions are based shall, by analogy, be applied to
cases not specifically regulated by them. (Rule 13a)

REPEALING CLAUSE

Art. 2270. The following laws and regulations are hereby repealed:
(1) Those parts and provisions of the Civil Code of 1889 which are in force on the date when this new Civil
Code becomes effective:

(2) The provisions of the Code of Commerce governing sales, partnership, agency, loan, deposit and
guaranty;

(3) The provisions of the Code of Civil Procedure on prescription as far as inconsistent with this Code; and

(4) All laws, Acts, parts of Acts, rules of court, executive orders, and administrative regulations which are
inconsistent with this Code. (n)

231